U.S.A.
Sumitomo Machinery Corporation of America (SMA)
4200 Holland Blvd. Chesapeake,VA 23323,U.S.A.
Tel:+1-757-485-3355
Fax:+1-757-485-7490

Germany
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH (SCG)
Cyclostraße 92, 85229 Markt Indersdorf, Germany
Tel:+49-8136-66-0
Fax:+49-8136-5771

Argentina
SM Cyclo de Argentina S.A. (SMAR)
Ing. Delpini, 2236Area de Promocion el Triangulo,
Partido Malvinas Argentinas Grand Bourg,
Buenos Aires, Argentina - B1615KGB
Tel:+54-3327-45-4095
Fax:+54-3327-45-4099

Austria
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH (SCG)
SCG Branch Austria Office
Gruentalerstraße 30A, 4020 Linz, Austria
Tel:+43-732-330958
Fax:+43-732-331978

Chile
SM Cyclo de Chile, Ltda. (SMCH)
San Pablo 3507, Quinta Normal
Santiago, Chile
Tel:+56-2-892-7000
Fax:+56-2-892-7001
MexicoSM Cyclo de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. (SMME)
Av. Desarrollo No. 541, Parque Industrial Finsa
Guadalaupe
Guadalaupe, Nuevo Leon, Mexico, CP67114
Tel:+52-81-8144-5130
Fax:+52-81-8369-3699
CanadaSM Cyclo of Canada, Ltd. (SMC)
1453 Cornwall Road,Oakville,
Canada ON L6J 7T5
Tel:+1-905-469-1050
Fax:+1-905-469-1055
GuatemalaSM Cyclo de Guatemala Ensambladora, Ltda. (SMGT)Parque Industrial Unisur, 0 Calle B 19-50 Zona 3,
Bodega D-1 Delta Bárcenas en Villa Nueva, Guatemala
Tel:+502-6648-0500
Fax:+502-6631-9171
Colombia
SM Cyclo Colombia, S.A.S.
Carrera 11, No.93A-53, Office 203, Bogotá, Colombia
Tel:+57-1-3000673

Belgium
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH (SCG)
SCG Branch Benelux OfficeHeikneuterlaan 23, 3010 Kessel-Lo, Leuven, Belgium
Tel:+32-16-60-83-11
Fax:+32-16-60-16-39
FranceSM-Cyclo France SAS (SMFR)
8 Avenue Christian Doppler, 77700 Serris, France
Tel:+33-164171717
Fax:+33-164171718
Italy
SM-Cyclo Italy Srl (SMIT)
Via dell' Artigianato 23, 20010 Cornaredo (MI), Italy
Tel:+39-293-481101
Fax:+39-293-481103
TurkeySM Cyclo Turkey Güç Aktarım Sis. Tic. Ltd. Sti. (SMTR)
Büyükdere Çayırbaşı Cd. Dede Yusuf Sk. No:11,
34453 Sarıyer Istanbul, Turkey
Tel:+90-216-384-4482
Fax:+90-216-384-4482
Spain
SM-Cyclo Iberia, S.L.U. (SMIB)
C/Landabarri No. 3, 6˚B, 48940 Leioa, Vizcaya, Spain
Tel:+34-9448-05389
Fax:+34-9448-01550
SwedenSM-Cyclo Scandinavia AB (SMSC)
Industrigatan 21B, 234 35 Lomma, Sweden
Tel:+46-40220030

Hong Kong
SM-Cyclo of Hong Kong Co.,Ltd. (SMHK)
Rm 1301, CEO Tower, 77 Wing Hong Street,
Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel:+852-2460-1881
Fax:+852-2460-1882
Korea
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Korea, Ltd. (SCK)Royal Bldg. 9F Rm.913, 5 Danju-Dong, Chongro-Ku,
Seoul, Korea 110-721
Tel:+82-2-730-0151
Fax:+82-2-730-0156
TaiwanTatung SM-Cyclo Co., Ltd. (TSC)
22 Chungshan N. Road 3rd., Sec. Taipei, Taiwan 104,
R.O.C.
Tel:+886-2-2595-7275
Fax:+886-2-2595-5594
Singapore
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. (SCA)
15 Kwong Min Road, Singapore 628718
Tel:+65-6591-7800
Fax:+65-6863-4238
Philippines
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. (SCA)
Philippines Branch Office
B2B Granville Industrial Complex, Carmona,
Cavite, Philippines
Tel:+63-2-584-4921
Tel:+63-46-430-3591
Tel:+63-46-482-0580
Tel:+63-46-482-0581
Fax:+63-2-584-4922

Vietnam
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. (SCA)
SCA Representative Office in Ho Chi Minh10th Floor, ACB Tower. 444A-446 Cach Mang
Thang Tam Street, Ward 11, Dist.3, HCMC. Vietnam
Tel:+84-8-39-930-021
Fax:+84-8-39-930-061
Malaysia
SM-Cyclo of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd. (SMMA)
No.7C, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/56, Kota Kemuning,
Seksyen 31, 40460 Shah Alam, Selangor D.E., Malaysia
Tel:+60-3-51210455
Fax:+60-3-51210578
Indonesia
PT. SM-Cyclo Indonesia
Kawasan Industri Lippo Cikarang
Jalan Sungkai Blok F 25 No.09 K Delta Silicon 3
Lippo Cikarang, Bekasi, Indonesia
Tel:+62-21-5785-3181
Fax:+62-21-5795-1210
Thailand
SM-Cyclo (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
195 Empire Tower, 21st Fl., Unit 2103-4, South
Sathorn Rd.,
Yannawa Sathorn, Bangkok 10120, Thailand
Tel:+66-2-670-0998
Fax:+66-2-670-0999
Australia
Sumitomo (SHI) Hansen Australia Pty. Ltd. (SHAU)
181 Power Street Glendenning NSW 2761, Australia
Tel:+61-2-9208-3000
Fax:+61-2-9208-3050
India
Sumi-Cyclo Drive India Pvt. Ltd. (SMIN)
Survey No.130, Hissa No.02, Jeevan Nagar,
Off Mumbai-Bangalore bypass, Tathawade,Pune-411 033, India
Tel:+91-20-6674-2900
Fax:+91-20-6674-2901
Japan
Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd.
ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome,
Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan
Tel:+81-3-6737-2511
Fax:+81-3-6866-5160

United Kingdom
SM-Cyclo UK Ltd. (SMUK)Unit 29, Bergen Way, Sutton Fields Industrial Estate,
Kingston upon Hull, HU7 0YQ, East Yorkshire,
United Kingdom
Tel:+44-1482-790340
Fax:+44-1482-790321

Specifications, dimensions, and other items are subject to change without prior notice.

Technical Manual

BrazilSM Cyclo Redutores do Brasil, Com.Ltda. (SMBR)
Av. Marquês de São Vicente, 587 - Barra Funda,
São Paulo - SP, 01139-001, Brasil
Tel:+55-11-5585-3600
Fax:+55-11-5585-3600

China
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive China, Ltd. (SCT)
11F,SMEG Plaza, No.1386 Hongqiao Road,
Changning District, Shanghai. （P.C.200336）
Tel:+86-21-3462-7877
Fax:+86-21-3462-7922

Inverter SF-520 series

Worldwide Sumitomo Network

Inverter SF-520 series
Technical Manual
Type:
SF520□-□□□
Models: 200 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.1 to 2.2 kW
200 V Class, Single-Phase Input: 0.2 to 1.5 kW
400 V Class, Three-Phase Input: 0.2 to 2.2 kW

NOTICE

1. Make sure that this technical manual is delivered tothe end user of inverter unit.
2. Read this manual before installing or operating theinverter unit, and store it in a safe place forreference.
Receiving1

Mechanical Installation

2

Electrical Installation

3

Start-Up Programming &Operation

4

Parameter Details

5

Troubleshooting

6

Periodic Inspection &Maintenance

7

Peripheral Devices &Options

8

Specifications

A

Parameter List

B

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

C

Standarads ComplianceD

Quick Reference SheetE

Warranty

F

E10A

Power Transmission & Controls Group
Headquarter ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan

No.DM2202E-1.0

Printed 2014.11

ManualNo. DM2202E-1

﻿Copyright © 2014 Sumitomo Heavy Industries, LTD. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Sumitomo. No patent liability is
assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Sumitomo is constantly striving to improve its
high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the
preparation of this manual. Sumitomo assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained in this publication.
2

Table of Contents
i. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY...........................................................................9
i.1

i.2

Preface..........................................................................................................................10
Applicable Documentation...................................................................................................................10
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................10
Terms and Abbreviations........................................................................................................................10
General Safety.............................................................................................................11
Supplemental Safety Information.......................................................................................................11
Safety Messages.........................................................................................................................................11
Drive Label Warnings...............................................................................................................................13

1 RECEIVING........................................................................................................15
1.1 Section Safety..............................................................................................................16
1.2 Model Number and Nameplate Check.......................................................................17
Nameplate...................................................................................................................................................17
1.3 Component Names......................................................................................................19
IP20/Open-Chassis....................................................................................................................................19
Front Views..................................................................................................................................................21

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..........................................................................23
2.1 Section Safety..............................................................................................................24
2.2 Mechanical Installation...............................................................................................26
Installation Environment........................................................................................................................26
Installation Orientation and Spacing.................................................................................................27
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...................................................................................................28

3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................31
3.1 Section Safety..............................................................................................................32
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram...................................................................................34
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram..............................................................................36
Single-Phase 200 V Class Models SF520S-A20 to 1A5.................................................................36
Three-Phase 200 V Class Models SF5202-A10 to 2A2Three-Phase 400 V Class Models SF5204-A20 to 2A2..................................................................36
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration.....................................................................................37
3.5 Protective Covers.........................................................................................................38
IP20/Open-Chassis Cover Removal and Installation....................................................................38
3.6 Main Circuit Wiring......................................................................................................39
Main Circuit Terminal Functions..........................................................................................................39
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque..................................................................................................39
Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring..............................................................41
3.7 Control Circuit Wiring..................................................................................................43

3

Table of Contents

Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions..........................................................................................43
Terminal Configuration...........................................................................................................................44
Wiring Procedure.......................................................................................................................................45
3.8 I/O Connections...........................................................................................................47
Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch............................................................................................................47
3.9 Main Frequency Reference.........................................................................................49
DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection..................................................................................49
3.10 Braking Resistor...........................................................................................................50
Installation...................................................................................................................................................50
3.11 Interlocking with Connected Machinery...................................................................51
Drive Ready Signal....................................................................................................................................51
3.12 Wiring Checklist...........................................................................................................52

4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION.....................................................53
4.1 Section Safety..............................................................................................................54
4.2 Using the Digital LED Operator..................................................................................56
Keys, Displays, and LEDs.........................................................................................................................56
Digital Text Display...................................................................................................................................57
LED Screen Displays.................................................................................................................................57
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications..................................................................................................57
Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator.........................................................................................58
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes..........................................................................59
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes............................................................................59
Changing Parameter Settings or Values............................................................................................62
Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu.....................................................................................62
Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE..........................................................................................63
Parameters Available in the Setup Group........................................................................................63
4.4 Start-up Flowchart.......................................................................................................64
Flowchart: Basic Start-up........................................................................................................................64
4.5 Powering Up the Drive................................................................................................65
Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display.................................................................65
V/f Pattern Setting.....................................................................................................................................65
4.6 No-Load Operation Test Run.......................................................................................66
No-Load Operation Test Run.................................................................................................................66
4.7 Test Run with Load Connected...................................................................................67
Test Run with the Load Connected.....................................................................................................67
4.8 Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings..........................................................68
Parameter Access Level: A1-01.............................................................................................................68
Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05.........................................................................................................68
Copy Function (Optional).......................................................................................................................68
4.9 Test Run Checklist........................................................................................................69

5. PARAMETER DETAILS.......................................................................................71
5.1 A: Initialization.............................................................................................................72
A1: Initialization.........................................................................................................................................72
5.2 b: Application...............................................................................................................75
b1: Mode of Operation............................................................................................................................75
b2: DC Injection Braking.........................................................................................................................79
5.3 C: Tuning.......................................................................................................................81
C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times.........................................................................................81
C2: S-Curve Characteristics....................................................................................................................82
C3: Slip Compensation............................................................................................................................82
C4: Torque Compensation......................................................................................................................82
C6: Carrier Frequency...............................................................................................................................83
5.4 d: Reference Settings...................................................................................................864

Table of Contents

d1: Frequency Reference........................................................................................................................86
d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits....................................................................................................87
d3: Jump Frequency.................................................................................................................................88
d4: Frequency Hold Function................................................................................................................89
5.5 E: Motor Parameters....................................................................................................90
E1: V/f Characteristics...............................................................................................................................90
E2: Motor 1 Parameters...........................................................................................................................92
5.6 H: Terminal Functions..................................................................................................94
H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs........................................................................................................94
H2: Multi-Function Output.....................................................................................................................99
H3: Analog Input Terminal A1 Settings.......................................................................................... 103
H4: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM........................................................................ 106
H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication......................................................................... 106
5.7 L: Protection Functions.............................................................................................107
L1: Motor Protection Functions......................................................................................................... 107
L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru............................................................................................ 108
L3: Stall Prevention................................................................................................................................ 109
L4: Speed Agree...................................................................................................................................... 111
L5: Fault Restart....................................................................................................................................... 112
L6: Torque Detection............................................................................................................................. 113
L8: Hardware Protection...................................................................................................................... 114
5.8 n: Special Adjustments..............................................................................................116
n1: Hunting Prevention........................................................................................................................ 116
n3: Overexcitation Deceleration....................................................................................................... 116
5.9 o: Operator Related Settings....................................................................................117
o1: Display Settings and Selections................................................................................................. 117
o2: Operator Key Selections............................................................................................................... 117
o3: Copy Function.................................................................................................................................. 118
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings.................................................................................................. 120
5.10 U: Monitor Parameters..............................................................................................122
U1: Operation Status Monitors.......................................................................................................... 122
U2: Fault History...................................................................................................................................... 122
U4: Maintenance Monitors.................................................................................................................. 122

6. TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................123
6.1 Section Safety............................................................................................................124
6.2 Motor Performance Fine Tuning...............................................................................126
Parameters for Tuning the Drive....................................................................................................... 126
Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters.................................................................. 126
6.3 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors...............................................................................127
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors................................................................................................... 127
Alarm and Error Displays..................................................................................................................... 127
6.4 Fault Detection..........................................................................................................129
Fault Displays, Causes and Possible Solutions............................................................................. 129
6.5 Alarm Detection.........................................................................................................136
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions.............................................................................. 136
6.6 Operator Programming Errors.................................................................................139
oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions................................................................................... 139
6.7 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults.............................................................................141
Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss............................................................................ 141
If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs........................................................................... 141
Viewing Fault History Data After Fault............................................................................................ 141
Fault Reset Methods.............................................................................................................................. 141
6.8 Troubleshooting without Fault Display...................................................................142
Cannot Change Parameter Settings................................................................................................ 142
Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering External Run Command... 142
5

Table of Contents

7. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE....................................................149
7.1 Section Safety............................................................................................................150
7.2 Inspection..................................................................................................................152
Recommended Daily Inspection...................................................................................................... 152
Recommended Periodic Inspection................................................................................................ 153
7.3 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................154
Replacement Parts................................................................................................................................. 154
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans.....................................................................................................156
Number of Cooling Fans...................................................................................................................... 156
Cooling Fan Replacement................................................................................................................... 157

8. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS................................................................159
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

Section Safety............................................................................................................160
Drive Options and Peripheral Devices.....................................................................161
Connecting Peripheral Devices................................................................................163
Installing Peripheral Devices....................................................................................164
Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCB) and Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)..... 164
Installing a Leakage Breaker............................................................................................................... 164
Installing a Magnetic Contactor........................................................................................................ 165
Connecting an AC or DC Reactor...................................................................................................... 165
Connecting a Surge Absorber........................................................................................................... 166
Connecting a Noise Filter.................................................................................................................... 166
EMC Filter Installation........................................................................................................................... 168
Zero-Phase Reactor............................................................................................................................... 168
Installing Fuses on the Input Side.................................................................................................... 168
Noise Filter Installation......................................................................................................................... 169
Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive Output................................ 169
8.5 Options.......................................................................................................................170
Interface Options.................................................................................................................................... 170
Other Options.......................................................................................................................................... 170

A. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................171
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6

Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings.....................................................................172
Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive.....................................................................173
Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives................................................................................174
Drive Specifications...................................................................................................175
Drive Watt Loss Data..................................................................................................177
Drive Derating Data...................................................................................................178
Carrier Frequency Derating................................................................................................................ 178
Temperature Derating.......................................................................................................................... 178
Altitude Derating.................................................................................................................................... 178

B. PARAMETER LIST............................................................................................179
B.1 Parameter Groups.....................................................................................................180
B.2 Parameter Table.........................................................................................................181
A: Initialization Parameters................................................................................................................. 181
b: Application........................................................................................................................................... 181
C: Tuning.................................................................................................................................................... 182
d: References............................................................................................................................................ 184
E: Motor Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 185
H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals........................................................................................ 186
L: Protection Function.......................................................................................................................... 189
n: Advanced Performance Set-Up.................................................................................................... 191
o: Operator Related Parameters........................................................................................................ 192
U: Monitors............................................................................................................................................... 193
6

Table of Contents

B.3 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD..................................................195

C. MEMOBUS/MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS....................................................197
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4

Section Safety............................................................................................................198
MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration..........................................................................199
Communication Specifications.................................................................................200
Connecting to a Network..........................................................................................201
Network Cable Connection................................................................................................................ 201
Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connections.................................................................................... 202
Network Termination............................................................................................................................ 203
C.5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters....................................................................204
MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication................................................................................. 204
C.6 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus................................................................206
Observing the Drive Operation......................................................................................................... 206
Controlling the Drive............................................................................................................................ 206
C.7 Communications Timing...........................................................................................207
Command Messages from Master to Drive.................................................................................. 207
Response Messages from Drive to Master.................................................................................... 207
C.8 Message Format.........................................................................................................208
Message Content.................................................................................................................................... 208
Slave Address........................................................................................................................................... 208
Function Code......................................................................................................................................... 208
Data............................................................................................................................................................. 208
Error Check............................................................................................................................................... 208
Command Data....................................................................................................................................... 208
C.9 Message Examples....................................................................................................210
Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents............................................................. 210
Loopback Test.......................................................................................................................................... 210
Writing to Multiple Registers............................................................................................................. 211
C.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table................................................................................212
Command Data....................................................................................................................................... 212
Monitor Data............................................................................................................................................ 213
Broadcast Messages.............................................................................................................................. 217
Fault History Contents.......................................................................................................................... 217
Alarm Register Contents...................................................................................................................... 217
C.11 Changing Drive Parameters......................................................................................219
Drive Operations on Parameter Change........................................................................................ 219
Issuing an Enter Command................................................................................................................ 219
C.12 Communication Errors..............................................................................................220
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes...................................................................................................... 220
Slave Not Responding.......................................................................................................................... 220
C.13 Self-Diagnostics.........................................................................................................221

D. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE............................................................................223
D.1 Section Safety............................................................................................................224
D.2 European Standards..................................................................................................226
CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance............................................................................................ 226
EMC Guidelines Compliance.............................................................................................................. 228
D.3 UL Standards..............................................................................................................233
UL Standards Compliance................................................................................................................... 233
Drive Motor Overload Protection..................................................................................................... 237

E. QUICK REFERENCE SHEET.............................................................................239
E.1

Drive and Motor Specifications................................................................................240
Drive............................................................................................................................................................ 240
7

Table of Contents

E.2

E.3

Motor.......................................................................................................................................................... 240
Basic Parameter Settings..........................................................................................241
Basic Setup................................................................................................................................................ 241
V/f Pattern Setup.................................................................................................................................... 241
Motor Setup............................................................................................................................................. 241
Multi-Function Digital Outputs (SC Common)............................................................................ 241
Multi-Function Digital Outputs (MC Common)........................................................................... 241
Monitor Outputs (AC Common)........................................................................................................ 241
User Setting Table......................................................................................................242

F. WARRANTY.....................................................................................................245
F.1

8

Warranty.....................................................................................................................246

i
Preface & General Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product that, if not heeded, may
result in fatality, personal injury, or equipment damage. Sumitomo is not responsible forthe consequences of ignoring these instructions.

i.1
i.2

PREFACE................................................................................................................. 10
GENERAL SAFETY.................................................................................................. 119

i.1  Prefacei.1  Preface
Sumitomo manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The
selection and application of Sumitomo products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end
user. Sumitomo accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design.
Under no circumstances should any Sumitomo product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive
or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely
under all circumstances. All systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Sumitomomust be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to the safe use and operation ofthat part. Any warnings provided by Sumitomo must be promptly provided to the end user. Sumitomo offers an
express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in
the Sumitomo manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Sumitomo assumes no liability forany personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products.
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of SF-520 Series drives. Read this manual before
attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for futurereference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.

 Applicable Documentation
The following manuals are available for SF-520 series drives:

SF-520SF-520 Series Operation and Maintenance Manual
Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It contains basic
information required to install and wire the drive. This guide provides basic programming andsimple setup and adjustment.
Manual No. DM2201E
SF-520 Series Technical ManualThis manual describes installation, wiring, operation procedures, functions, troubleshooting,
maintenance, and inspections to perform before operation.
Manual No. DM2202E

 Symbols
Note:

Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage.

  

Indicates a term or definition used in this manual.

 Terms and Abbreviations• Drive: SF-520 Series• r/min: Revolutions per Minute• SI-485/J-H: RS-422/RS-485 Interface for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication• V/f: V/f Control

10

i.2  General Safetyi.2  General Safety
 Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or shields
before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all
products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed
without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.

WARNING
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installedaccording to this manual and local codes.
The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages
could result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment andsystems.

DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.

CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION! will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.

NOTICE
Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: will also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.

 Safety Messages
DANGER
Heed the safety messages in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed thewarnings in this manual.

11i.2  General Safety

DANGER

Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To
prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage levelto confirm safe level.

WARNING

Sudden Movement Hazard
System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury.
Clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft
keys and machine loads before applying power to the drive.

Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Sumitomo is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be
modified.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Fire Hazard
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying
power.

Crush Hazard
Do not use this drive in lifting applications without installing external safety circuitry to prevent accidental
dropping of the load.
The drive does not possess built-in load drop protection for lifting applications.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from falling loads.
Install electrical and/or mechanical safety circuit mechanisms independent of drive circuitry.

CAUTION

Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.

12

i.2  General Safety

NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the drive.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive.
Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment.
Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 240 Vac
maximum (200 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive.
Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized.
Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.

 Drive Label Warnings
Always heed the warning information listed in Figure i.1 in the position shown in Figure i.2.

Figure i.1 Warning Information

SF-520Warning
Label

Figure i.2 Warning Information Position13

i.2  General Safety

This Page Intentionally Blank

14

1
ReceivingThis chapter describes the proper inspections to perform after receiving the drive andillustrates the different enclosure types and components.

1.1 SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................... 16
1.2 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK......................................................... 17
1.3 COMPONENT NAMES............................................................................................ 1915

1.1  Section Safety

1.1  Section Safety
CAUTION
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-fed motor and theoperating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity.
Ensure that the motor is suitable for drive duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate theadditional heating with the intended operating conditions.

16

1.2  Model Number and Nameplate Check

1.2  Model Number and Nameplate Check
Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive:• Inspect the drive for damage.
If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately.
• Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate.
• If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier.

 Nameplate
A
K
J
I

B

H
G

:

C

D

A – Normal Duty Amps /Heavy Duty AmpsB – Software version
C – CE
D – Enclosure type

G – Serial number
H – Lot number
I – Output specifications
J – Input specifications
K – AC drive model

Receiving

Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information Example

SF520 - S - A20

1
Refer to thetables below.

Drive

No.
S

Voltage Class
1-phase, 200-240 Vac

23-phase, 200-240 Vac

43-phase, 380-480 Vac<1> Drives with these specifications do not guarantee complete protection for the specified environmental condition.

 Single-Phase 200 V
Heavy Duty

Normal Duty

No.

Max. Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

No.

Max. Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

A20

0.2

1.6

A20

0.4

1.9

A40

0.4

3.0

A40

0.75

3.3

A75

0.75

5.0

A75

1.1

6.0

1A5

1.5

8.0

1A5

2.2

9.6

17

1.2  Model Number and Nameplate Check Three-Phase 200 V
Normal Duty

Heavy Duty
No.

Max Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

No.

Max Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

A10

0.1

0.8

A10

0.2

1.2

A20

0.2

1.6

A20

0.4

1.9

A40

0.4

3.0

A40

0.75

3.5

A75

0.75

5.0

A75

1.1

6.0

1A5

1.5

8.0

1A5

2.2

9.6

2A2

2.2

11.0

2A2

3.0

12.0

 Three-Phase 400 V
Normal Duty

Heavy Duty

18

No.

Max. Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

No.

Max. Motor Capacity
kW

Rated Output
Current A

A20

0.2

1.2

A20

0.4

1.2

A40

0.4

1.8

A40

0.75

2.1

A75

0.75

3.4

A75

1.5

4.1

1A5

1.5

4.8

1A5

2.2

5.4

2A2

2.2

5.5

2A2

3.0

6.9

1.3 Component Names

1.3 Component Names
This section illustrates drive components in the IP20/Open-Chassis models.

 IP20/Open-Chassis
 Single-Phase AC 200 V SF520S-A20 to A40
Three-Phase AC 200 V SF5202-A10 to A75

K
J
A

I
H

B
F

G
C

A – Mounting holeB – Heatsink
C – Cable cover
D – Terminal coverE – Front cover screw
F – Option connector coverD
G – Front cover
H – LED operator Refer to Using theDigital LED Operator on page56
I – Case
J – Cooling fan <1>
K – Fan cover <1>

ReceivingE

Figure 1.2 Exploded View of IP20/Open-Chassis Type Components

1<1> Models SF520S-A20 to A40 and SF5202-A10 to A40 do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.

19

1.3 Component Names Single-Phase AC 200 V SF520S-A75 to 1A5Three-Phase AC 200 V SF5202-1A5 to 2A2Three-Phase AC 400 V SF5204-A20 to 2A2

L
K
J

A

I
B

G

H

C
D
F

A – Mounting holeB – Heatsink
C – Cable cover
D – Terminal coverE – Bottom coverF – Front cover screw

E
G – Option connector cover
H – Front cover
I – LED operator Refer to Using theDigital LED Operator on page56
J – Case
K – Cooling fan <1>
L – Fan cover <1>

Figure 1.3 Exploded view of IP20/Open-Chassis Type Components<1> Models SF520S-A75 and SF5204-A20 to A75 do not have a cooling fan or a cooling fan cover.

20

1.3 Component Names Front Views
SF5202-A75

F

A
B
C
D

A

G

B
H

C

F
D

E

E

A – DIP switch S1 Refer to DIP Switch
S1 Analog Input Signal Selection
on page 49
B – DIP switch S3 Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page47
C – Control circuit terminal Refer toControl Circuit Wiring on page43
D – Main circuit terminal Refer toWiring the Main Circuit Terminalon page 42

E – Ground terminal
F – Terminal cover
G – Option unit connector Refer to
Options on page 170
H – Charge Lamp

Figure 1.4 Front Views of Drives
Receiving

H
G

SF5202-2A2

1

21

1.3 Component Names

This Page Intentionally Blank

22

2
Mechanical Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the drive.

2.1 SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................... 24
2.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................... 26

23

2.1  Section Safety

2.1  Section Safety
WARNING
Fire Hazard
Provide sufficient cooling with a fan or air conditioning unit when installing the drive inside an enclosed
panel or cabinet.
Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire.
The airflow over an IP20/Open-Chassis drive should be less than 50 °C.

CAUTION
Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.

NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the drive.
Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
It may be difficult to perform maintenance on the cooling fans of drives installed in a vertical row inside an
enclosure.
Ensure adequate spacing at the top of the drive to perform cooling fan replacement when required.
Operating the motor in the low-speed range diminishes the cooling effects, increases motor temperature,and may lead to motor damage by overheating.
Reduce the motor torque in the low-speed range whenever using a standard blower cooled motor. If 100% torqueis required continuously at low speed, consider using a inverter motor. Select a motor that is compatible with therequired load torque and operating speed range.
Do not operate motors above the maximum rated RPM.
Failure to comply may lead to bearing or other mechanical motor failures.

24

2.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Mechanical Installation

When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage
or use a drive-rated motor.
Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure.
Motor vibration may increase when operating a machine in variable-speed mode, if that machinepreviously operated at a constant speed.
Install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip a frequency
resonating the machine.
The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power
supply.
Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor.
When using an explosion-proof motor, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction withthe drive.
This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the drive. Since the drive
itself is not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Do not use a drive for a single-phase motor.
Replace the motor with a three-phase motor.

225

2.2  Mechanical Installation

2.2  Mechanical Installation
This section outlines specifications, procedures, and environment for proper mechanical installation of the drive.

 Installation Environment
To help prolong the optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in the proper environment. The tablebelow provides a description of the appropriate environment for the drive.
Table 2.1 Installation Environment
Environment
Installation Area

Ambient Temperature
Humidity
Storage Temperature

Surrounding Area

AltitudeVibration
Orientation

Conditions
Indoors
IP20/IP00 Open-Chassis enclosure: -10 °C to +50 °C
Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations.
When using an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the airtemperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels.
Do not allow ice to develop on the drive.
95% RH or less and free of condensation-20 °C to +60 °C
Install the drive in an area free from:• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials• radioactive materials• combustible materials (e.g., wood)• harmful gases and liquids• excessive vibration• chlorides• direct sunlight
Up to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output current, ambient temperature, and voltage
derating.
Refer to Altitude Derating on page 178 for details.
10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2
Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects.

NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation and project construction.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary
cover before startup, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat.
NOTICE: Avoid placing drive peripheral devices, transformers, or other electronics near the drive. Failure to comply could result in erroneous
operation. If such devices must be used in close proximity to the drive, take proper steps to shield the drive from noise.

26

2.2  Mechanical Installation

 Installation Orientation and Spacing
Install the drive upright as illustrated in Figure 2.1 to maintain proper cooling.

A

B

B

A – Correct
B – Incorrect
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation

 Single Drive Installation
Figure 2.2 explains the required installation spacing to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring. Install theheatsink against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink.
Side Clearance
A

Top/Bottom ClearanceA

C

Mechanical Installation

BC

A – 30 mm minimum
C – 100 mm minimum
B – Airflow direction
Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing
Note:

The space required on the left and right sides of the drive are the same for IP20/Open-Chassis drives.

 Multiple Drive Installation

2

When installing multiple drives into the same enclosure panel, mount the drives according to Figure 2.2. Whenmounting drives with a minimum side-by-side clearance of 2 mm according to Figure 2.3, derating must be
considered and parameter L8-35 must be set. Refer to Parameter List on page 179.

A

B

2 mm

B
C

D

C
A – Line up the tops of the drives.
B – 30 mm minimum

C – 100 mm minimum
D – Airflow direction

Figure 2.3 Space Between Drives (Side-by-Side Mounting)
Note:

When installing drives of different heights in the same enclosure panel, the tops of the drives should line up. Leave space
between the top and bottom of stacked drives for cooling fan replacement if required. Using this method, it is possible toreplace the cooling fans later.

27

2.2  Mechanical Installation

 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
 IP20/Open-Chassis Drives
Table 2.2 IP20/Open-Chassis (without an EMC filter)

W

t1

H1
H

2-M4

H2

D2
W1

D1
D

Voltage Class

Drive Model

Single-Phase
200 V Class

SF520S-A20
SF520S-A40
SF5202-A10
SF5202-A20
SF5202-A40
SF5202-A75

Three-Phase
200 V Class

W
68
68
68
68
68
68

H
128
128
128
128
128
128

D
76
118
76
76
108
128

W1
56
56
56
56
56
56

Dimensions (mm)
H1
H2
D1
118
5
6.5
118
5
38.5
118
5
6.5
118
5
6.5
118
5
38.5
118
5
58.5

D2
67.5
109.5
67.5
67.5
99.5
119.5

t1
3
5
3
3
5
5

Wt. (kg)
0.6
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.9
1.1

D2
129
145.5
120.5
129

t1
5
5
5
5

Wt. (kg)
1.7
1.8
1.7
1.7

Table 2.3 IP20/Open-Chassis (without an EMC filter)
W1

D2

H1
H

4-M4

t1

H2

W

D1
D

Voltage Class

Drive Model

Single-Phase
200 V Class

SF520S-A75
SF520S-1A5
SF5202-1A5
SF5202-2A2

Three-Phase
200 V Class

28

W
108
108
108
108

H
128
128
128
128

D
137.5
154
129
137.5

W1
96
96
96
96

Dimensions (mm)
H1
H2
D1
118
5
58
118
5
58
118
5
58
118
5
58

2.2  Mechanical Installation
W1

D2

H1
H

4-M4

t1

H2

W

D1
D

Drive Model

Three-Phase
400 V Class

SF5204-A20
SF5204-A40
SF5204-A75
SF5204-1A5SF5204-2A2

W
108
108
108
108
108

H
128
128
128
128
128

D
81
99
137.5
154
154

W1
96
96
96
96
96

Dimensions (mm)
H1
H2
D1
118
5
10
118
5
28
118
5
58
118
5
58
118
5
58

D2
72.5
90.5
129
145.5
145.5

t1
5
5
5
5
5

Wt. (kg)
1.0
1.2
1.7
1.7
1.7

Mechanical Installation

Voltage Class229

2.2  Mechanical Installation

This Page Intentionally Blank

30

3Electrical Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control circuit terminals, motor andpower supply.

3.1 SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................... 32
3.2 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM................................................................... 34
3.3 MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM............................................................... 36
3.4 TERMINAL BLOCK CONFIGURATION.................................................................... 37
3.5 PROTECTIVE COVERS............................................................................................ 38
3.6 MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING.......................................................................................... 39
3.7 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING................................................................................... 43
3.8 I/O CONNECTIONS................................................................................................. 47
3.9 MAIN FREQUENCY REFERENCE............................................................................ 49
3.10 BRAKING RESISTOR............................................................................................... 50
3.11 INTERLOCKING WITH CONNECTED MACHINERY................................................. 51
3.12 WIRING CHECKLIST............................................................................................... 52

31

3.1  Section Safety

3.1  Section Safety
DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstallcovers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in thismanual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage levelto confirm safe level.

Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electricalconnections.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying
power.

32

3.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Electrical Installation

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twistedpair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting anyother devices.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Sumitomo is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be
modified.

333

3.2  Standard Connection Diagram

3.2  Standard Connection Diagram
Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.1. It is possible to run the drive via the digital
operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up
Programming & Operation on page 53 for instructions on operating the drive.
NOTICE: Inadequate branch short circuit protection could result in damage to the drive. Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection perapplicable codes. The drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V
Class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V Class).
NOTICE: When the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage or use a drive duty motor. Failure
to comply could lead to motor insulation breakdown.
NOTICE: Correctly set Sink/Source jumper S3 for internal power supply. Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive. Refer to I/OConnections on page 47 for details.
NOTICE: Do not connect AC control circuit ground to drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction.
NOTICE: The minimum load for the multi-function relay output MA-MB-MC is 10 mA.
_
Terminals +1, +2, , B1, and B2
are for connecting options.
Never connect power supply
lines to these terminals.

<1>

Three phase R/L1
power supply S/L2
for 200 V /400 V
T/L3

+2
MC

S/L2

B2
Motor

Control circuit

Reverse run/stop

S2

External fault

S3

Option unit
connector

SA

Fault reset
Multi-step
speed 1
main/aux switch

S4

DIP switch S1

SA
TRX

I

M

W

W/T3

SA
MC
THRX

TRX

V

V/T2

S1

MC

U

U/T1

Main circuit

Forward run/stop

Thermal relay for
motor cooling fan

MC MA

B1

Braking resistor(option)SF-520

T/L3

THRX OFF ON

MC

-

+1

R/L1

<3>

Thermal relay

JumperFor single phase 200 V
power supply, use
R/L1 and S/L2.
MCB

<2>

DC link choke(option)Ground10 or less (400 V class)
100 or less (200 V class)V

S5

Digital output
250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A(default setting)<5>+24 V 8 mA
MA

Fault relay

Fault

MB
Digital inputs(default setting)

<4>
SC

DIP
switch S3

Sink

24 V

MC

SourceShield groundterminal

2k
Main speed
frequency
reference.
Multi-function
programmable

Setting power supply+10.5 max. 20 mA

AM

A1 0 to +10 V (20 k )(0)4 to 20 mA (250 )AC+V

Analog monitor+ output

AM

AC

<6>

Monitoroutputshielded line
main circuit terminal

twisted-pair shielded line
control terminal

Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (200 V Class Example)<1> Remove the jumper when installing an optional DC reactor.
<2> The MC on the input side of the main circuit should open when the thermal relay is triggered.
<3> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S5) from NPN transistor; Default: sink mode (0 V com).

34

0 to +10 Vdc- (2 mA)

3.2  Standard Connection Diagram<4>	Use only a +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires an external power supply. Refer to I/O Connections
on page 47.
<5> Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value).
<6>	Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters and wattmeters; they are not intended foruse as a feedback-type of signal.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Do not close the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal parameter is properlyset (S5 for 3-Wire; H1-05 = “0”). Improper sequencing of run/stop circuitry could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on
terminal S1 may cause the drive to start.
WARNING! When 3-Wire sequence is used, set the drive to 3-Wire sequence before wiring the control terminals and ensure parameter b1-17 is set to
0 (drive does not accept a run command at power up (default). If the drive is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set up for 2- Wire sequence (default) andif parameter b1-17 is set to 1 (drive accepts a Run command at power up), the motor will rotate in reverse direction at power up of the drive and may
cause injury.

Figure 3.2 illustrates an example of a 3-Wire sequence.
Run relay (N.O.)

Drive
S1
S2
S5
SC

Run command (run on momentary close)
Stop command (stop on momentary open)
Foward/reverse command(multi-function input: H1-05 = 0)
Sequence input common

Figure 3.2 3-Wire Sequence

Electrical Installation

Stop relay (N.C.)

3

35

3.3  Main Circuit Connection Diagram

3.3  Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to diagrams in this section for the Main Circuit wiring connections. Connections may vary based on drive
capacity. The main circuit DC power supply powers the control circuit.
NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high voltage DC potential. Improper wiring connections
could result in damage to the drive.

 Single-Phase 200 V Class Models SF520S-A20 to 1A5
Jumper

DC link choke(option)

Thermal Relay
B1 B2

+1

+2

Drive

R/L1

Single-phase
200 VacBraking Resistor(option)

S/L2

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

Motor

–

Figure 3.3 Connecting Single-Phase Main Circuit Terminals
NOTICE: Do not connect T/L3 terminal when using single-phase power supply input. Incorrect wiring may damage the drive.

 Three-Phase 200 V Class Models SF5202-A10 to 2A2Three-Phase 400 V Class Models SF5204-A20 to 2A2
Jumper

DC link choke(option)

Thermal Relay
+2 +1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Three phase 200 Vac(400 Vac)

Braking Resistor(option)

B1 B2
Drive

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

Motor

—

Figure 3.4 Connecting Three-Phase Main Circuit Terminals

363.4  Terminal Block Configuration

3.4  Terminal Block Configuration
The figures in this section provide illustrations of the main circuit terminal block configurations of the different drive
sizes.

Models:
SF520S-A20,A40
SF5202-A10,A20,A40,A75

Models:
SF520S-A75,1A5
SF5202-1A5,2A2
SF5204-A20,A40,A75,1A5,2A2

Electrical Installation

Figure 3.5 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configurations

337

3.5  Protective Covers

3.5  Protective Covers
Follow the procedure below to remove the protective covers before wiring the drive and to reattach the covers afterwiring is complete.

 IP20/Open-Chassis Cover Removal and Installation
 Removing the Protective Covers
1. Loosen the screw that locks the front cover in place to remove.

Figure 3.6 Remove the Front Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive

2. Apply pressure to the tabs on each side of the terminal cover. Pull the terminal cover away from the drive while pushingin on the tabs to pull the cover free.

Figure 3.7 Remove the Terminal Cover on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive Reattaching the Protective Covers
Properly connect all wiring and route power wiring away from control signal wiring. Reattach all protective covers
when wiring is complete. Apply only a small amount of pressure to lock the cover back into place.

Figure 3.8 Reattach the Protective Covers on an IP20/Open-Chassis Drive38

3.6  Main Circuit Wiring

3.6  Main Circuit Wiring
This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main
circuit of the drive.
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring practices could
result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.

 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
B1
B2
⊕1
⊕2
⊕1
⊖
(2 terminals)

Type

Function

Reference

Main circuit power
supply input

Connects line power to the drive.
Drives with single-phase 200 V input power use terminals R/L1 and S/L2
only. T/L3 must not be used.

36

Drive output

Connects to the motor.

41

Braking resistor

Available for connecting a braking resistor.

50

DC reactor connection

These terminals are shorted at shipment. Remove the shorting bar between⊕1 and ⊕2 when connecting a DC reactor to this terminal.

165

DC power supply input For connecting a DC power supply.

–

Ground42

Grounding Terminal

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.
Note:

1.	Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75 °C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming
ambient temperature within 30 °C and wiring distance shorter than 100 m.
2.	Terminals ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊖, B1 and B2 are for connecting optional devices such as a braking resistor. Do not connect other nonspecified devices to these terminals.

• Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage
drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use thefollowing formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop:• Line drop voltage (V) = √3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
• Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 233 for information on UL compliance.

3

 Single-Phase 200 V Class
Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
SF520S

A20
A40

A75

Terminal
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2For Japan and Asia <1>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
mm2
2
mm

For United States <2>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
AWG, kcmil
AWG, kcmil

For Europe and China <3>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
mm2
2
mm

2

0.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

2
2
2
2

0.75 to 2
0.75 to 2
0.75 to 2
0.75 to 2

14
–
–
14

18 to 1418 to 1418 to 1418 to 14

2.5
–
–
2.5

0.75 to 2.5
0.75 to 2.5
0.75 to 2.5
0.75 to 2.5

2

2 to 5.5

12

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2
2
2
3.5

2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5

14
–
–
10

14 to 1014 to 1014 to 1014 to 10

2.5
–
–
2.5

2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6

Electrical Installation

 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0(7.1 to 8.9)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

39

3.6  Main Circuit Wiring
Drive
Model
SF5202

1A5

Terminal
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2For Japan and Asia <1>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
mm2
mm2

For United States <2>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
AWG, kcmil
AWG, kcmil

For Europe and China <3>
Recomm.
Wire Range
Gauge
mm2
mm2

3.5

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2
3.5
2
3.5

2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5
2 to 5.5

14
–
–
10

14 to 1014 to 1014 to 1014 to 10

2.5
–
–
2.5

2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6
2.5 to 6

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0(7.1 to 8.9)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.

 Three-Phase 200 V Class
Table 3.3 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
SF5204

A10
A20
A40
A75

1A5

2A2

For Japan and Asia <1>
Terminal
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2For Europe and China <3>

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm2

Recomm.
Gauge
AWG, kcmil

Wire Range
AWG, kcmil

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm220.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2–

18 to 14–0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2–

18 to 14–0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

12

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.

40

For United States <2>3.6  Main Circuit Wiring Three-Phase 400 V Class
Table 3.4 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
SF5204For Japan and Asia <1>
Terminal
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3

A20
A40
A75

⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3

1A5
2A2

⊖, ⊕1, ⊕2
B1, B2

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

For United States <2>

Wire Range
mm2

Recomm.
Gauge
AWG, kcmil

2

2 to 5.5

2

For Europe and China <3>

Wire Range
AWG, kcmil

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm2

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.

This section outlines the various steps, precautions, and checkpoints for wiring the main circuit terminals and motor
terminals.
NOTICE: When connecting the motor to the drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, the phase order for the drive and motor should match.
Failure to comply with proper wiring practices may cause the motor to run in reverse if the phase order is backward.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper application of noise filters could result indamage to the drive.
NOTICE: Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fireas a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.

 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
When the cable length between the drive and the motor is too long (especially at low frequency output), note thatthe cable voltage drop may cause reduced motor torque. Drive output current will increase as the leakage current
from the cable increases. An increase in leakage current may trigger an overcurrent situation and weaken theaccuracy of the current detection.
Adjust the drive carrier frequency according to the following table. If the motor wiring distance exceeds 100 m
because of the system configuration, reduce the ground currents.
Refer to Table 3.5 to set the carrier frequency to an appropriate level.
Table 3.5 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor
Cable Length
Carrier Frequency
Note:

50 m or less
15 kHz or less

100 m or less
5 kHz or lessGreater than 100 m
2 kHz or less

When setting carrier frequency, calculate the cable length as the total distance of wiring to all connected motors when running
multiple motors from a single drive.

41

Electrical Installation

 Main Circuit Terminal Power Supply and Motor Wiring33.6  Main Circuit Wiring

 Ground Wiring
Follow the precautions to wire the ground for one drive or a series of drives.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize thelength of the ground wire. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result indeath or serious injury.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Be sure to ground the drive ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω orless). Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment.
NOTICE: Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper equipment
grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
NOTICE: When using more than one drive, ground multiple drives according to instructions. Improper equipment grounding could result in abnormal
operation of drive or equipment.

Refer to Figure 3.9 when using multiple drives. Do not loop the ground wire.

AB

A – Correct

B – Incorrect

Figure 3.9 Multiple Drive Wiring

 Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Shut off the power supply to the drive before wiring the main circuit terminals. Failure to comply may result indeath or serious injury.
Note:

A cover placed over the DC Bus and braking circuit terminals prior to shipment helps prevent miswiring. Cut away covers asneeded for terminals with a needle-nose pliers.
A

A – Protective Cover to Prevent Miswiring

Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Refer to section 3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 36 for drive main power circuit connections.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect braking resistors to any other terminals. Improper
wiring connections could cause the braking resistor to overheat and cause death or serious injury by fire. Failure to comply may result in damage tothe braking circuit or drive.

42

3.7  Control Circuit Wiring

3.7  Control Circuit Wiring
NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wire connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring practices could
result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections.

SF-520<1>
Forward run/stop

Control circuit
S1

Reverse run/stop

S2

External fault

S3

Option unit
connector

Fault reset
Multi-step
speed 1
main/aux switch

S4

DIP switch S1
I

V

S5

Digital output
250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A(default setting)<3>+24 V 8 mA
MA

Digital inputs(default setting)

MB
MC

<2>
SC

DIP
switch S3

Sink

24 V

SourceShield groundterminal

Main speed
frequency
reference.
Multi-function
programmable+V

Setting power supply+10.5 max. 20 mA

A1 0 to +10 V (20 k )(0)4 to 20 mA (250 )Analog monitor

AM+ output

AM

AC

AC

shielded line
main circuit terminal

twisted-pair shielded line
control terminal

0 to +10 Vdc- (2 mA)

MonitoroutputFigure 3.10 Control Circuit Connection Diagram<1> Connected using sequence input signal (S1 to S5) from NPN transistor; Default: sink mode (0 V com)
<2> Use only the +24 V internal power supply in sinking mode; the source mode requires an external power supply. Refer to I/O Connections
on page 47.
<3> Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value).

 Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions

3

Drive parameters determine which functions apply to the multi-function digital inputs (S1 to S5), multi-function
digital outputs (MA, MB, MC), and multi-function analog output (AM). The default is called out next to each terminal
in Figure 3.10.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Always check the operation and wiring of control circuits after being wired. Operating a drive with untested
control circuits could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING! Confirm the drive I/O signals and external sequence before starting test run. Failure to comply may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE: Do not switch an input contactor more often than once every 30 minutes. Improper equipment sequencing could shorten useful life of thedrive electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays. Normally the drive I/O should be used to stop and start the motor.

 Input Terminals
Table 3.6 Control Circuit Input Terminals
Type

No.
S1

MultiFunction
Digital Inputs

S2
S3
S4
S5
SC

Electrical Installation

1k

Terminal Name (Function)
Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Multi-function input 1 (Closed: Forward run, Open:Stop)
Multi-function input 2 (Closed: Reverse run, Open: 24 Vdc, 8 mA
Note: Drive preset to sinking mode. When using source mode,
Stop)
set DIP switch S3 to allow for a 24 Vdc (±10%) external power
Multi-function input 3 (External fault (N.O.)
supply. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page 47.
Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset)
Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed reference 1)
Multi-function input common (Control common)
Sequence common

433.7  Control Circuit Wiring
Type

No.

Terminal Name (Function)

Main
Frequency
Reference
Input

A1

Frequency reference+V
AC

Analog input power supply
Frequency reference common

Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Input voltage or input current (Selected by DIP switch S1 andH3-01) 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ),Resolution: 1/1000
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω) or 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω),
Resolution: 1/500+10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA)
0 Vdc

 Output Terminals
Table 3.7 Control Circuit Output Terminals
Type

No.
MA
MB
MC
AM
AC

Multi-Function Digital
OutputMonitor Output

Terminal Name (Function)
N.O. output (fault)
N.C. output (fault)
Digital output common
Analog monitor output
Monitor common

Function (Signal Level) Default Setting
Digital output
30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A
Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA (reference value)
0 to 10 Vdc (2 mA or less) Resolution: 1/256
0V Terminal Configuration

Figure 3.11 Control Circuit Terminal Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Select appropriate wire type and size from Table 3.8. For simpler and more reliable wiring, crimp ferrules to the wire
ends. Refer to Table 3.9 for ferrule terminal types and sizes.
Table 3.8 Wire Size and Torque Specifications (Same for All Models)Bare Wire Terminal
Terminal

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m

MA, MB, MC

M3

0.5 to 0.6

S1-S5, SC, +V, A1,
AC, AM

M2

0.22 to 0.25

Applicable wiresize
mm2 (AWG)
Stranded: 0.25 to 1.5(24 to 16)
Single: 0.25 to 1.5(24 to 16)
Stranded: 0.25 to 1.0(24 to 18)
Single: 0.25 to 1.5(24 to 16)

Recomm. mm2(AWG)

0.75 (18)

Ferrule-Type Terminal
Applicable wire
size
Recomm. mm2
2
mm
(AWG)
(AWG)
0.25 to 1.0(24 to 17)

Wire Type

0.5 (20)
Shieldedline, etc.

0.75 (18)0.25 to 0.5(24 to 20)

0.5 (20)

 Ferrule-Type Wire Terminations
Crimp a ferrule to signal wiring to improve wiring simplicity and reliability. Use CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool
manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT.

44

3.7  Control Circuit Wiring

L

6 mm

d1

d2

Figure 3.12 Ferrule Dimensions
Table 3.9 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
2

Size mm (AWG)Type

L (mm)

d1 (mm)d2 (mm)0.25 (24)AI 0.25-6YE

10.5

0.8

2.0

0.34 (22)0.5 (20)0.75 (18)1.0

AI 0.34-6TQ
AI 0.5-6WH
AI 0.75-6GY
AI 1-6RD

10.5
12
12
12

0.8
1.1
1.3
1.5

2.0
2.5
2.8
3.0

Manufacturer

PHOENIX CONTACT

 Wiring Procedure
This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not remove covers or touch the circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death orserious injury.
NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and other high-powerlines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference.

NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could resultin drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.
NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could resultin drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment
malfunction or nuisance trips.

Wire the control terminals using Figure 3.13 as a guide. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in
Figure 3.14. Refer to Wire Size and Torque Specifications on page 44.
NOTICE: Do not tighten screws beyond the specified tightening torque. Failure to comply may damage the terminal.

3

NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment
malfunction due to electrical interference.

Connect control wires as shown in the following figure:D
Preparing wire
terminal ends

E

B

A

C
A – Control terminal block
B – Avoid fraying wire strands when
stripping insulation from wire.
Strip length 5.5 mm.
C – Single wire or stranded wire

Electrical Installation

NOTICE: Separate wiring for digital output terminals MA, MB and MC from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring practices could resultin drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips.

D – Loosen screw to insert wire.
E – Blade depth of 0.4 mm or lessBlade width of 2.5 mm or lessFigure 3.13 Terminal Board Wiring Guide45

3.7  Control Circuit Wiring
F

A

C

B

D

E

A – Drive side
B – Connect shield to ground terminalof drive.
C – Insulation

D – Control device side
E – Shield sheath (Insulate with tape)
F – Shield

Figure 3.14 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables

When setting the frequency by analog reference from an external potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires
and ground the shield of twisted-pair wires to the ground terminal of the drive.
NOTICE: The analog signal lines between the drive and the operator station or peripheral equipment should not exceed 50 meters when using ananalog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.
A
B
+V

C

A1

D

AC

A – Drive
B – Ground terminal (shieldconnection)C – (+V) Frequency setting powersource +10.5 Vdc maximum 20 mA
D – (A1) Main speed frequency
reference 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ)or
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/
0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)

Figure 3.15 Wiring the Frequency Reference to the Control Circuit Terminals (External Reference)46

3.8  I/O Connections

3.8  I/O Connections
 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch
Set the DIP switch S3 on the front of the drive to switch the digital input terminal logic between sinking mode andsourcing mode; the drive is preset to sinking mode.
Table 3.10 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Setting
Set Value
SINK
SOURCE

Details
Sinking Mode (0 V common): default setting
Sourcing Mode (+24 V common)

DIP Switch S3

Figure 3.16 DIP Switch S3
Electrical Installation

 Transistor Input Signal Using 0 V Common/Sink Mode
When controlling the digital inputs by NPN transistors (0 V common/sinking mode), set the DIP switch S3 to SINK
and use the internal 24 V power supply.
Shielded Cable
SINK
Multi-funciton input

SOURCEFWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
External Fault N.O.
Fault Reset

S1
S2

3

S3
S4
S5

Multi-step Speed 1
SINK

+24 V

S3
SC

SOURCE

Figure 3.17 Sinking Mode: Sequence from NPN Transistor (0 V Common)

47

3.8  I/O Connections

 Transistor Input Signal Using +24 V Common/Source Mode
When controlling digital inputs by PNP transistors (+24 V common/sourcing mode), set the DIP switch S3 to SOURCE
and use an external 24 V power supply.
Shielded cable

SOURCESINK
External
power supply+24V

FWD Run/Stop

S1

REV Run/Stop

S2

External Fault N.O.

S3

Fault reset

S4

Multi-step speed 1

S5
SINK

+24V

S3
SC

SOURCE

Figure 3.18 Source Mode: Sequence from PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)48

3.9  Main Frequency Reference

3.9  Main Frequency Reference
 DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection
The main frequency reference can either be a voltage or current signal input at terminal A1.
When using input A1 as a voltage input, set DIP switch S1 to “V” (right position, default setting) and program
parameter H3-01 to “0” (0 to +10 Vdc with lower limit) or “1” (0 to +10 Vdc without lower limit).
To use current input at terminal A1, set the DIP switch S1 to “I” and set parameter H3-01 = “2” or “3” (4-20 mA or 0-20
mA).
Table 3.11 Frequency Reference Configurations
Voltage Input

Current Input
Drive

Drive
+10.5 V+V 20 mA current
1

0 to 10 V

4 to 20 mA input
or
0 to 20 mA input

A1 Main speed frequency
reference (voltage input)+10.5 V+V 20 mA current
Main speed

A1 frequency reference(current input)

AC Frequency

AC Frequency reference
commonreferencecommonElectrical Installation

DIP Switch S1Figure 3.19 DIP Switch S1Table 3.12 DIP Switch S1 Settings
Setting ValueV ( right position)
I ( left position)

3

Description
Voltage input (0 to 10 V): default setting
Current input (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA)
Table 3.13 Parameter H3-01 Details

No.

H3-01

Parameter Name
Frequency ref. (voltage/current)
terminal A1 signal levelselection

Description
Selects the signal level for terminal A1.
0: 0 to +10 V, unipolar input (negative frequency
reference values are zeroed)
1: 0 to +10 V, bipolar input (negative frequency
reference changes the direction)
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA

Setting
Range

Default
Setting

MEMOBUS
Register

0 to 30

410

49

3.10  Braking Resistor

3.10  Braking Resistor
Dynamic braking (DB) helps bring the motor to a smooth and rapid stop when working with high inertia loads.
Regeneration occurs as the drive lowers the motor frequency with high inertia. When the regeneration flows backinto the DC bus capacitors, an overvoltage situation occurs. A braking resistor prevents these overvoltage faults.
NOTICE: Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully
review the braking resistor instruction manual when connecting a braking option to the drive.
Note:

The braking circuit must be sized properly in order to dissipate the power required to decelerate the load in the desired time.
Ensure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time prior to running the drive.

NOTICE: Use a thermal overload relay or over-temperature contact to interrupt input power to the drive if the braking resistor overheats. In the eventof a possible thermal overload, the relay triggers the input contactor and prevents the braking resistor from burning up.

 Installation
WARNING! Fire Hazard. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect a braking resistor directly to any other terminals.
Improper wiring connections could result in death or serious injury by fire. Failure to comply may result in damage to the braking circuit or drive.
NOTICE: Connect braking resistors to the drive as shown in the I/O wiring examples. Improperly wiring braking circuits could result in damage to thedrive or equipment.

 Installation Procedure
1. Disconnect all electrical power to the drive and wait at least one minute before servicing the drive and any connectedcomponents.

2. Remove drive front cover.
3. Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals and that the DC bus no longer
holds a charge.

Thermalrelay
Powersupply

MCB

MC

R/L1

Braking resistor

B1

B2

S/L2

U/T1

T/L3

V/T2

Motor

W/T3
THRX OFF O N

MC
SA

MC

SF-520

THRX

Thermal relay switch forexternal braking resistor

SA

TRX

MC

SA

TRX
MA MC

Fault contact

Figure 3.20 Connecting a Braking Resistor

4. Follow manufacturer instructions to connect the resistor unit to the drive using proper wire gauge according to local

electrical codes. Power leads for the remote mount resistors generate high levels of electrical noise; group these signal
leads separately.

5. Mount the resistor unit on a noncombustible surface. Maintain minimum side and top clearances according to resistor
manufacturer instructions.

WARNING! Fire Hazard. Do not use improper combustible materials. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach
the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material.

6. Reinstall drive covers and resistor covers, if provided.
7. Set parameter L3-04 = “0” to disable stall prevention during deceleration.
Table 3.14 Braking Resistor Settings
Parameter
L3-04: Stall Prevention During Decel

Settings
0: Stall prevention disabled.

8. Operate the system and verify the required deceleration rate is obtained during dynamic braking or stopping.

50

3.11  Interlocking with Connected Machinery

3.11  Interlocking with Connected Machinery
For safety reasons, applications that may be affected by the operation status of the drive should be set up so that
operation can only occur when the drive is ready to operate. A “Drive ready” and “Fault” signal should be assigned tothe multifunction outputs to guarantee interlock with application.

 Drive Ready Signal

Electrical Installation

When the “Drive ready” signal has been set to one of the multi-function contact outputs, that output will close
whenever the drive is ready to accept a Run command or is already running. Under the following conditions the
Drive ready signal will switch off and remain off, even if a Run command is entered:• when the power supply is shut off• during a fault• when there is problem with the control power supply• when a parameter setting error makes the drive unable to run even if a Run command has been entered• when a fault such as overvoltage or undervoltage is triggered as soon as the Run command is entered• when the drive is in the Programming mode and will not accept a Run command even when entered.

351

3.12  Wiring Checklist

3.12  Wiring Checklist


No.

Item

Page

Drive, peripherals, option cards



1

Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model.

17

2

Check for correct braking resistors, DC reactors, noise filters, and other peripheral devices.

50



3

Ensure area surrounding the drive complies with specifications.

Installation area and physical setup
26

Power supply voltage, output voltage

4

The voltage from the power supply should fall within the input voltage specification range of the drive.

90

5

The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications.

17

Main circuit wiring

6Confirm proper branch circuit protection exists per National and Local codes.

34

7

Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3.

36



8

Properly wire the drive and motor together. The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2 and W/
T3 should match in order to produce the desired phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will
rotate in the opposite direction.

41




9

Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines.

39

10

Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.

39

• When using comparatively long motor cable, calculate the amount of voltage drop.
Motor rated voltage (V) x 0.02 ≥3 x voltage resistance (Ω/km) x cable length (m) x motor rated current (A) x 10-3




11
12

39

• If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m, adjust the carrier frequency (C6-02) accordingly.

41

Properly ground the drive. Review page 42.

42

Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals). Refer to Table 3.2
through Table 3.4.
Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive.
Power Supply

MC1

SF-520

39

OL1
M1

MC2



OL2
M2

13
MCn

-

OLn
Mn

MC1 - MCn ... magnetic contactor
OL 1 - OLn ... thermal relay

Note: Close MC1 through MCn before operating the drive.

14

If using a braking resistor or dynamic braking resistor unit, install a magnetic contactor. Properly install theresistor, and ensure that overload protection shuts off the power supply.

50



15

Verify phase advancing capacitors are NOT installed on the output side of the drive.

-

Control circuit wiring




52

16

Use twisted-pair cables for all drive control circuit wiring.

43

17

Ground the shields of shielded wiring to the GND

45



18

If using a 3-Wire sequence, properly set parameters for multi-function contact input terminals S1 throughS5, and properly wire control circuits.

35








19

Check for any other wiring mistakes. Only use a multimeter to check wiring.

-

20

Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive. Refer to Table 3.2 through Table 3.4.

39

21

Pick up all wire clippings.

-

22

Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections.

-23

Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring.

-24

Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m.

-

terminal.

4Start-Up Programming & Operation
This chapter explains the functions of the LED operator and how to program the drive for
initial operation.

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9

SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................... 54
USING THE DIGITAL LED OPERATOR.................................................................... 56
THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MOES.............................................................. 59
START-UP FLOWCHART......................................................................................... 64
POWERING UP THE DRIVE..................................................................................... 65
NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST RUN.......................................................................... 66
TEST RUN WITH LOAD CONNECTED..................................................................... 67
VERIFYING AND BACKING UP PARAMETER SETTINGS....................................... 68
TEST RUN CHECKLIST............................................................................................ 69

53

4.1  Section Safety

4.1  Section Safety
DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may include drives without covers or safety shields to illustrate details. Be sure to
reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions describedin this manual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage levelto confirm safe level.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electricalconnections.
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying
power.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.

544.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Start-Up Programming& Operation

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twistedpair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Sumitomo is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be
modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting anyother devices.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

455

4.2  Using the Digital LED Operator

4.2  Using the Digital LED Operator
Use the LED operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well as display fault andalarm information.

 Keys, Displays, and LEDs

11

1

12

5

13

10
2
15
4
3

P

14

7
9

8

6

Table 4.1 Keys and Displays on the LED Operator
No.

56

Display

Name

Function

1

Data Display Area

Displays the frequency reference, parameter number, etc.

2

ESC Key

Returns to the previous menu.

3

RESET KeyMoves the cursor to the right.
Resets the drive to clear a fault situation.

4

RUN Key

Starts the drive.

5

Up Arrow Key

Scrolls up to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.

6

Down Arrow Key

Scrolls down to select parameter numbers, setting values, etc.

7

STOP Key8

ENTER Key9

LO/RE Selection Key

10

RUN Light

Lit while the drive is operating the motor.

11

LO/RE Light

Lit while the operator (LOCAL) is selected to run the drive.

Stops the drive.
Note: Stop priority circuit. Pressing the STOP key will always cause the drive
to stop the motor, even if a Run command is active at any external Run
command source. Set parameter o2-06 to 0 to disable the STOP key priority.
Selects all modes, parameters, settings, etc.
Selects a menu item to move from one display screen to the next.
Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit
terminals (REMOTE).
Note: LOCAL/REMOTE key effective during stop in drive mode.

4.2  Using the Digital LED Operator
No.

Display

Name

12

ALM LED Light

13

REV LED Light

14

DRV LED Light

15

FOUT LED Light

Function

Refer to LED Screen Displays on page 57.

 Digital Text Display
Text appears on the LED Operator as shown below. This section explains the meaning of text as it appears on thedisplay screen.
Lit

Flashing

Table 4.2 Digital Text Display
LED

Text

LED

Text

LED

Text

0

9

I

1

A

J

S

2

B

K

T

3

C

L

U

4

D

M

5

E

N

W

6

F

O

X

7

G

P

Y

8

H

Q

Z

LED

R

V

<1>

<1>

None
Start-Up Programming& Operation

Text

None

<1> Displayed in two digits.

 LED Screen Displays
Display

Lit
When the drive detects an alarm or
error

Flashing• When an alarm occurs• oPE detected

Off
Normal state (no fault or alarm)

Motor is rotating in reverse—

Motor is rotating forward

Drive Mode—

Programming Mode

Displays output frequency (Hz)

—

—

4

As illustrated inthis manual LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
LED

Lit
When a Run commandis selected from the LED
operator (LOCAL)
During Run

Flashing

Flashing Quickly <1>––• During deceleration to stop
• When a Run commandis input and frequency
reference is 0

• During deceleration at afast-stop.
• During stop by interlock
operation.

Off
Run command is selected fromdevice other than LED operator(REMOTE)
During stop

As shown<1> Refer to Figure 4.1 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”.

57

4.2  Using the Digital LED Operator
1s
ON

ON

Flashing
Flashing
quickly

ON

ON

ON

ON

Figure 4.1 RUN LED Status and Meaning
Drive output frequency/
Frequency setting
RUN LED

RUN

during stop
0 Hz

RUN

STOP

OFF

OFF

ON

Flashing

Figure 4.2 RUN LED and Drive Operation

 Menu Structure for Digital LED Operator
Description of Key Operations:

Turn the power on<1>

DRIVE MODE

Forward Selection

Reverse Selection:::

Output Frequency

Output Current
Note: “XX” characters are shown in this manual.
The drive will display the actual setting values.
Output Voltage

PROGRAMMING MODE

Monitor Display

Verify Menu

Set Up Mode

Parameter Setting Mode

Figure 4.3 Digital LED Operator Screen Structure<1> Reverse can only be selected when LOCAL is set.

58

STOP

6 Hz
OFF

4.3  The Drive and Programming Modes

4.3  The Drive and Programming Modes
The drive functions are divided into two main groups accessible via the Digital LED Operator:
Drive Mode: The Drive mode allows motor operation and parameter monitoring. Parameter settings cannot bechanged when accessing functions in the Drive Mode (Table 4.3).
Programming Mode: The Programming Mode allows access to setup/adjust, verify parameters. The drive prohibitschanges in motor operation such as start/stop when the Digital LED Operator is accessing a function in the
Programming Mode.
Table 4.3 illustrates the different functions visible as the “Up arrow” is scrolled immediately after powering up thedrive.
Note:

When b1-08 (Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode) is set to 1 (enabled), the drive can run even if the mode isswitched to the programming mode. When setting b1-08 to 0 (disabled), the mode cannot be switched to the programming
mode while the drive is running.
Table 4.3 Summary of Modes
Mode Group

Description
Frequency Reference Display (Initial
power-up state)

Key Press

LED Digital Operator Display <1>

Forward/Reverse
Drive Mode Functions(Motor operation and monitoring)

Output Frequency Display
Output Current Display
Output Voltage Reference
Monitor Display

Programming Mode Functions(Changing parameters)

Setup Group Parameters
All Parameters<1> The enlarged illustration of the LED indicates that the LED is on.

 Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes
The drive is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display screens using.
Frequency ReferencePower Up
Default Setting

Forward/Reverse

Drive Mode

andStart-Up Programming& Operation

Verify Function

4

This display screen allows the user to monitor and set the frequency reference
while the drive is running. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page59.
Note: The user can select items to display when the drive is first powered up by
setting parameter o1-02.

: Motor rotates forward.
: Motor rotates in reverse.
Note: For applications that should not run in reverse (fans, pumps, etc.), setparameter b1-04 = “1” to prohibit the motor from rotating in reverse. This sequencealso puts the drive in LOCAL mode.
Switching to reverse:

The LED is lit when
LOCAL is selected594.3  The Drive and Programming Modes

Output Frequency Display

Monitors the frequency output by the drive.

Drive Mode
Output Current Display

Output Voltage Reference

Monitors the output current of the drive.

Monitors the output voltage of the drive.

Drive Mode
Monitor Display

Verify Function

Setup

Programming
Mode

Parameter Setting

Drive Mode

Frequency Reference

Monitor parameters (U parameters) are displayed.

Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default settings.
Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on page 62.

A select list of parameters necessary to get the drive operational quickly.
to The Setup Group within the Programming Mode on page 61.

Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings.
List on page 179.

Refer

Refer to Parameter

Returns to the frequency reference display screen.

 Drive Mode Details
The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode:• Run and stop the drive.
• Monitor the operation status of the drive (frequency reference, output frequency, output current, output voltage,etc.).
• View information on an alarm.
Note:

Select “Drive Mode” when running. The mode can be switched to any mode (program mode, etc.) other than drive mode while
the drive is stopped. However, the drive cannot be operated in other modes. Return the mode to “Drive Mode” after completing
periodic inspection.

Figure 4.4 illustrates changing the default frequency reference of F 0.00 (0 Hz) to F 6.00 (6 Hz) while in Drive Mode.
This example assumes the drive is set to LOCAL.

60

4.3  The Drive and Programming Modes
Frequency reference
display at power up

Press to select thedigit to the rightPress to select LOCAL

Press until the frequency
reference becomes 6 Hz

Figure 4.4 Setting the Frequency Reference while in Drive ModeNote:

The drive will not accept a frequency reference set value unless the ENTER key is pressed after the frequency reference is entered.
This feature prevents accidental setting of the frequency reference. By setting o2-05 (Frequency Reference Setting Method
Selection) to 1 (Enabled), the drive will accept the frequency reference while it is being adjusted on the digital operator.

 Programming Mode Details
The following actions are possible in the programming mode:• Verify Function: Verify parameter setting changes from original default values.
• Setup Group: Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup.
• Parameter Setting Mode: Access and edit all parameter settings.
The Setup Group within the Programming Mode
In Setup Group, the user can access the minimum group of parameters required to operate the application.
Note:

Setup Group parameters are listed in Table 4.4.

Start-Up Programming& Operation

Figure 4.5 illustrates the keys to press to enter the Setup Group.
In this example, the source of the frequency reference is changed from the control circuit terminals to the LED
Operator (i.e., b1-01 is changed from 1 to 0).
Frequency reference
appears when powered up

Press until
appears<1>
Parameter Display

4

LED Operator

Control Circuit
Terminal Select digit
to edit<2>
Parameter Display(2x)<1> Move to the right to change parameter settings. Scroll
down to view and check settings in the Setup Mode.
<2> To return to the Top Menu, press. To view or edit
other parameters, press
and.

Figure 4.5 Setup Group Example

614.3  The Drive and Programming Modes Changing Parameter Settings or Values
This example explains changing C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10.0 seconds (default) to 20.0 seconds.
Step

Display/Result

1.

Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2.

Press thekey until the Setup Mode Screen appears.

3.

Press thekey to view the parameter setting display.

4.

Scroll through parameters by pressing the

5.

Press
flashes)

to view the current setting value (10.0). (Number farthest to the left

6.

Press

until the desired number is selected. (“1” flashes)

7.

Press the

8.

Press

9.

The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step 4.

key until C1-01 appears.

key and enter 0020.0.
and the drive will confirm the change.

10. Press the

key until back at the initial display.

 Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu
The Verify Menu lists edited parameters from the Programming Mode. The Verify Menu helps determine which
settings have been changed, and is particularly useful when replacing a drive. If no settings have been changed the
Verify Menu will read
. The Verify menu also allows users to access and re-edit edited parameters.
Note:

The Verify Menu will not display parameters from the A1 group even if those parameters have been changed from default
settings.

The following example is a continuation of the steps beginning on page 62. Here, parameter C1-01 is accessed using
the Verify Menu and is changed again to 20.0 s.
To check the list of edited parameters:
Step
1.

Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2.

Press

3.

Press
to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their
original default settings.
Scroll through the list by pressing the
key.

4.

Press thekey until C1-01 appears.

5.

Press thekey to access the setting value. (number farthest to the left flashes)

62

until the display shows the “Verify” representation.

Display/Result4.3  The Drive and Programming Modes Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE
Entering the run command using the LED operator is referred to as LOCAL, while entering the run command from anexternal device via the control circuit terminals or network option is referred to as REMOTE.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied when switching from LOCAL mode
to REMOTE mode when b1-07 = 1, resulting in death or serious injury. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery and electrical connections
prior to switching between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode.

There are two ways to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE.
Note:

1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit.
2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run.

 Using the LO/RE Key on the LED Operator
Step

Display/Result

1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2.

Press
. The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in Local.
To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press the
key again.

 Using Input Terminals S1 through S5 to Switch between LO/RE
Switch between LOCAL and REMOTE using one of the digital input terminals S1 through S5 (set the corresponding
parameter H1-01 through H1-05 to “1”).
Follow the example below to set the digital input terminals.
Note:

1. For a list of digital input selections, Refer to Parameter List on page 183.
2. Setting a multi-function input terminal to a value of 1 disables the LO/RE key on the LED operator.
Start-Up Programming& Operation

 Parameters Available in the Setup Group Setup Mode (STUP)
Parameters used for this drive are classified into A to U. To simplify the drive setup, frequently used parameters are
selected and input into Setup Mode.
is displayed.
1. To set a parameter, the Setup Mode must be displayed first. Press the Up/Down key until
2. Select the parameter and change the setting. Table 4.4 lists parameters available in the Setup group. If the desired
parameter cannot be set in the Setup mode, use the Parameter Setting mode.

4

Table 4.4 Setup Group Parameters
Parameter
b1-01
b1-02
b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
C6-01
C6-02
d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04

Name
Frequency Reference Selection
Run Command Selection
Stop Method Selection
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Drive Duty Selection
Carrier Frequency Selection
Frequency Reference 1
Frequency Reference 2
Frequency Reference 3
Frequency Reference 4

Parameter
d1-17
E1-01
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E2-01
H4-02
L1-01
L3-04

Name
Jog Frequency Reference
Input Voltage Reference
Maximum Output Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Base Frequency
Minimum Output Frequency
Motor Rated Current
Terminal AM Gain Setting
Motor Protection Function Selection
Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration

634.4  Start-up Flowchart

4.4  Start-up Flowchart
This section summarizes the basic steps required to start the drive. The flowchart is intended as a quick reference tohelp familiarize the user with start-up procedures.

 Flowchart: Basic Start-up
Figure 4.5 describes basic start-up sequence for the drive and motor system. This sequence varies slightly
depending on application. Use drive default parameter settings in simple applications that do not require highprecision.
START
Install and wire the drive as explained in Chapters 1, 2 and 3
Apply main power on to the drive.
Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power.
Set the basic parameters:* b1-01/02 for frequency reference and run command source selection* H1-, H2-01, H3-, H4- , H5-  for I/O terminal setting* d1-  for multi-speed references if used
* C1- and C2- for accel./decel. and S-curve time settings* C6-01 for heavy/normal duty mode selection* L3-04 if braking options are used
* E1- , V/f Characteristics* E2- , Motor 1 parameters

Run the motor without load; check the rotation direction and operation.
Verify external signal commands to the drive work as desired.
Couple the load or machine to the motor. Run the machine and check for desired operation.
Fine tune parameters. Adjust application settings if necessary.
Check the machine operation and verify parameter settings.
Drive is ready to run the application.

Figure 4.6 Basic Start-Up64

4.5  Powering Up the Drive

4.5  Powering Up the Drive Powering Up the Drive and Operation Status Display
 Powering Up the Drive
Review the following checklist before turning the power on.
Item to Check

Power supply voltage

Drive output terminals
and motor terminals
Control circuit terminals
Drive control terminal status
Status of the loadand connected machinery

Description
Ensure the power supply voltage is correct:
200 V class: single-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz
Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
(for single-phase 200 V class models, wire only R/L1 and S/L2)
Check for proper grounding of drive and motor.
Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U, V, and W.
Check control circuit terminal connections.
Open all control circuit terminals (off ).
Uncouple the motor from the load.

 Status Display
When the power supply to the drive is turned on, the LED operator lights will appear as follows:
Name

Fault

Description
The data display area displays the frequency reference.

Main circuit low voltage (ex)is lit.

Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes andPossible Solutions on page 129 for more information and possible solution.
are lit.

and V/f Pattern Setting
Setting the V/f pattern according to the application. Refer to E: Motor Parameters on page 90 for details on setting
the V/f pattern.

 Notes when Setting the V/f Pattern
Set the maximum output frequency to match the motor characteristics.
If the V/f pattern voltage is increased motor torque may also increase. However, if the V/f voltage is set too highthese problems may occur:• Excessive motor current.
• Motor overheat or vibration.

Start-Up Programming& Operation

No.
NormalOperation

465

4.6  No-Load Operation Test Run

4.6  No-Load Operation Test Run
 No-Load Operation Test Run
This section explains how to operate the drive with the motor uncoupled from the load during a test run.

 Before Starting the Motor
Check the following items before operation:• Ensure the area around the motor is safe.
• Ensure external emergency stop circuitry is working properly and other safety precautions have been taken.

 During Operation
Check the following items during operation:• The motor should rotate smoothly (i.e., no abnormal noise or oscillation).
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.

 No-Load Operation Instructions
The following example illustrates a test run procedure using the digital operator.
Note:

Before starting the motor, set the frequency reference d1-01 to 6 Hz.
Step

Display/Result

1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2. Press the

key to select LOCAL. The LO/RE LED will turn on.

to give the drive a Run command. RUN will light and the motor will
3. Pressrotate at 6 Hz.

STOP

Off

On
Motor

4. Ensure the motor is rotating in the correct direction and no faults or alarms occur.
ForwardIf there is no error in step 4, press
to increase the frequency reference.
Increase the frequency in 10 Hz increments verifying smooth operation results at all
5.
speeds. For each frequency, monitor the drive output current (U1-03) through the
LED operator to confirm the current is well below the motor rated current.

6. The drive should operate normally. Press
until the motor comes to a complete stop.

to stop the motor. RUN flashes

Flashing

66

Off4.7  Test Run with Load Connected

4.7  Test Run with Load Connected Test Run with the Load Connected
After performing a no-load test run connect the load and proceed to run the motor and load together.

 Notes on Connected Machinery• Clear the area around the motor.
• The motor should come to a complete stop without problems.
• Connect the machinery.
• Fasten all installation screws properly. Check that the motor and connected machinery are held in place.
• Confirm that the Fast-stop circuit or mechanical safety measures operate correctly.
• Be ready to press the STOP button in case of emergency.

 Checklist Before Operation• The motor should rotate in the proper direction.
• The motor should accelerate and decelerate smoothly.

 Operating the Motor under Loaded Conditions

Start-Up Programming& Operation

Test run the application similarly to the no-load test procedure when connecting the machinery to the motor.
• Check monitor parameter U1-03 to ensure there is no overcurrent.
• If the application permits running the load in the reverse direction, try changing motor direction and thefrequency reference while watching for abnormal motor oscillation or vibration.
• Correct any problems that occurs with hunting, oscillation, or other control-related issues.

4674.8  Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings

4.8  Verifying and Backing Up Parameter Settings
Check changes to parameter settings using the Verify function. Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu
on page 62.
Save the verified parameter settings. Change the access level or set a password to the drive to prevent accidental
modification of parameter settings.

 Parameter Access Level: A1-01
Setting the Access Level for “Operation only” (A1-01 = 0) allows the user to access parameters A1- and U-
only. Other parameters are not displayed.
No.
A1-01

Parameter
Name
Access Level
Selection

Description

Setting
Range

Default

Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.
0: Operation only (A1-01 and A1-04 can be set and monitored. U parameters can bemonitored)
2: Advanced Access Level (All parameters can be set and monitored)

0, 2

2

 Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05
The user can set a password to the drive to restrict access. The password is selected via parameter A1-05. The
selected password must be entered in parameter A1-04 to unlock parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04
must match the value programmed into A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until thevalue programmed into A1-04 correctly matches the value as programmed in parameter A1-05: A1-01 and A1-03.
Note:

Parameter A1-05 is hidden from view. To display A1-05, access parameter A1-04 and simultaneously depress the
key.

key and the Copy Function (Optional)
Parameter settings can be copied to another drive to simplify parameter restoration or multiple drive setup. The RS232C Interface Unit (Removable Type) (SI-232/JC-H) is required to use the following options with SF-520 drives: LED Operator (JVOP-182-H)
The LED operator operates the drive and supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings.

 Engineering Software Tools
Engineering software tools is a PC software tool for parameter management, monitoring, and diagnosis. Engineering
software tools can load, store, and copy drive parameter settings. For details, refer to Help in the software.
The installation files can be obtained at no charge from:http://cyclo.shi.co.jp

684.9  Test Run Checklist

4.9  Test Run Checklist
Review the checklist before performing a test run. Check each item that applies.






No.

ChecklistPage

1

Thoroughly read the manual before performing a test run.

—

2

Turn the power on.

65

3

Set the voltage for the power supply to E1-01.

90

Check the items that correspond to the control mode being used.
WARNING! Ensure start/stop and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing the drive. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury from moving equipment. When programmed for 3-Wire control, a momentary closure on terminal S1 may cause the drive tostart.




No.
4

The



5

To give a run command and frequency reference from the LED Digital Operator, press
LOCAL. The LO/RE key lights while LOCAL is displayed.

6

If the motor rotates in the opposite direction during the test run, switch two of the drive output
terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).

65



7

Select the correct duty rating (C6-01) for the application.

—

Checklist

Pageshould illuminate after giving a run command.

—
63

Set the correct values for the motor rated current (E2-01) and the motor protection selection (L1-01) toensure motor thermal protection.
If the run command and frequency reference are provided via the control circuit terminals, set the drivefor REMOTE and be sure the LO/RE light is out.
If the control circuit terminals should supply the frequency reference, select the correct voltage input
signal level (0 to 10 V) or the correct current input signal level (4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA).

63



8



9



10




11

Set the proper voltage to terminal A1. (0 to 10 V).

75

12When current input is used, switch the drive built-in DIP switch S1 from the V-side (OFF) to I-side (ON).

—13

Set the minimum and maximum frequency references to the desired values. Make the following
adjustments if the drive does not operate as expected: Gain adjustment: Set the maximum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input gain (H3-03) until the frequency reference value reaches thedesired value. Bias adjustment: Set the minimum voltage/current signal and adjust the analog input
bias (H3-04) until the frequency reference value reaches the desired minimum value.

—



—

63

Start-Up Programming& Operation

to set to469

4.9  Test Run Checklist

This Page Intentionally Blank

70

5Parameter Details
5.1 A: INITIALIZATION................................................................................................. 72
5.2 B: APPLICATION..................................................................................................... 75
5.3 C: TUNING............................................................................................................... 81
5.4 D: REFERENCE SETTINGS...................................................................................... 86
5.5 E: MOTOR PARAMETERS........................................................................................ 90
5.6 H: TERMINAL FUNCTIONS..................................................................................... 94
5.7 L: PROTECTION FUNCTIONS............................................................................... 107
5.8 N: SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS................................................................................. 116
5.9 O: OPERATOR RELATED SETTINGS..................................................................... 117
5.10 U: MONITOR PARAMETERS................................................................................. 122

71

5.1  A: Initialization

5.1  A: Initialization
The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the drive. Parameters involving thedisplay language, access levels, initialization, and password are located in this group.

 A1: Initialization
 A1-01: Access Level Selection
Allows or restricts access to drive parameters.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

A1-01

Access Level Selection

0, 2

2

Setting 0: Operation Only
Access is restricted to parameters A1-01, A1-04, and all U monitor parameters.
Setting 2: Advanced Access Level (A) and Setup Access Level (S)All parameters can be viewed and edited.
Notes on Parameter Access• If the drive parameters are password protected by A1-04 and A1-05, parameters A1-01 and A1-03 cannot be
modified.
• If parameters are changed via serial communication the parameters can not be changed from the digital operator
until an Enter command is received from the serial communication.

 A1-03: Initialize Parameters
Resets parameter settings back to their original default values. After the initialization the parameter automatically
returns to 0.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

A1-03

Initialize Parameters

0, 2220, 3330

0

Setting 0: No Initialization
Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialization
Resets all parameters back to their original default settings with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as forward run
and reverse run, respectively. Refer to Setting 40/41: Forward Run/Reverse Run Command for 2-Wire Sequence on
page 98 for details.
Setting 3330: 3-Wire Initialization
The drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5 configured as run, stop,and forward/reverse respectively. Refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 94 for details.
Notes on Parameter Initialization
The parameters shown in Table 5.1 will not be reset when the drive is initialized by setting A1-03 = 2220 or 3330.
Table 5.1 Parameters not Changed by Drive Initialization
No.

Parameter Name

C6-01

Drive Duty Selection

E1-03

V/f Pattern Selection

o2-04

Drive/kVA Selection

L8-35

Installation Selection

 A1-04, A1-05: Password and Password Setting
A1-04 is for entering the password when the drive is locked. A1-05 is a hidden parameter used to set the password.
No.
A1-04
A1-05

Parameter Name
Password
Password Setting

Setting Range

Default

0 to 9999

0

How to use the Password
The user can set a password for the drive to restrict access. The password is set to A1-05 and must be entered to A104 to unlock parameter access. Until the correct password is entered, the following parameters cannot be viewed oredited: A1-01 and A1-03.
72

5.1  A: Initialization
The instructions below demonstrate how to set a new password. Here, the password set is “1234”. An explanation
follows on how to enter the password to unlock the parameters.
Table 5.2 Setting the Password for Parameter Lock
Step

Display/Result

1.

Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.

2.

Scroll to the Parameter Setup display and press

3.

Scroll to the right by pressing

4.

Select the flashing digits by pressing

5.

Select A1-04 by pressing

6.

Press thekey while holding downat the same time. A1-05 will appear.
Note: A1-05 is normally hidden, but can be displayed by following the directions
listed here.

7.

Press the

8.

Use

9.

Press

.

.
.

.

“05” flashes

key.
,

and

to enter the password.

to save what was entered.

10. The display automatically returns to the display shown in step 5.
Table 5.3 Check to see if A1-01 is locked (continuing from step 10 above)
Step

Display/Result

1.

Press

to display A1-01.

2.

Press

to display the value set to A1-01.

3.

Press

and

4.

Press

to return to the first display.

“01” flashes

Parameter Details, making sure that the setting values cannot be changed.

Table 5.4 Enter the Password to Unlock Parameters (continuing from step 4 above)
Step

Display/Result

1.

Press

to enter the parameter setup display.

2.

Press

to select the flashing digits as shown.

3.

Press

to scroll to A1-04.

4.

Enter the password “1234”.

5.

Press

6.

Drive returns to the parameter display.

7.

Press

8.

Press
to display the value set to A1-01. If the first "0" blinks, parametersettings are unlocked.

9.

Use

5
“01” flashes

to save the new password.

and scroll to A1-01.

andto change the value if desired. This is not typical.

to save the setting, or
10. Presssaving changes.

to return to the previous display without735.1  A: Initialization
Step

Display/Result

11. The display automatically returns to the parameter display.
Note:

74

Parameter settings can be edited after entering the correct password. Performing a 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization resets the
password to “0000”. Reenter the password to parameter A1-05 after drive initialization.

5.2  b: Application

5.2  b: Application
Application parameters configure the source of the frequency reference, the Run command, DC Injection Braking,and other application-related settings.

 b1: Mode of Operation
 b1-01: Frequency Reference Selection
Use parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source for the REMOTE mode.
Note:

1.	If a Run command is input to the drive but the frequency reference entered is 0 or below the minimum frequency, the RUN
indicator LED on the digital operator will illuminate.
2. Press the LO/RE key to set the drive to LOCAL and use the operator keypad to enter the frequency reference.

No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-01

Frequency Reference Selection

0 to 3

1

Setting 0: Digital Operator
Using this setting, the frequency reference can be input by:• Switching between the multi-speed references in the d1- parameters.
• Entering the frequency reference on the operator keypad.
Setting 1: Terminals (Analog Input Terminals)
Using this setting, an analog frequency reference can be entered from terminal A1 using a 0 to 10 Vdc or a 0/4 to 20
mA signal.
Note:

The input signal type must be set up by setting DIP switch S1 and adjusting parameter H3-01. Refer to H3-01: Terminal A1
Signal Level Selection on page 103.

Using a 0 to 10 Vdc Voltage Input Signal:
Use a circuit such as the one shown in Figure 5.1 or an external 0 to 10 Vdc voltage source like a PLC analog output
and set the input level selection for A1 in parameter H3-01 as desired. Refer to H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level
Selection on page 103.

Parameter Details

SF-520+V (+10.5V, 20mA)
1k

0 to 10 V

A1ACMain Frequency Reference(voltage input)

5Frequency Reference
CommonFigure 5.1 Setting the Frequency Reference by Voltage Input

Using a 0/4 to 20 mA Current Input Signal:
Connect input A1 to an external current source such as the one shown in Figure 5.2. Make sure that switch S1 is set
to “I” and set the appropriate signal level by entering 2 (4 to 20 mA) or 3 (0 to 20 mA) into parameter H3-01.

75

5.2  b: Application

DIP switch S1
I

Drive

V

+V (+10.5V, 20mA)

0 or 4 to 20mA input

A1

Frequency reference(current input)

AC

Frequency reference common

Figure 5.2 Setting the Frequency Reference by Current Input

Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
Using this setting, the frequency reference can be entered via RS-422/485 serial communications using the
MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol by using an optional SI-485/JC-H Interface for MEMOBUS communication. Refer toPeripheral Devices & Options on page 159. For details about the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol, Refer to MEMOBUS/
Modbus Communications on page 199.
Note:

If the frequency reference source is set for MEMOBUS/Modbus but a communication interface option is not installed, an oPE05
Programming Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the RUN command will not be accepted.

Setting 3: Potentiometer Option
Using this setting, the frequency reference can be set by a potentiometer mounted at the drive using an AI-V3/J
Potentiometer option unit. Refer to Peripheral Devices & Options on page 159 and the option unit documentation.
Note:

If the frequency reference source is set for the potentiometer option (b1-01 = 3) but an option board is not installed, an oPE05
Programming Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the RUN command will not be accepted.

 b1-02: Run Command Selection
Parameter b1-02 determines the Run and Stop command source in the REMOTE mode.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. Clear personnel, secure equipment, and check sequence and safety circuitry before starting the drive. Failure
to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-02

Run Command Selection

0 to 2

1

Setting 0: Digital Operator
Using this setting, the RUN and STOP keys on the operator keypad will start and stop the motor. The LED in the LO/
RE key will be on to indicate that the Run command is assigned to the operator. The example below shows how thedrive can be operated if b1-02 is set to 0.
Step

Display/Result

1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears.
2. Set the frequency reference to F6.00 (6 Hz).

key to start the motor. The RUN indicator LED will light and the
3. Press the
motor will begin rotating at 6 Hz.

key to stop the motor. The RUN light will flash until the motor
4. Press thecomes to a complete stop.

76

off

on

flashingoff5.2  b: Application
Setting 1: Control Circuit Terminal
This setting requires that the Run and Stop commands are entered from the digital input terminals. The following
sequences can be used:• 2-Wire sequence:
Two inputs (FWD/Stop-REV/Stop). Initializing the drive by setting A1-01 = 2220, presets the terminals S1 and S2 tothese functions. This is the default setting of the drive. Refer to Setting 40/41: Forward Run/Reverse Run Commandfor 2-Wire Sequence on page 98.
• 3-Wire sequence:
Inputs S1, S2, S5 (Start-Stop-FWD/REV). Initialize the drive by setting A1-01 = 3330 presets the terminals S1, S2 andS5 to these functions. Refer to Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence on page 94.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
Using this setting, the Run command can be entered via RS-422/485 serial communications using the MEMOBUS/
Modbus protocol and the optional SI-485/JC-H Interface for MEMOBUS/Modbus communication. Refer to Peripheral
Devices & Options on page 159. For details about the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol, Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications on page 199.

 b1-03: Stopping Method Selection
Select how the drive stops the motor when a Stop command is entered or when the Run command is removed.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-03

Stopping Method Selection

0, 1

0

Setting 0: Ramp to Stop
When a Stop command is issued or the Run command is removed, the drive will decelerate the motor to stop. The
deceleration rate is determined by the active deceleration time. The default deceleration time is set to parameter C102.
DC Injection braking can be applied at the end of the ramp in order to completely stop high inertia loads. Refer tob2: DC Injection Braking on page 79 for details.
Run Command

ON

OFF

Output Frequency
Decelerates according to thespecified deceleration time

Decel Time
(C1-02, etc.)
DC Injection Braking

Parameter Details

Minimum Output Freq.
(E1-09)DC Injection
Current (b2-02)

DC Braking Time at Stop (b2-04)

Figure 5.3 Ramp to Stop

5

Setting 1: Coast to Stop
When a Stop command is issued or the Run command is removed, the drive will shut off its output and the motor
will coast (uncontrolled deceleration) to stop where the stopping time is determined by the inertia and the frictionin the driven system.

77

5.2  b: Application
Run
CommandON

OFF

OutputFrequency
Drive output frequency is shut off

Motor rpm

Figure 5.4 Coast to Stop
Note:

After a stop is initiated, any subsequent Run command that is entered will be ignored for a certain time. Do not attempt to start
the motor again until it has come to a complete stop. To start the motor before it has stopped completely, use DC Injection at
start (Refer to b2-03: DC Injection Braking Time at Start on page 79).

 b1-04: Reverse Operation Selection
For some applications, reverse motor rotation is not appropriate and may even cause problems (e.g., air handlingunits, pumps, etc.). Setting parameter b1-04 to 1 instructs the drive to ignore any Reverse run commands.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-04

Reverse Operation Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Reverse Operation Enabled
Possible to operate the motor in both forward and reverse directions.
Setting 1: Reverse Operation Disabled
Drive disregards a Reverse run command or a negative frequency reference.

 b1-07: LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection
The drive has the following three separate control sources that can be switched using digital inputs or the LO/RE key
on the digital operator (for details Refer to Setting 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection on page 95 and Refer to Setting 2:
Serial Communication Reference Selection on page 95):
• LOCAL - The digital operator is used to set the reference and the Run command.
• REMOTE - The settings of b1-01 and b1-02 determine where the frequency reference and Run command are input from.
• Serial Communications by MEMOBUS/Modbus.
When switching from LOCAL to REMOTE, or to serial communication, the Run command may already be present
at the location the source was switched to. Parameter b1-07 can be used to determine how the Run command istreated in this case.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-07

LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Run Command Must Be Cycled
If the Run command is issued differently in the old and new control source (e.g. old - terminals, new - serial
communications) and it is active at the new source when switching takes place, the drive will either not start or it
will stop if it was running before. The Run command has to be cycled to start from the new control source.
Setting 1: Continue Running
If the Run command is active at the new control source, the drive starts or continues running. There is no need tocycle the Run command.
WARNING! The drive may start unexpectedly if switching control sources when b1-07 = 1. Clear all personnel away from rotating machinery andelectrical connections prior to switching control sources. Failure to comply may cause death or serious injury.

 b1-08: Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode
As a safety precaution, the drive will not normally respond to a Run input when the digital operator is being used toadjust parameters in the Programming Mode (Verify Menu, Setup Mode, Parameter Settings Mode). If required by
the application b1-08 can be used to changed this functionality.

78

No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-08

Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode0 to 20

5.2  b: Application
Setting 0: Disabled
A Run command is not accepted while the digital operator is in Programming Mode.
Setting 1: Enabled
A Run command is accepted in any digital operator mode.
Setting 2: Prohibit Programming During Run
It is not possible to enter the Programming Mode as long as the drive output is active.

 b1-14: Phase Order Selection
Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Defaultb1-14

Phase Order Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Standard Phase Order
Setting 1: Switched Phase Order b1-17: Run Command at Power Up
This parameter is used to determine whether an external Run command that is active during power up of the drive
will start the drive or not.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

b1-17

Run Command at Power Up

0 or 10

Setting 0: Run Command at Power Up is not Issued
The Run command has to be cycled to start the drive.
Note:

For safety reasons, the drive is initially set up not to accept a Run command at power up (b1-17 = “0”). If a Run command isissued at power up, the RUN indicator LED will flash quickly. Change parameter b1-17 to 1 if a Run command active at power up
shall be accepted by the drive.

WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. If b1-17 is set to 1 and an external Run command is active during power up, the motor will begin rotating assoon as the power is switched on. Proper precautions must be taken to ensure that the area around the motor is safe prior to powering up the drive.
Failure to comply may cause serious injury.

 b2: DC Injection Braking
These parameters determine how the DC Injection Braking feature operates. Parameters involving the starting
frequency, current level, braking time are located here.

 b2-02: DC Injection Braking Current
Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive rated current. If set to larger than 50%, the carrier
frequency is automatically reduced to 1 kHz.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

b2-02

DC Injection Braking Current

0 to 75%

50%

The level of DC Injection Braking current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor
shaft. Increasing the current level will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings. This parametershould only be increased to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft.

 b2-03: DC Injection Braking Time at Start
Sets the time of DC Injection Braking at start. It can be used to stop a coasting motor before restarting it or to apply
a braking torque at start. Disabled when set to 0.00 s.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

b2-03

DC Injection Braking Time at Start

0.00 to 10.00 s

0.00 sNote:

Before starting an uncontrolled rotating motor (e.g., a fan motor driven by windmill effect), use DC Injection to stop the motor
before starting it. Otherwise motor stalling and other faults can occur.

79

Parameter Details

Setting 1: Run Command and Power Up is Issued
An external Run command active during power up is issued and the drive starts to operate the motor as soon as itgets ready for operation (i.e. once the internal start up process is complete).

55.2  b: Application

 b2-04: DC Injection Braking Time at Stop
When the output frequency falls below the minimum output frequency setting E1-09, the drive applies DC injection
for the time set in b2-04. Used to completely stop a motor with high inertia load after ramp down. Increase thesetting if the motor tends to coast by inertia after a stop.

80

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

b2-04

DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

0.00 to 10.00 s

0.50 s5.3  C: Tuning

5.3  C: Tuning
C parameters are used to set the acceleration and deceleration characteristics, as well as S-curves. Other parametersin this group cover settings for slip compensation, torque compensation, and carrier frequency.

 C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times C1-01 to C1-04: Accel/Decel Times 1 and 2
Two sets of acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive. They can be selected by a digital input.
Acceleration time parameters always set the time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Deceleration time parameters always set the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to 0. C1-01 andC1-02 are the default active accel/decel settings.
No.

Parameter Name

C1-01

Acceleration Time 1

C1-02

Deceleration Time 1

C1-03

Acceleration Time 2

C1-04

Deceleration Time 2

Setting Range

Default

0.0 to 6000.0 s

10.0 sSwitching Acceleration Times by Digital Input
Accel/decel times 1 are active by default if no input is set. The accel/decel time 2 can be activated by a digital input(H1- = 7) as explained in Table 5.5.
Table 5.5 Accel/Decel Time Selection by Digital Input
Active Times

Accel/Decel Time Sel. H1-oo = 7

Acceleration

Deceleration

0

C1-01

C1-02

1

C1-03

C1-04

Figure 5.5 shows an operation example for changing accel/decel. times. The example below requires that the
stopping method be set for “Ramp to Stop” (b1-03 = 0).

FWD (REV)Run command

Accel/Decel Time Selection(Digital Input H1-0x = “7”)Decel Time 2(C1-04)

Parameter Details

Outputfrequency

Decel Time 1(C1-02)
Accel Time 2(C1-03)

Accel Time 1(C1-01)

Decel Time 1(C1-02)

ON

OFF

ON

5
ON

Figure 5.5 Timing Diagram of Accel/Decel Time Change C1-09: Fast-stop TimeParameter C1-09 will set a special deceleration that is used when certain faults occur or that can be operated byclosing a digital input configured as H1- = 15 (N.O. input) or H1- = 17 (N.C. input). The input does not haveto be closed continuously, even a momentary closure will trigger the Fast-stop operation.
Unlike standard deceleration, once the Fast-stop operation is initiated, the drive cannot be restarted until thedeceleration is complete, the Fast-stop input is cleared, and the Run command is cycled.
A digital output programmed for “During Fast-stop” (H2-01/02/03 = 4C) will be closed as long as Fast-stop is active.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C1-09

Fast-stop Time

0.0 to 6000.0 s

10.0 sNOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. When faulted, the drive output shuts off, and the motor coasts. To avoid thisuncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely, set an appropriate Fast-stop time to C1-09.

81

5.3  C: Tuning C2: S-Curve Characteristics
Use S-curve characteristics to smooth acceleration and deceleration and to minimize abrupt shock to the load.

 C2-01 to C2-04: S-Curve Characteristics
C2-01 through C2-04 set separate S-curves for each section of the acceleration or deceleration.
No.

Parameter Name

C2-01

S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start

C2-02

S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End

C2-03

S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start

C2-04

S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End

Setting Range

Default
0.00 s0.00 to 10.00 s

0.00 s0.00 s0.00 sFigure 5.6 explains how S-curves are applied.
FWD runREV runC2-02
Outputfrequency

C2-03

C2-04

C2-01

C2-04

C2-01
C2-02

C2-03

Figure 5.6 S-Curve Timing Diagram - FWD/REV Operation

Setting the S-curve will increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
Actual accel time = accel time setting + (C2-01 + C2-02)/2
Actual decel time = decel time setting + (C2-03 + C2-04)/2

 C3: Slip Compensation
The Slip Compensation function prevents motor speed loss due to an increase in load.
Note:

Before making changes to the Slip Compensation parameters, make sure the motor parameters and V/f pattern are set properly.

 C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain
This parameter sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to bechanged, adjustments might be needed under the following situations:• If the speed at constant frequency reference is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-01.
• If the speed at constant frequency reference is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-01.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C3-01

Slip Compensation Gain

0.0 to 2.5

0.0

 C3-02: Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time
Adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to bechanged, adjustments might be needed under the following situations:• Decrease the setting when the slip compensation response is too slow.
• Increase this setting when the speed is not stable.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C3-02

Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time

0 to 10000 ms

2000 ms

 C4: Torque Compensation
The torque compensation function compensates for insufficient torque production at start-up or when a load isapplied.
Note:

82

Before making changes to the torque compensation gain make sure the motor parameters and V/f pattern are set properly.

5.3  C: Tuning C4-01: Torque Compensation Gain
Sets the gain for the torque compensation function.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C4-01

Torque Compensation Gain

0.00 to 2.50

1.00

The drive calculates the motor primary voltage loss using the output current and the terminal resistance value (E2-05)
and then adjusts the output voltage to compensate insufficient torque at start or when load is applied. The effect of
this voltage compensation can be increased or decreased using parameter C4-01.
Adjustment
Although this parameter rarely needs to be adjusted, small changes in increments of 0.05 may help in the following
situations:• Increase this setting when using a long motor cable.
• Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs.
Adjust C4-01 so that the output current does not exceed the drive rated current.

 C6: Carrier Frequency
 C6-01: Drive Duty Selection
The drive has two different duty modes from which to select based on the load characteristics. The drive rated
current, overload capacity, and carrier frequency will change depending upon the duty mode selection. Useparameter C6-01 to select Heavy Duty (HD) or Normal Duty (ND) for the application. Refer to Specifications on page171 for details about the rated current.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C6-01

Drive Duty Selection

0 or 10

Table 5.6 Differences between Heavy and Normal Duty
Mode

Heavy Duty Rating (HD)Normal Duty Rating (ND)

C6-01

0

1

Overload

Rated Load

100 %Characteristics

0Over load capability (oL2)

100 %

0

Motor Speed

100 %Use Normal Duty Rating for applications in which
the torque requirements drop along with the speed.
Examples include fans or pumps where a high overload
tolerance is not required.

150% of drive rated Heavy Duty current for 60 s

120% of drive rated Normal Duty current for 60 s

150%

120%

150%

120%

5 kHz

2 kHz Swing PWM

L3-02 Stall Prevention
during Acceleration
L3-06 Stall Prevention
during Run
Default Carrier
Frequency
Note:

Motor Speed

Rated Load

100 %Use Heavy Duty Rating for applications requiring ahigh overload tolerance with constant load torque.
Such applications include extruders and conveyors.

Application

Overload120 %By changing the Duty Mode the drive maximum applicable motor power changes and the E2-parameters are automatically
set to appropriate values.

 C6-02: Carrier Frequency Selection
Parameter C6-02 sets the switching frequency of the drive’s output transistors. It can be changed in order to reduce
audible noise and also reduce leakage current.
Note:

The drive rated current is reduced when the carrier frequency is set higher than the default value. Refer to Rated Current
Depending on Carrier Frequency on page 85.

No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

C6-02

Carrier Frequency Selection

1 to 7, F

2

83

Parameter Details

150 %

5

5.3  C: Tuning
Settings:
C6-02

Carrier Frequency

C6-02

Carrier Frequency

1

2.0 kHz5

12.5 kHz2

5.0 kHz615.0 kHz3

8.0 kHz

7

Swing PWM

410.0 kHzF

User defined (C6-03 to C6-05)

Note:

Swing PWM uses 2.0 kHz carrier frequency as a base but by applying special PWM patterns the audible noise of the motor is kept
low.

Guidelines for Carrier Frequency Parameter Setup
Symptom

RemedySpeed and torque are unstable at low speeds.
Noise from the drive is affecting peripheral devices.

Lower the carrier frequency.

Excessive leakage current from the drive.
Wiring between the drive and motor is too long. <1>

Increase the carrier frequency or use Swing PWM. <2>

Audible motor noise is too loud.

<1> The carrier frequency may need to be lowered if the motor cable is too long. Refer to the table below.
<2> In Normal Duty default setting is 7 (Swing PWM), equivalent to setting 2 kHz. Increasing the carrier frequency is fine when using thedrive is set for Normal Duty, but remember that the drive rated current falls when the carrier frequency is increased.
Wiring Distance

Up to 50 m

Up to 100 m

Greater than 100 m

C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)

1 to F (15 kHz)1, 2 (5 kHz), 7

1 (2 kHz), 7

 C6-03/C6-04/C6-05: Carrier Frequency Upper Limit/Lower Limit/Proportional Gain
Use these parameters to set a user defined or a variable carrier frequency. To set the upper and lower limits, first set
C6-02 to “F”.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

C6-03

Carrier Frequency Upper Limit

1.0 to 15.0 kHz

C6-04

Carrier Frequency Lower Limit

1.0 to 15.0 kHz

C6-05

Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain

0 to 99

Default<1><1> The default value is determined by the drive capacity (o2-04), and is reinitialized when the value set to C6-01 is changed.

Setting a Fixed User Defined Carrier Frequency
A carrier frequency between the fixed selectable values can be entered in parameter C6-03 when C6-02 is set to “F”.
Parameter C6-04 must also be adjusted to the same value as C6-03.
Setting a Variable Carrier Frequency
The carrier frequency can be set up to change linearly with the output frequency. In this case the upper and lower
limits for the carrier frequency and the carrier frequency proportional gain (C6-03, C6-04, C6-05) have to be set asshown in Figure 5.7.
Carrier Frequency
C6-03

C6-04

OutputFrequency x C6-05 x K*
Output Frequency
E1-04
Max Output Frequency

Figure 5.7 Carrier Frequency Changes Relative to Output Frequency

K is a coefficient determined by the value of C6-03:• 10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ to 5.0 kHz: K = 2• 5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1• C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Note:

1.	A carrier frequency error (oPE11) will occur when the carrier frequency proportional gain is greater than 6 while C6-03 is lessthan C6-04.
2. When C6-05 is set lower than 7, C6-04 is disabled and the carrier frequency will be fixed to the value set in C6-03.

84

5.3  C: Tuning Rated Current Depending on Carrier Frequency
The tables below show the drive output current depending on the carrier frequency settings. The 2 kHz value isequal to the Normal Duty rated current, the 8/10 kHz value is equal to the Heavy Duty rated current. The carrier
frequency determines the output current linearly. Use the data below to calculate output current values for carrier
frequencies not listed in the tables.
Note:

In Heavy Duty mode the maximum rated output current is equal to the 8/10 kHz value, even if the carrier frequency is reduced.
Table 5.7 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 10 kHz

Model
SF520S
A20A40A75200 V Single Phase Units
Rated Current [A]
2 kHz
10 kHz
1.9
1.6
3.5
3.0
6.0
5.0

15 kHz
1.3
2.4
4.0

Model
SF5202
A10
A20
A40
A75

200 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A]
2 kHz
10 kHz
1.2
0.8
1.9
1.6
3.5
3.0
6.0
5.0

15 kHz
0.6
1.3
2.4
4.0

Table 5.8 Drives with Heavy Duty Default Carrier Frequency of 8 kHz
200 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A]ModelSF52022 kHz
8 kHz
15 kHz
1A5
9.6
8.0
6.4
2A2
12.0
11.0
8.8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

400 V Three Phase Units
Rated Current [A]ModelSF52042 kHz
8 kHz
15 kHz
A20
1.2
1.2
0.7
A40
2.1
1.8
1.1
A75
4.1
3.4
2.0
1A5
5.4
4.8
2.9
2A2
6.9
5.5
3.3

Parameter Details

200 V Single Phase Units
Rated Current [A]ModelSF520S
2 kHz
8 kHz
15 kHz
1A5
9.6
8.0
6.4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

5

85

5.4  d: Reference Settings

5.4  d: Reference Settings
The drive offers various ways of entering the frequency reference. The figure below gives an overview of thereference input, selections, and priorities.
b1-01(Freq. Reference Source 1)=3

Option Card=2
MEMOBUS comm.
Terminal A1
d1-01(Freq.Ref 1)

ComRef1
0=1

Digital Input
H1-  = 2

=0

REMOTE

MS 1

LOCAL

d1-02
d1-03
Frequency
Reference
2 through 8

d1-04

d1-07
d1-08

Jog Frequency

d1-17

MS 2
MS 3

0

MS 4

1

Frequency
Reference

MS 7
MS 8
Jog

Digital Input (H1-)Jog Reference (=6)

Multi-Step Speed

Figure 5.8 Frequency Reference Setting Hierarchy d1: Frequency Reference d1-01 to d1-08, d1-17: Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Reference
Up to 9 preset references (including Jog reference) can be programmed in the drive. The references can be switchedduring Run by digital inputs. The acceleration/deceleration to the new reference is performed using the active
acceleration/ deceleration time.
The Jog frequency must be selected by a separate digital input and has priority over the references 1 to 8.
Multi-speed reference 1 can be provided by analog input A1.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

d1-01 to d1-08

Frequency Reference 1 to 8

0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1>

0.00 Hz

Jog Frequency Reference

0.00 to 400.00 Hz <1>

5.00 Hz

d1-17<1> The upper limit is determined by the maximum output frequency (E1-04) and upper limit for the frequency reference (d2-01).

Multi-Step Speed Selection
Depending on how many speeds are used, some digital inputs have to be programmed for Multi-Step Speed
Reference 1, 2, 3 and 4 (H1- = 3, 4, 5). For the Jog reference a digital input must be set to H1- = 6.
Notes on using analog inputs as multi-speed 1 and 2:• If the frequency reference source is assigned to analog input A1 (b1-01 = 1), then this input will be used forFrequency Reference 1 instead of d1-01. If the reference source is assigned to the digital operator (b1-01 = 0), thend1-01 will be used as Frequency Reference 1.
The different speed references can be selected as shown in Table 5.9. Figure 5.9 illustrates the multi-step speed
selection.
Table 5.9 Multi-Step Speed Reference and Terminal Switch Combinations
Reference
Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01/A1)
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02)
Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03)
Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04)

86

Multi-Step
Speed
H1-oo = 3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Multi-Step
Speed 2H1-oo = 4
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

Multi-Step
Speed 3H1-oo = 5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Jog Reference
H1-oo = 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

5.4  d: Reference Settings
Multi-Step
Speed
H1-oo = 3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
−

Reference
Frequency Reference 5 (d1-05)
Frequency Reference 6 (d1-06)
Frequency Reference 7 (d1-07)
Frequency Reference 8 (d1-08)
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17) <1>

Multi-Step
Speed 2H1-oo = 4
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
−

Multi-Step
Speed 3H1-oo = 5
ON
ON
ON
ON
−

Jog Reference
H1-oo = 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON

<1> The Jog frequency overrides the frequency reference being used.
Frequency
reference

d1-08
d1-07
d1-06
d1-05
d1-04
d1-03
d1-01
(A1)

d1-02
d1-17

Time
FWD (REV) Run/Stop
Multi-step Speed Ref. 1

ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

Multi-step Speed Ref. 2
Multi-step Speed Ref. 3

ON

ON
ON

ON

Jog ReferenceON

Figure 5.9 Preset Reference Timing Diagram
Parameter Details d2: Frequency Upper/Lower Limits
By entering upper or lower frequency limits, the drive programmer can prevent operation of the drive above or
below levels that may cause resonance and or equipment damage.

 d2-01: Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Sets the maximum frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. This limit applies to all
frequency references.
Even if the frequency reference is set to a higher value, the drive internal frequency reference will not exceed thisvalue.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

d2-01

Frequency Reference Upper Limit

0.0 to 110.0%

100.0%

5 d2-02: Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Sets the minimum frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. This limit applies to all
frequency references.
If a lower reference than this value is input, the drive will run at the d2-02 level. If the drive is started with a lower
reference than d2-02, it will accelerate up to d2-02.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

d2-02

Frequency Reference Lower Limit

0.0 to 110.0%

0.0%

87

5.4  d: Reference Settings
Internal frequency
referenced2-01

Frequency Reference Upper Limit

Operatingrange

Frequency Reference Lower Limit

d2-02

Set frequency reference

Figure 5.10 Frequency Reference: Upper and Lower Limits d3: Jump Frequency
 d3-01, d3-02, d3-04: Jump Frequencies 1, 2, and Jump Frequency Width
In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery, the drive canbe programmed with three separate Jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specificfrequency ranges. If the speed reference falls within a Jump frequency dead band, the drive will clamp the frequency
reference just below the dead band and only accelerate past it when the frequency reference rises above the upper
end of the dead band.
Setting parameters d3-01 and d3-02 to 0.0 Hz disables the Jump frequency function.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

d3-01

Jump Frequency 1

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 Hzd3-02

Jump Frequency 2

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 Hzd3-04

Jump Frequency Width

0.0 to 20.0 Hz

1.0 HzFigure 5.11 shows the relationship between the Jump frequency and the output frequency.
Outputfrequency

Frequency
referenceincreases

Frequency
reference
decreases

Jump
Frequency
Width
d3-04
Jump Frequency 2
d3-02

Jump
Frequency
Width
d3-04

Jump Frequency 1
d3-01

Frequency
reference

Figure 5.11 Jump Frequency Operation
Note:

1.	The drive will use the active accel/decel time to pass through the specified dead band range but will not allow continuous
operation in that range.
2. When using more than one Jump frequency, make sure that d3-01 ≥ d3-02.

88

5.4  d: Reference Settings

 d4: Frequency Hold Function
 d4-01: Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection
This parameter is effective when either of the digital input functions listed below is used.
• Accel/decel ramp hold function (H1-= A)• Up/Down function (H1- = 10 and 11, sets the frequency reference by digital inputs)
Parameter d4-01 determines whether the frequency reference value is saved when the Run command is cleared or
the power supply is shut down.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

d4-01

Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection

0 or 10

The operation depends on with what function parameter d4-01 is used.
Setting 0: Disabled• Acceleration HoldThe hold value will be reset to 0 Hz when the Run command is canceled or the drive power is switched off. The
active frequency reference will be the value the drive uses when it restarts.
• Up/Down
The frequency reference value will be reset to 0 Hz when the Run command is canceled or the drive power isswitched off. The drive will start from 0 Hz when restarted.
Setting 1: Enabled• Acceleration Hold
The last hold value will be saved when the Run command or the drive power is switched off. The drive will use thevalue that was saved as the frequency reference when it restarts. The accel/decel hold input must be enabled theentire time or else the hold value will be cleared.
ON

Power supply

Hold Accel/Decel

OFF
OFF

ON

OFF
ON

OFF

ON

ON

d4-01 = 1

Parameter Details

Forward Run / StopONOFF

d4-01 = 05Frequency reference

Output frequency

Hold

Hold

Figure 5.12 Frequency Reference Hold with Accel/Decel Hold Function• Up/Down
The frequency reference value will be saved when the Run command or the drive power is switched off. The drive
will use the frequency reference that was saved when it restarts.
Clearing the Value that was Saved
Depending on which function is used, the frequency reference value that was saved can be cleared by:• Releasing the acceleration hold input.
• Setting an Up or Down command while no Run command is active.

89

5.5  E: Motor Parameters5.5  E: Motor Parameters
E parameters cover V/f pattern and motor data settings.

 E1: V/f Characteristics
 E1-01: Input Voltage Setting
Set the input voltage parameter to the nominal voltage of the AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels ofsome protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.).
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective
features of the drive to function properly. Failure to comply could result in improper drive operation.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

E1-01 <1>

Input Voltage Setting

155 to 255 V

200 V<1> The setting range and default value shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double this for 400 V class units.

E1-01 Related Values
The input voltage setting determines the over-/undervoltage detection level and the operation levels of the braking
transistor.
(Approximate Values)
BTR Operation Level

Voltage

Setting Value of E1-01

200 V ClassAll settings

410 V

394 V

400 V Class

Setting ≥ 400 V
Setting < 400 V

820 V
740 V

788 V
708 V

Note:

ov Detection Level

The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the drive internal braking transistor.

Uv Detection Level
190 V(single-phase = 160 V)
380 V
350 V

V/f Pattern Settings

The drive utilizes a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each relative to thefrequency reference.
V/f Pattern Setup for V/f Control

1. Set the input voltage for the drive. Refer to E1-01: Input Voltage Setting on page 185.
2. Set the V/f pattern. Refer to V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-10 on page 185.

 V/f Pattern Setting Examples
This section provides examples of how to set a V/f pattern using E1-04 to E1-10.
Table 5.10 V/f Pattern Examples
Example
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K

Specification
50 Hz
60 Hz (default setting)
60 Hz (with 50 Hz base)
72 Hz (with 60 Hz base)
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
50 Hz, Heavy Duty 1
60 Hz, Heavy Duty 1
60 Hz, Heavy Duty 2
50 Hz, mid starting torque
50 Hz, high starting torque
60 Hz, mid starting torqueL

60 Hz, high starting torqueM
NO

90 Hz (with 60 Hz base)120 Hz (with 60 Hz base)180 Hz (with 60 Hz base)Characteristic

Application

Constant torqueFor general purpose applications. Torque remains
constant regardless of changes to speed.

Derated torqueFor fans, pumps, and other applications that
require torque derating relative to the load.

High starting torque

Select high starting torque when:• Wiring between the drive an motor exceeds 150m• A large amount of starting torque is required• An AC reactor is installed

Constant output

When operating at greater than 60 Hz the output
voltage will be constant.

The following tables show details on V/f patterns.
The following graphs are for 200 V class drives. Double the values when using a 400 V class drive.

90

5.5  E: Motor Parameters
V/f Pattern Examples
Table 5.11 Constant Torque Characteristics, Examples A to D
50 Hz

Example B
200

16

Example C

16
12

12

Example D

16

60

72 Hz

200

16

12

0 1.5 3Frequency (Hz)

0 1.3 2.550Frequency (Hz)

60 Hz

200
Voltage (V)Voltage (V)200
Voltage (V)60 Hz(default)

Voltage (V)Example A

12

0 1.5 350 60
Frequency (Hz)

0 1.5 360 72
Frequency (Hz)

Table 5.12 Derated Torque Characteristics, Examples E to H
50 Hz

Example F

50 Hz

Voltage (V)35

Example G

50
9

8
0 1.3
25
50
Frequency (Hz)60 Hz

Example H

200

200
Voltage (V)Voltage (V)

200

35

50
9

8
0 1.5

0 1.3
25
50
Frequency (Hz)

60 Hz

200
Voltage (V)Example E3060
Frequency (Hz)

0 1.5
30
Frequency (Hz)60

Table 5.13 High Starting Torque, Examples I to L
50 Hz

Example J

12
0 1.3 2.550Frequency (Hz)

Voltage (V)19

Example K

60 Hz

Example L

24
13

19
12

24
15
0 1.5 360
Frequency (Hz)

0 1.5 360
Frequency (Hz)

0 1.3 2.550Frequency (Hz)

60 Hz

200

200

200
Voltage (V)Voltage (V)

200

50 Hz

Voltage (V)Example I

Table 5.14 Rated Output Operation, Examples M to O

12
0 1.5 360 90
Frequency (Hz)120 Hz200

16
12
0 1.5 360 120Frequency (Hz)Example O

180 Hz200

Parameter Details

Voltage (V)16

Example N

Voltage (V)

90 Hz

200

Voltage (V)Example M

16
12
0 1.5 360 180Frequency (Hz)591

5.5  E: Motor Parameters V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-10
Set up the V/f pattern as shown in Figure 5.13.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

E1-04
E1-05

Maximum Output Frequency

40.0 to 400.0 Hz

60 Hz

Maximum Voltage

0.0 to 255.0 V <1>

200 V

E1-06

Base Frequency

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

60 Hz

E1-07

Middle Output Frequency

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

3.0 HzE1-08

Middle Output Frequency Voltage

0.0 to 255.0 V <1>

16.0 V

E1-09

Minimum Output Frequency

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

1.5 HzE1-10

Minimum Output Frequency Voltage

0.0 to 255.0 V <1>

12.0 V<1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives; double the values for 400 V class drives.
Output Voltage (V)
E1-05

E1-08
E1-10
E1-09

E1-07 E1-06
Frequency (Hz)E1-04

Figure 5.13 V/f Pattern
Note:

1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-04
2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line set E1-09 = E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded.
3.	E1-03 is unaffected when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03, but the settings for E1-04 through E1-10 are returnedto their default values.

 E2: Motor 1 Parameters
These parameters contain the most important motor data needed for optimal motor control.

 E2-01: Motor Rated Current
Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the motor nameplate.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

E2-01

Motor Rated Current

10% to 200% of the drive
rated current.
(unit: 0.01 A)

Depending on
o2-04

Note:

Change E2-01 after changing the value set to E2-03. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will trigger an oPE02 error.

 E2-02: Motor Rated Slip
Sets the motor rated slip in Hz.
No.

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

E2-02

Motor Rated Slip

0.00 to 20.00 Hz

Depending on
o2-04

Calculate the motor rated slip using the information written on the motor nameplate and the formula below:
E2-02 = f - (n x p)/120(f: rated frequency (Hz), n: rated motor speed (r/min), p: number of motor poles)

925.5  E: Motor Parameters

 E2-03: Motor No-Load Current
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency. Contact the motor manufacturer for
information about the no-load current.
No.
E2-03

Parameter Name

Setting Range

Default

Motor No-Load Current

0 to [E2-01](unit: 0.01 A)

Depending ono2-04

 E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
Sets the line-to-line resistance of the motor stator winding. Remember this value must be entered as line-line andnot line-neutral.
E2-05
Note:

Parameter Name
Motor Line-to-Line ResistanceSetting Range

Default

0.000 to 65.000 Ω

Depending on
o2-04

The setting range becomes 0.00 to 130.00 when using 0.2kW and smaller.

Parameter Details

No.

5

93

5.6  H: Terminal Functions

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
H parameters are used to assign functions to the external terminals.

 H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs
 H1-01 to H1-05: Functions for Terminals S1 to S5
These parameters assign functions to the multi-function digital inputs. The settings 0 to 67 determine function foreach terminal and are explained below.
Note:

If not using an input terminal or if using the through-mode, set that terminal to “F”.

No.

Parameter Name

H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05

Digital Input S1 Function Selection
Digital Input S2 Function Selection
Digital Input S3 Function Selection
Digital Input S4 Function Selection
Digital Input S5 Function Selection

SettingRange
1 to 9F
1 to 9F
0 to 9F
0 to 9F
0 to 9F

Default
40: Forward Run Command (2-wire sequence)
41: Reverse Run Command (2-wire sequence)
24: External Fault
14: Fault Reset
3 (0) <1> : Multi-Step Speed Reference 1<1> Number appearing in parenthesis is the default value after performing a 3-Wire initialization.
Table 5.15 Digital Multi-Function Input Settings
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
F

Function
3-Wire Sequence
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Serial Communication Reference Selection
Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
Multi-Step Speed Reference 3
Jog Reference Selection
Accel/Decel Time 1
Baseblock Command (N.O.)
Baseblock Command (N.C.)
Accel/Decel Ramp HoldNot used/Through Mode

Page
94
95
95

Setting
10
11
14
15
17
20 to 2F
40
41
61
62
67

95
95
95
95
96
96

Function
Up Command
Down Command
Fault Reset
Fast-Stop (N.O.)
Fast-stop (N.C.)
External Fault
Forward Run/Stop (2-wire sequence)
Reverse Run/Stop (2-wire sequence)
External Speed Search Command 1
External Speed Search Command 2
Communications Test Mode

Page
96
97
97
97
98
98
99
99

Setting 0: 3-Wire Sequence
When one of the digital inputs is programmed for 3-Wire control, that input becomes a forward/reverse directional
input, S1 becomes the Run command input, and S2 becomes the Stop command input.
The drive will start the motor when the Run input S1 is closed for longer than 50 ms. The drive will stop theoperation when the Stop input S2 is released. When the input programmed for 3-Wire sequence is open, the drive
will be set for forward direction. If the input is closed, the drive is set for reverse direction.
Note:

When 3-Wire sequence is selected the Run and Stop command must be input at S1 and S2.
Stop Switch(N.C.)Run Switch(N.O.)

DRIVE
S1
S2
S5
SC

Run Command (Runs when Closed)
Stop Command (Stops when Open)FWD/REV (Multi-Function Input)(H1-05 = 0)
Sequence Input Common

Figure 5.14 3-Wire Sequence Wiring Diagram94

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
2 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF

Run command

2 ms min.

Can beON or OFF

Stop command
Forward/reverse
command

OFF (forward)

ON (reverse)

Motor speed

Stop

Forward

ReverseStop

ForwardFigure 5.15 3-Wire Sequence
Note:

1. The Run and Stop command must be open/closed for a short moment only to start and stop the drive.
2.	If the Run command is active at power up and b1-17 = 0 (Run command at power up not accepted), the Run LED will flash
to indicate that protective functions are operating. If required by the application, set b1-17 to “1” to have the Run commandissued automatically as soon as the drive is powered up.
WARNING! Sudden Movement Hazard. The drive may start unexpectedly in reverse direction after power up if it is wired for 3-Wire sequence but set
up for 2-Wire sequence (default). When using 3-Wire sequence first set the drive properly (H1- = 0) and then connect the control wires. Make sureb1-17 is set to “0” (drive does not accept Run command active at power up). When initializing the drive use 3-Wire initialization. Failure to comply
could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment.

Setting 1: LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
This setting allows the input terminal to determine if the drive will run in LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
StatusClosedOpen
Note:

Description
LOCAL: Frequency reference and Run command are input from the digital operator.
REMOTE: Frequency reference and Run command are input from the selected external reference. (b1-01/b1-02)
1.	If one of the multi-function input terminals is set to for LOCAL/REMOTE, then the LO/RE key on the operator will be disabled.
2. When the drive is set to LOCAL, the LO/RE LED will light.
3.	The default setting of the drive is not to allow switching between LOCAL and REMOTE during run. to Refer to b1-07: LOCAL/REMOTE Run Selection on page 78 if this feature is required by the application.

StatusOpen
ClosedParameter Details

Setting 2: Serial Communication Reference Selection
This function can be used to switch the Run command and frequency reference source from the current selection(LOCAL or b1-01/02) to Serial Communication.
Description
LOCAL or the source defined by parameters b1-01/02
Run command and frequency reference are set by Serial Communications via MEMOBUS/Modbus

Note:	The default setting of the drive is not to allow switching reference sources during run. Refer to b1-07: LOCAL/REMOTE Run
Selection on page 78 if this feature is required by the application.

5

Setting 3 to 5: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 to 3
Used to switch Multi-Step Speed frequency references d1-01 to d1-08 by digital inputs. Refer to d1-01 to d1-08, d117: Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Reference on page 86 for details.
Setting 6: Jog Frequency Reference Selection
Used to select the Jog frequency set in parameter d1-17 as active frequency reference. Refer to d1-01 to d1-08, d117: Frequency Reference 1 to 8 and Jog Reference on page 86 for details.
Setting 7: Accel/Decel Time Selection 1
Used to switch between accel/decel times 1 and 2. Refer to C1-01 to C1-04: Accel/Decel Times 1 and 2 on page 81
for details.
Setting 8/9: External Baseblock (N.O.) and External Baseblock (N.C.)
Setting 8 or 9 assign the Baseblock command to digital input terminals. When the drive receives a Baseblockcommand, the output transistor stop switching and the motor coasts to stop. During this time, the alarm “bb” will
flash on the LED operator to indicate baseblock. For more information on alarms, Refer to Alarm Detection on page136. When baseblock ends and a Run command is active, the drive performs Speed Search to get the motor runningagain.

95

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
InputsOperation

Setting 8 (N.O.)
Open
ClosedNormal operation
Baseblock (Interrupt output)
Run command

Baseblock input

Frequency
referenceOFF

Setting 9 (N.C.)
Closed
Open

ON

ON

BaseblockreleaseBegin Speed Search from theprevious frequency reference

Output frequency
Output off, motor coasts

Figure 5.16 Baseblock Operation During Run

Setting A: Accel/Decel Ramp Hold
When the digital input programmed for the Accel/Decel Ramp Hold function closes, the drive will lock (“hold”) the
output frequency. All acceleration or deceleration will cease, and the drive will hold the current speed. Acceleration
or deceleration will resume once the input is opened again.
If the Accel/Decel Ramp Hold function is enabled (d4-01 = 1), the drive will save the output frequency to memory
whenever the Ramp Hold input is closed. When the drive is restarted after stop or after power supply interruption,
the output frequency that was saved will become the frequency reference (provided that the Accel/Decel Ramp
Hold input is still closed). Refer to d4-01: Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection on page 89 for details.
Setting F: Not Used/Through Mode
Any digital input that is not used should be set to F. When set to “F”, an input does not trigger any function in thedrive. Setting F, however, still allows the input status to be read out by a PLC via an optional MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications interface. This way external sensors can be connected to unused drive digital inputs, thus reducing
the need for separate PLC I/O units.
Setting 10/11: Up/Down Command
Using the Up/Down function allows the frequency reference to be set by two push buttons. One digital input
must be programmed as the Up input (H1-= 10) to increase the frequency reference, the other one must be
programmed as the Down input (H1-= 11) to decrease the frequency reference.
The Up/Down function has priority over the frequency references digital operator and analog inputs (b1-01 = 0, 1). If
the Up/Down function is used, then references provided by these sources will be disregarded.
The inputs operate as shown in the table below.
StatusUp (10)Open
ClosedOpen
ClosedNote:

Down (11)Open
Open
ClosedClosedDescription
Hold current frequency reference
Increase frequency reference
Decrease frequency reference
Hold current frequency reference

1. An oPE03 alarm will occur when only one of the functions Up/Down is programmed for a digital input.
2.	An oPE03 alarm will occur if the Up/Down function is assigned to the terminals while another input is programmed for the
Accel/ Decel Ramp Hold function. For more information on alarms, Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page 127.
3.	The Up/Down function can only be used for external reference 1. Consider this when using Up/Down and the externalreference switching function (H1- = 2).

Using the Up/Down Function with Frequency Reference Hold (d4-01)• When the frequency reference hold function is disabled (d4-01 = 0), the Up/Down frequency reference will bereset to 0 when the Run command is cleared or the power is cycled.

96

5.6  H: Terminal Functions• When d4-01 = 1, the drive will save the frequency reference set by the Up/Down function. When the Run
command or the power is cycled, the drive will restart with the reference value that was saved. The value that was
saved can be reset by closing either the Up or Down input without having a Run command active. Refer to d4-01:
Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection on page 89.
Using the Up/Down Function with Frequency Reference Limits
The upper frequency reference limit is determined by parameter d2-01.
The value for the lower frequency reference limit can be set by an analog input or parameter d2-02. When a Run
command is applied, the lower limits work as follows:• If the lower limit is set by parameter d2-02 only, the drive will accelerate to this limit as soon as a Run command isentered.
• If the lower limit is determined by an analog input only, the drive will accelerate to the limit as long as the Run
command and an Up or Down command are active. It will not start running if only the Run command is on.
• If the lower limit is set by both an analog input and d2-02, and the analog limit is higher than the d2-02 value,
the drive will accelerate to the d2-02 value when a Run command is input. Once the d2-02 value is reached, it willcontinue acceleration to the analog limit only if an Up or Down command is set.
Figure 5.17 shows an Up/Down function example with a lower frequency reference limit set by d2-02 and thefrequency reference hold function both enabled (d4-01 = 1) and disabled (d4-01 = 0).
Output frequency
upper limit
Accelerates tolower limitSamefrequency

d4-01 = 1

Lower limitON

FWD run/stop
ON
ON

Down command
Power supply

Holdfrequency
reset

ON

ON

Figure 5.17 Up/Down Command Operation

Setting 14: Fault Reset
Whenever the drive detects a fault condition, the fault output contact will close and the drive output will shut off.
The motor then coasts to stop (specific stopping methods can be selected for some faults such as L1-04 for motor
overheat). After removing the Run command, clear the fault by pressing either the RESET key on the digital operator
or by closing a digital input configured as a Fault Reset (H1- = 14).
Note:

Fault Reset commands are ignored as long as the Run command is present. To reset a fault, first remove the Run command.

Setting 15/17: Fast-stop (N.O./N.C.)
The Fast-stop function operates much like an emergency stop input to the drive. If a Fast-stop command is input
while the drive is running, the drive will decelerate to a stop by the deceleration time set to C1-09 (Refer to C1-09:
Fast-stop Time on page 81). The drive can only be restarted after is has come to a complete stop, the Fast-stop input
is off, and the Run command has been switched off.
• To trigger the Fast-stop function with a N.O. switch, set H1- = 15
• To trigger the Fast-stop function with a N.C. switch, set H1- = 17
Figure 5.18 shows an operation example of Fast-stop.

97

Parameter Details

Up command

d4-01 = 05

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
Run/StopON

Fast-Stop
H1= 17

ON

ON

ON

Decelerates at C1-09
Output Frequency

TIME

Figure 5.18 Fast-stop Sequence
NOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. When faulted, the drive output shuts off, and the motor coasts. To avoid thisuncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely, set an appropriate Fast-stop time to C1-09.

Setting 20 to 2F: External Fault
By using the External Fault function, the drive can be stopped when problems occur with external devices.
To use the external fault function, set one of the multi-function digital inputs to any value between 20 to 2F. The
operator will display EF where  is the number of the terminal (terminal S) to which the external fault signal isassigned.
For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, “EF3” will be displayed.
Select the value to be set in H1- from a combination of any of the following three conditions:• Signal input level from peripheral devices (N.O./N.C.)• External fault detection method• Operation after external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the conditions and the value set to H1-:Terminal Status <1>
Setting
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F

N.O.

N.C.

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Detection Method <2>
Detected
Alwaysduring Run
Detected
only
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

Stopping Method
Ramp toStop (fault)

Coast to Stop(fault)Fast-stop(fault)Alarm Only
(continue
running)

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O

<1> Determine the terminal status for each fault, i.e., whether the terminal is normally open or normally closed.
<2> Determine whether detection for each fault should be enabled only during run or always detected.

Setting 40/41: Forward Run/Reverse Run Command for 2-Wire Sequence
Sets the drive for 2-Wire sequence.
When the input set to 40 is closed, the drive operates in the forward direction. When the input set for 41 is closed,
the drive will operate in reverse. Closing both inputs at the same time will result in an external fault.
Note:

98

These functions are assigned to the terminals S1 and S2 when the drive is initialized for 2-Wire sequence.

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
Drive
Forward Run
Reverse Run

S1

S2
SC Digital Input Common

Figure 5.19 Example Wiring Diagram for 2-Wire Sequence

Setting 61/62: Speed Search 1/2
These input functions can be used to enable Speed Search. When the Speed Search 1 input (H1- = 61) is enabled
the drive will search the motor speed starting from the maximum output frequency. With Speed Search 2 input (H1 = 62) enabled the Speed Search will be performed starting from the frequency reference.
Note:

Operator error oPE03 will result if both Speed Search 1 and Speed Search 2 are set to the input terminals at the same time.

Setting 67: Communication Test Mode
If a RS-422/485 communications options is attached to the drive, this function can be used to perform a selfdiagnosis of the communication interface. The drive transmits data and then confirms the communications arereceived normally. Refer to Self-Diagnostics on page 223 for details on how to use this function.

 H2: Multi-Function Output
 H2-01: Terminal MA/MB/MC Function Selection
The drive has a multi-function output terminal. Set parameter H2-01 between 0 and 13D to assign functions to thisterminal. Default values are listed in the following table.
No.
H2-01
Note:

Parameter Name
Terminal MA, MB and MC Function Selection (relay)

Setting Range
0 to 13D

Default
E: Fault

If not using an input terminal or if using it in the through-mode, be sure to set that terminal to “F”.
Table 5.16 Multi-Function Output Terminal Settings
Function
During Run
Zero Speed
Speed Agree
Frequency Detection 1
Frequency Detection 2
Drive Ready
DC Bus Undervoltage
During Baseblock (N.O.)

Page
99
100
100
100
101
101
101
102

B

Torque Detection 1 (N.O.)

102

Setting
E
F
10
17
1A
1E
3C
3D

Function

Fault
Not used/Through Mode
Alarm
Torque Detection 1 (N.C.)
During Reverse Operation
Restart Enabled
LOCAL/REMOTE Status
During Speed Search
H2 Parameter Functions Reversed Output
100 to 13D
Switching of 0 to 92

Page
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
103

Parameter Details

Setting
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8

5

103

Setting 0: During Run
Output closes when the drive is outputting a voltage.
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
Drive is stopped.
A Run command is input or the drive is during deceleration or during DC injection.

99

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
Run command

OFF

Baseblockcommand

OFF

ON
ON

Outputfrequency

During Run

OFF

ON

Figure 5.20 During Run Time Chart

Setting 1: Zero Speed
Terminal closes whenever the output frequency falls below the minimum output frequency set to E1-09.
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
Output frequency is above the minimum output frequency set to E1-09
Output frequency is less than or equal to the minimum output frequency set to E1-09
Output frequencyormotor speed

Zero Speed

E1-09 (Max. Output Frequency)

OFF

ON

Figure 5.21 Zero-Speed Time Chart

Setting 2: Speed Agree (fref/fout Agree )Closes whenever the actual output frequency is within the current frequency reference regardless of the direction,plus or minus 2 Hz.
StatusOpen
ClosedNote:

Description
Output frequency does not match the frequency reference while the drive is running.
Output frequency is within the range of frequency reference ± 2 Hz.
Detection works in both directions, forward and reverse.
Frequency
reference
Outputfrequency

2 Hz

2 Hz
Speed agree

OFF

ON

Figure 5.22 Speed Agree Time Chart

Refer to L4-01: Speed Agreement Detection Level on page 111 for details on setting the detection width.
Setting 4: Frequency Detection 1
Output is closed as long as the output frequency is below the detection level set in L4-01 plus 2 Hz. It closes when
the output frequency falls below L4-01.

100

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
StatusOpen
ClosedNote:

Description
Output frequency exceeded L4-01 + 2 Hz.
Output frequency is below L4-01 or has not exceeded L4-01 + 2 Hz.
The detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 will be used as the detection level for both directions.
Outputfrequency

2 Hz
L4-01

L4-01
2 Hz
Frequency
detection <1>

ON

OFF

Figure 5.23 Frequency Detection 1 Time Chart<1> This is the time chart when L4-07, Speed Agree Detection Selection, is set to 1 (Detection always enabled). The default setting for L4-07
is 0 (No detection during baseblock). When L4-07 is set to 0, the terminal opens during baseblock.

Refer to L4-01: Speed Agreement Detection Level on page 111 for details on setting the detection width.
Setting 5: Frequency Detection 2
Output closes whenever the output frequency is equal to or above the detection level set in L4-01. The output
opens when the output frequency falls below L4-01 minus 2 Hz.
StatusOpen
ClosedNote:

Description
Output frequency is below L4-01 minus 2 Hz or has not exceeded L4-01.
Output frequency exceeded L4-01.
The detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 will be used as the detection level for both directions.
Outputfrequency

2 Hz

Parameter Details

L4-01

L4-01
2 Hz
Frequency
Detection 2

OFF

ON

5

Figure 5.24 Frequency Detection 2 Time Chart

Refer to L4-01: Speed Agreement Detection Level on page 111 for details on setting the detection width.
Setting 6: Drive Ready
Output closes whenever the drive is ready to operate the motor.
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
During power up, initialization, fault or in Programming Mode (while b1-08 = 0 or 2).
Drive is ready for operation.

Refer to b1-08: Run Command Selection while in Programming Mode on page 78 for details on the setting of b108.
Setting 7: DC Bus Undervoltage
Output closes whenever the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply drops below the trip level. The
undervoltage trip level depends on the setting of parameter E1-01. Refer to E1-01 for details. A fault in the DC bus
charge circuit will also cause the DC Bus Undervoltage output to close.

101

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
DC bus voltage is above the undervoltage level.
DC bus voltage has fallen below the undervoltage level.

Setting 8: During Baseblock (N.O.)
Output closes to indicate that the drive is in a baseblock state. While Baseblock is executed, output transistors are
not switched and no voltage will be output.
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
Drive is not in a baseblock state.
Baseblock is being executed.

Settings B and 17: Torque Detection (N.O./N.C.)
These digital output functions can be used to signal an overtorque situation to an external device.
Set up the torque detection and select the output function from the table below. Refer to L6: Torque Detection on
page 113 for details.
Setting

StatusB

Closed17

Open

Description
Torque Detection (N.O.):
Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for longer than the time specified inparameter L6-03.
Torque Detection (N.C.):
Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for longer than the time specified inparameter L6-03.

Setting E: Fault
The Fault configured digital output will close whenever the drive experiences a fault (this excludes faults CPF00 and
CPF01).
Setting F: Not Used
Use this setting when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal as a throughput.
When set to “F”, the output is not set by any drive function but it can be switched by a PLC via MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications interface (through mode).
Setting 10: Minor Fault
Output closes when a minor fault condition is present.
Setting 1A: During Reverse
The During Reverse digital output will close whenever the drive is turning the motor in the reverse direction.
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
Motor is driven in the forward direction or stopped.
Motor is driven in reverse.
Output frequency

FWD Run command

REV Run command

During Reverse

OFF

ON
time

Figure 5.25 Reverse Direction Output Example Time Chart

Setting 1E: Restart Enabled
The Restart Enabled output will be closed once the fault restart function becomes active and will remain closed until
a successful restart is accomplished or the number of Auto Restart attempts as specified by L5-01 is reached. Referto L5: Fault Restart on page 112 for details on automatic fault restart.
Setting 3C: LOCAL/REMOTE Status
Output terminal closes while the drive is set for LOCAL and opens when in REMOTE.
102

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
StatusOpen
ClosedDescription
REMOTE: The selected external reference (b1-01/02 or MEMOBUS/Modbus) is used as frequency reference and Run command
sourceLOCAL: The digital operator is used as frequency reference and Run command source

Setting 3D: During Speed Search
Output terminal closes while Speed Search is being performed.
Setting 100 to 13D: Reverse Switching for Functions 0 to 3D
These settings reverse the switching status of the specified function. Set as 1, where the last two digits specify
the setting number of the function to be reversed.
Examples:• To reverse the output for “8: During Baseblock”, set “108”.
• To reverse the output for “3C: Run command” set “13C”.

 H3: Analog Input Terminal A1 Settings
These parameters adjust the signal level and characteristics of the analog frequency reference input A1.

 H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection
Selects the input signal level for analog input A1.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H3-01

Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection

0 to 30

Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc with Limit
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be limited to 0.
Example: Terminal A1 is set to supply the frequency reference, and the bias (H3-04) is set to -100%. The frequency
reference can be set from 0 to 100% with an analog input of 5 to 10 V. The frequency reference will be zero when theanalog input is between 0 and 5 V.
100%

0Parameter Details

Analog input
value

10 V
Analog input
voltage

5-100%

Negative input is limited to 0

Figure 5.26 Analog Input with Limit (Bias Setting -100%)

Setting 1: 0 to 10 Vdc without Limit
The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Negative input values will be accepted.
Example: Terminal A1 is set to supply the frequency reference, and the bias (H3-04) is set to -100%. The frequency
reference can be set from 0 to 100% with an analog input of 5 to 10 V. With an input of 0 to 5 V, the frequency
reference can be set from -100% to 0%. The drive reverses the motor rotation with negative input.

103

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
100%
Analog input
value

0V

10 V
Analog input
voltage-100%

Figure 5.27 Analog Input without Limit (Bias Setting -100%)

Setting 2: 4 to 20 mA Current Input
The input level is 4 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0 (like setting 0).
Setting 3: 0 to 20 mA Current Input
The input level is 0 to 20 mA. Negative input values by negative bias or gain settings will be limited to 0 (like setting 0).

 H3-03/H3-04: Terminal A1 Gain/Bias Setting
Parameter H3-03 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A1 (Gain).
Parameter H3-04 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A1.
Both can be used to adjust the analog input A1 characteristics.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H3-03

Terminal A1 Gain Setting-999.9 to 999.9%

100.0%

H3-04

Terminal A1 Bias Setting-999.9 to 999.9%

0.0%

Default Settings
Using the factory default settings for the analog input’s function, gain, and bias, the 0 to 10 Vdc signal at the analog
input will yield a 0 to 100% frequency reference span.
Gain = 100 %Frequency
reference

Bias = 0 %

0V

10 V

Figure 5.28 Analog Input A1 Default Characteristics

Setting Examples• Gain H3-03 = 200%, A1 as frequency reference input:
An input 10 Vdc will be equivalent to a 200% frequency reference and 5 Vdc will be equivalent to a 100% frequency
reference. Since the drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), the frequency reference
will be equal to E1-04 above 5 Vdc.

104

5.6  H: Terminal Functions
Gain = 200 %Frequecnyreference
100 %
E1-04

Bias = 0 %
0V

5V

10 V

Figure 5.29 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Increased Gain

• Bias H3-04 = -25%, A1 as frequency reference input
An input of 0 Vdc will be equivalent to a -25% frequency reference.
When parameter H3-01 = 0 the minimum frequency reference is 0% between 0 and 2.5 Vdc input. An analog inputof 2.5 to 10 Vdc will now be the same as 0 to 100% of the frequency reference span.
When parameter H3-01 = 1, the motor will rotate in reverse between 0 and 2.5 Vdc input.
Gain = 100 %Frequency
referenceH3-01 = 0

0

2.0 V

10 V

Bias = -25%
H3-01 = 1

Figure 5.30 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Negative Bias

• Gain = 0%, Bias = 100%, A1 as frequency reference inputThis setting leads to an inverse-acting frequency reference. The minimum analog input level (0 Vdc) will produce a
100% frequency reference and the maximum analog input level (10 Vdc) will produce a 0% frequency reference.
Parameter Details

Bias = 100 %Frequency
reference

Gain = 0 %

0V

10 V

5

Figure 5.31 Frequency Reference Setting by Analog Input with Inverse Gain and Bias Settings

 H3-13: Analog Input Filter Time ConstantParameter H3-13 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to analog input A1 and also to thereference value from potentiometer option (AI-V3/J).
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H3-13

Analog Input Filter Time Constant

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.03 sAn analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic drive control when a “noisy” analog reference is used. The
drive operation becomes more stable the longer the time programmed, but it becomes less responsive to rapidlychanging analog signals.

1055.6  H: Terminal Functions

 H4: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM
These parameters assign a function to analog output terminal AM for monitoring a specific aspect of drive
performance.

 H4-01: Multi-Function Analog Terminal AM Monitor Selection
Sets the desired drive monitor parameter U- to output as an analog value via terminal AM. Refer to U:
Monitors on page 193 for a list of all monitors. The “Analog Output Level” columns indicates if a monitor can beapplied for analog output.
Example: Enter “103” for U1-03.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H4-01

Multi-Function Analog Terminal AM Monitor Selection

000 to 999

102

A setting of 031 or 000 applies no drive monitor to the analog output. With this setting the terminal AM output levelcan be set by a PLC via a MEMOBUS/Modbus communications interface (through mode).

 H4-02/H4-03: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain/BiasParameter H4-02 sets the output voltage that is equal to 100% of the monitor value. Parameter H4-03 sets thevoltage added to the monitor output.
Both values are set as a percentage of 10 V. The minimum output voltage for terminal AM is 0 V, the maximum is 10
Vdc. Figure 5.32 illustrates the function of the gain and bias settings.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H4-02

Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Gain

-999.9 to 999.9%

100.0%

H4-03

Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal AM Bias

-999.9 to 999.9%

0.0%

10 V

Gain 150%
Bias 0%Terminal AM
outputvoltageGain 100%
Bias 0%5V

10 V
Bias 30%
Gain 100%

Terminal AM
outputvoltageGain 50%
Bias 0%0V

Bias 0%Gain 100%

3V
0V

0%

Monitor value

100%

0%

Monitor value

100%

Figure 5.32 Analog Output Gain/Bias Setting

When viewing the settings for H4-02, terminal AM will output a voltage that is equal to 100% of the monitor value(taking the present gain and bias into consideration). When viewing the settings for H4-03, terminal AM will output
a voltage that is equal to 0% of the monitor value.

 H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication
Through the drives optional RS-422/485 interface, serial communication can be performed with programmable
logic controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol.
The H5- parameters are used to set up the drive for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications. Refer to MEMOBUS/
Modbus Serial Communication on page 204 for detailed descriptions of the H5- parameters.

1065.7  L: Protection Functions

5.7  L: Protection Functions
 L1: Motor Protection Functions
 L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection
The drive has an electronic overload protection function that estimates the motor overload level based on output
current, output frequency, thermal motor characteristics, and time. An oL1 fault will be triggered when motor
overload is detected.
L1-01 sets the overload protection function characteristics according to the motor being used.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L1-01

Motor Overload Protection Selection

0 to 2

1

Setting 0: Disabled - Motor Overload Protection is not Provided
This setting should be used if no motor overheat protection is desired or if multiple motors are connected to one
drive. In this case it is recommended that you install a thermal relay for each motor as show in Figure 5.33
Power
supplySF-520
MC1

L10

MC2

L20

M1

M2

MC1, MC2: Magnetic contactors
L10, L20: Thermal relays

Figure 5.33 Example of Protection Circuit Design for Multiple Motors

Setting 1: General Purpose Motor (standard self-cooled)Because the motor is self-cooled, the overload tolerance drops when the motor speed is lowered. The drive
appropriately adjusts the electrothermal trigger point according to the motor overload characteristics, protecting
the motor from overheat throughout the entire speed range.
Overload Tolerance

Torque (%)

150

60 sec.

Overload Characteristics

Rated Speed=100% Speed

100
90
60
50 Continuous

0 5 33Cooling Ability

Parameter Details

NOTICE: Protect each motor with individual thermal overloads when multiple motors are connected to one drive. Failure to comply could result inmotor damage. Disable the electronic overload protection of the drive (L1-01 = “0: Disabled”) and protect each motor with individual motor thermal
overloads.

5
Motor designed to operate from line
power.
Motor cooling is most effective
when running at rated nameplatebase frequency (check the motor
specifications).

Continuous operation at less than line
power frequency with 100% load cantrigger motor overload protection(oL1). A fault is output and the motor
will coast to stop.

100120 167 200(60 Hz)Speed (%)

Setting 2: Drive Dedicated Motor (constant torque, 1:10)
Use this setting when operating a drive duty motor with a torque ratio of 1:10. This motor type is allowed to run with
100% load from 10% up to 100% speed. Running slower speeds with full load can trigger an overload fault.

1075.7  L: Protection Functions
Overload Tolerance
150

Overload Characteristics

Rated Speed=100% Speed

60 sec.
Torque (%)

Cooling Ability

100

55
50

Motor is designed to effectively cool
itself at speeds as low as 6 Hz.

Continuous operation with 100% loadfrom 6 Hz to 50/60 Hz.

Continuous

0 1 10100120 167 200(60 Hz)Speed (%)

 L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time/L1-08 Electrothermal Level Setting
Sets the time it takes the drive to detect motor overheat due to overload. This setting rarely requires adjustment, butshould correlate with the motor overload tolerance protection time for performing a hot start.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L1-02

Motor Overload Protection Time

0.1 to 5.0 min

1.0 min

L1-08

Electrothermal Level Setting

10 to 150 %100 %• Defaulted to operate with an allowance of 150% overload operation for one minute.
• Figure 5.34 shows an example of the electrothermal protection operation time using a general-purpose motor
operating at 60 Hz with L1-02 set to one minute.
Operation time (minutes)

10
73
Cold start1

0.4

Hot start

0.1
0

100

150

200

Motor current (%)
E2-01 = 100% m o t o r c u r r e n t

Figure 5.34 Motor Protection Operation Time

 L1-13: Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection
Determines whether to hold the current value of the electrothermal motor protection (L1-01) when the power
supply is interrupted.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L1-13

Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection

0 or 11

Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled L2: Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru
 L2-01: Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
When a momentary power loss occurs the drive can be set to automatically return to the operation it was
performing when the power went out based on certain conditions.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L2-01

Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

0 to 20

Setting 0: Disabled (default)
If power is not restored within 15 ms, a Uv1 fault will result and the drive will stop the motor.
1085.7  L: Protection Functions
Setting 1: Enabled, with Time Limit
When a momentary power loss occurs, the drive will attempt to restart and perform Speed Search if power isrestored within a certain period of time. If power is not restored within this time, then a Uv1 fault is triggered andthe drive output will be shut off. The allowable time for the momentary power loss condition is dependent on thedrive capacity.
Setting 2: Recover as Long as CPU has Power
Drive will try to restart as long as the CPU still has power. This allows for a longer ride-through time than setting L201 to 1. A Uv1 fault is not triggered.
Note:

1.	When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2, and a magnetic contactor between motor and drive is used, be sure that the magnetic contactor is
kept close as long as the drive attempts to restart.
2.	When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2, “Uv” will flash on the operator while the drive is attempting to recover from a momentary power
loss. A fault signal is not output at this time.

 L3: Stall Prevention
When the load is too high or acceleration and deceleration times are too short, the motor may be unable to keep
up with the frequency reference, resulting in excessive slip. This “stalling” makes it impossible to decelerate or
accelerate. The drive can prevent the motor from stalling and still reach the desired speed without the user needing
to change the acceleration or deceleration time settings. The Stall Prevention function can be set separately foracceleration, operating at constant speeds, and deceleration.

 L3-01: Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration
Stall Prevention during acceleration is used when the motor loses speed during acceleration due to a relatively large
load. It prevents overcurrent and motor overload (oL1) from occurring.
This parameter sets the Stall Prevention method for acceleration.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L3-01

Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration

0 to 11

Setting 1: Enabled
Enables Stall Prevention during acceleration.
When the output current exceeds 85% of the level set in parameter L3-02, the acceleration rate is reduced. The
acceleration is stopped when the current exceeds L3-02. Acceleration continues when the current falls below L3-02.
The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced in the field weakening area.
Output current

L3-02

Stall Prevention Level
During Acceleration

Parameter Details

Setting 0: Disabled
No Stall Prevention is provided. If the acceleration time setting is too short, the drive may not be able to accelerate
within the set time and the motor may stall.

5

L3-02
-15%

Time

Output frequency

Controls the output frequency
to prevent the motor from stallingTime

Figure 5.35 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Induction Motors

1095.7  L: Protection Functions

 L3-02: Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration

Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention during acceleration is activated.
No.
L3-02

Name
Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration

Setting Range
0 to 150% <1>

Default<1><1> The upper limit and default value is determined by the duty rating and the carrier frequency derating selection (C6-01 and L8-38
respectively).

If stalling occurs with L3-02 set to its default value when using a motor that is relatively small compared to the drive,
try lowering L3-02.

 L3-04: Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration
Stall Prevention during deceleration can control the deceleration based on the DC bus voltage and prevent an
overvoltage fault caused by high inertia or rapid deceleration.
Selects the Stall Prevention method during deceleration.
No.
L3-04

Name
Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration

Setting Range
0, 1, 4

Default
1

Setting 0: Disabled
When this setting is used, the drive decelerates according to the set deceleration time. With high inertia loads orrapid deceleration, an overvoltage (ov) fault may occur. In this case use braking options or switch to another L3-04
selection.
Note:

Use this setting whenever a Dynamic Braking Resistor or another braking option is used.

Setting 1: General Purpose Stall Prevention
With this setting the drive tries to decelerate in the set deceleration time. When the DC bus voltage exceeds the Stall
Prevention level, the drive pauses deceleration. Deceleration continues as soon as the DC bus voltage drops belowthat level. Stall Prevention may be triggered repeatedly to avoid an overvoltage fault. The DC bus voltage level for
Stall Prevention depends on the input voltage setting E1-01.
Drive Input Voltage
200 V Class
400 V Class
Note:

E1-01 ≥ 400 V
E1-01 < 400 V

Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
Vdc = 380 V
Vdc = 760 V
Vdc = 660 V

1.	This setting should not be used in combination with a Dynamic Braking Resistor or other braking options. If Stall Prevention
during deceleration is enabled, it will be triggered before the braking resistor option can operate.
2.	This method may lengthen the total deceleration time compared to the set value. If this is not appropriate for the applicationconsider using a braking option.

Figure 5.36 illustrates the function of Stall Prevention during deceleration.
Output Frequency

Deceleration characteristics
when Stall Prevention was
triggered during decelerationTime
specified deceleration time

Figure 5.36 Stall Prevention During Deceleration

Setting 4: Overexcitation Deceleration
Enables overexcitation deceleration. Overexcitation Deceleration (increasing the motor flux) shortens thedeceleration time compared to deceleration with no Stall Prevention (L3-04 = 0). Repetitive or long overexcitation
deceleration can result in motor overheat. In such situations, either shorten the deceleration time setting or use abraking resistor option.
Use parameter n3-13 to fine-tune this function.
Note:

Because the allowable flux level for overexcitation varies based on the flux saturation characteristics of the motor, set theproper overexcitation level by adjusting the excitation gain in parameter n3-13. Motor characteristics and inertia of the machine
influence the deceleration time during overexcitation deceleration.

 L3-05: Stall Prevention Selection During Run

Stall Prevention During Run can prevent a motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when a transient
overload occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
1105.7  L: Protection Functions
This parameter selects the Stall Prevention During Run method.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L3-05

Stall Prevention Selection During Run

0 to 2

1

Note:

When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall Prevention During Run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05/06.

Setting 0: Disabled
Drive runs at the set frequency reference. A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC or
oL fault.
Setting 1: Decelerate Using C1-02
If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level set in parameter L3-06, the drive decelerates at Decel Time 1 (C102). Once the current level drops below the value of L3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms it accelerates back to the frequency
reference at the active acceleration time.
Setting 2: Decelerate Using C1-04
Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at decel time 2 (C1-04).

 L3-06: Stall Prevention Level During Run
Sets the current level for Stall Prevention During Run.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L3-06

Stall Prevention Level During Run

30 to 150 <1><1><1>	The upper limit and default value for this setting are determined by C6-01, Drive Duty Selection, and L8-38, Carrier Frequency Reduction
Selection.

 L4: Speed Agree
These parameters set up the speed agree and speed detection functions which can be assigned to the multifunction output terminal MA-MB-MC.

 L4-01: Speed Agreement Detection Level

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L4-01

Speed Agreement Detection Level

0.0 to 400.0 Hz

0.0 HzParameter Details

Parameter L4-01 sets the detection level for the digital output functions “Speed Agree”, “Frequency Detection 1”, and“Frequency Detection 2”.

Refer to H2-01: Terminal MA/MB/MC Function Selection on page 99, Settings 2, 4, and 5.

 L4-07: Speed Agreement Detection Selection
Determines when frequency detection is active using parameter L4-01.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L4-07

Speed Agreement Detection Selection

0 or 1

0

5

Setting 0: No Detection During Baseblock
Setting 1: Detection Always Enabled Notes on Controlling the Brake for the Hoist Application
The frequency detection function is used for controlling the brake.
When an external Baseblock command is present while a Run command is active, the frequency reference will be
kept as long as the Run command is active. To avoid improper brake operation make sure that frequency detection
is set so that the brake does not open during Baseblock (L4-07 = “0”, default).
Brake Open/Close
Function
Frequency
Detection
Conditions
Frequency
Detection 2

Brake Activation Level

ParameterSignalParameter

L4-07 = 0

Frequency Detection Level

L4-01 = 2.0 to 3.0 Hz <1>

H2-01 = 5

Frequency Detection Width

2.0 Hz (fixed)<1> If the load slips during stop, make it greater than E1-09 or 2.0 Hz until the load no longer slips.
111

5.7  L: Protection Functions
L4-01

2.0 Hz (fixed)

OutputFrequency

TimeON

Frequency
Dectection 2

OFF

Figure 5.37 Frequency Detection 2

Design the braking sequence as follows:• A normally open signal (N.O.) should be used to control the brake so that it is released when terminal MA-MC
closes.
• An external circuit should be added to ensure the brake is fully applied in case of a fault or emergency condition.
• An additional external circuit should also be added to ensure the brake releases properly when an Up/Down
Command is entered.
When changing the speed using an analog signal, make sure that the source of the frequency reference is assigned
to the control circuit terminals (b1-01 = 1).
A sequence to open and close the holding brake appears in the diagram below.
S1-SC

OFF

UP

b6-02

Output frequency
0
Output
MA-MC

ON

L4-01 b6-01

Frequency Detection 2(H2-01=5)

d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)

d1-03

b4-01
DC Injection braking

Time

OFF

ON

Holding brake
ClosedOpen

ClosedFigure 5.38 Holding Brake Time Chart L5: Fault Restart
The drive can be set up to perform a self-diagnostic check and resume the operation after a fault has occurred.
When the self-check is successful and the cause of the fault has disappeared the drive will restart.
The drive can attempt to restart itself following the faults listed below.
Table 5.17 Restart Faults
SettingoC(Overcurrent)

Function

SettingFunctionov(DC Bus Overvoltage)oH1(Drive Overheat)

PF(Input Phase Loss)

oL1
oL2
oL3

(Motor Overload)(Drive Overload)(Overtorque 1)

rH(Braking Resistor Fault)

Uv1(DC Bus Undervoltage) <1><1> When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)

Use parameter L5-01 to set up automatic fault restart.
To output a signal during fault restart, set H2-01 to 1E.

 L5-01: Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Sets the number of times that the drive may attempt to restart itself.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L5-01

Number of Auto Restarts

0 to 100

The restart counter is incremented at each restart attempt, regardless of whether the attempt was successful.
When the counter reaches the number set in L5-01 the operation stops and the fault has to be reset manually after
correcting the cause.
The number of fault restarts is reset back to zero when:• The drive operates normally for ten minutes following a fault restart.
• A fault is cleared manually after protective functions are triggered.
• The power supply is cycled.

1125.7  L: Protection Functions

 L6: Torque Detection
The drive provides a torque detection function that triggers an alarm or fault signal when the load is too heavy (oL).
It is set up using the L6- parameters. To indicate an overload condition to an external device, the digital output
should be programmed as shown below.
H2-01 Setting

Description

B

Torque detection 1, N.O. (output close when overload is detected)

17

Torque detection 1, N.C. (output opens when overload is detected)

Figure 5.39 shows the function of overtorque detection.
Motor current / torque
10 % hysteresis

10 % hysteresis

L6-02

L6-03

L6-03

Torque detection (NO)ON

ON

Figure 5.39 Overtorque Detection Operation
Note:
Note:

The torque detection function uses a hysteresis of 10% of the drive rated output current/motor rated torque.
When overtorque occurs in the application, the drive may stop due to overcurrent (oC) or overload (oL1). To prevent this, anoverload situation should be indicated to the controller before oC or oL1 occur in the drive. Use the torque detection for thispurpose.

 L6-01: Torque Detection Selection
The torque detection function is triggered when the current/torque exceeds the levels set in parameter L6-02
for longer than the time set in L6-03. The parameters L6-01 select the detection condition and the operation at
detection.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L6-01

Torque Detection Selection

0 to 40

Setting 0: Disabled
Parameter Details

Setting 1: oL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm
Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection
during acceleration and deceleration. The operation continues after detection and an oL3 alarm is triggered.
Setting 2: oL3 at Run - Alarm
Overtorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation continues after detection and an
oL3 alarm is triggered.

5

Setting 3: oL3 at Speed Agree - Fault
Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the frequency reference, i.e., no detection
during acceleration and deceleration. The operation is stopped and an oL3 fault is triggered.
Setting 4: oL3 at Run - Fault
Overtorque detection works whenever a Run command is active. The operation is stopped and an oL3 fault is
triggered.

 L6-02: Torque Detection Level
These parameters the detection levels for the torque detection function.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L6-02

Torque Detection Level

0 to 300%

150%

 L6-03: Torque Detection Time
These parameters set the time that the levels set in L6-02 have to be exceeded before an alarm/fault is triggered.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L6-03

Torque Detection Time

0.0 to 10.0 s

0.1 s

113

5.7  L: Protection Functions

 L8: Hardware Protection
 L8-05: Input Phase Loss Protection Selection
Enables or disables the input phase loss detection.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-05

Input Phase Loss Detection Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Disabled
Setting 1: Enabled
Enables the input phase loss detection. As detection is performed by measuring the DC bus ripple, a phase loss fault(PF) can also be triggered by power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit capacitor deterioration. Detection isdisabled when:• The drive is decelerating.
• No Run command is active.
• Output current is less than or equal to 30% of the drive rated current.

 L8-10: Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection
Selects the heatsink cooling fan operation.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-10

Fan Operation Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Run with Timer
The fan is switched on when a Run command is active. It is switched off 60 s after the Run command has beenreleased. Using this setting extends the fan lifetime.
Setting 1: Run always
The fan runs whenever power is supplied to the drive.

 L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting
If the temperature where the drive is mounted is above the specified values, the drive rated current must be reducedfor optimal performance life. By setting the ambient temperature to parameter L8-12 and adjusting the installation
method setting in L8-35, the drive rating automatically adapts to safe values.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-12

Ambient Temperature Setting-10 to +50 °C

30 °C

 L8-18: Software Current Limit Selection
The Software Current Limit (CLA) is a drive protection function that prevents output transistor failures caused byhigh current. Parameter L8-18 enables or disables this function.
Note:

This setting should not be changed unless absolutely necessary. For proper drive protection and operation leave the Software
CLA function enabled.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-18

Software Current Limit Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Disabled
The drive may trip on an oC fault if the load is too heavy or the acceleration is too short.
Setting 1: Enabled
When the soft CLA current level is reached, the drive reduces the output voltage in order to reduce the current. If thecurrent level drops below the Software CLA level, then normal operation will continue.

114

5.7  L: Protection Functions

 L8-35: Installation Method Selection
Selects the type of installation and changes the drive overload (oL2) limits accordingly.
Note:

1. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized.
2.	The value is preset to the appropriate value when the drive is shipped. Change the value only when using Side-by-Side
installation or when mounting a standard drive with the heatsink outside the cabinet.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-35

Installation Method Selection

0 to 10

Setting 0: IP20/IP00 Drive
Must be selected if an IP20/IP00 drive is installed with minimal 30 mm space to the next drive or a cabinet wall.
Setting 1: Side-by-Side Mounting
Must be selected if drives are Side-by-Side mounted with a minimum space of 2 mm.

 L8-38: Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection
The drive can reduce the carrier frequency when the output current exceeds a certain level. This temporarily
increases the overload capability (oL2 detection) and the drive can run through transient load peaks without
tripping.
L8-38 selects the operation of the carrier frequency reduction function.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

L8-38

Carrier Frequency Reduction Selection

0 to 2

1

Setting 0: Disabled
No carrier frequency reduction at high current.

Setting 2: Enabled for Entire Frequency Range
The carrier frequency is reduced at the following speeds:• Below 6 Hz when the current exceeds 100% of the drive rated current.
• Above 7 Hz when the current exceeds 112% of the drive rated current.
The drive uses the delay time of 0.5 s and a hysteresis of 12% when switching the carrier frequency back to the set
value.

Parameter Details

Setting 1: Enabled for Output Frequencies below 6 Hz
The carrier frequency is reduced at speeds below 6 Hz when the current exceeds 100% of the drive rated current.
The drive returns to its normal carrier frequency when the current falls below 88% or the output frequency exceeds
7 Hz.

5

115

5.8  n: Special Adjustments

5.8  n: Special Adjustments
The n parameters handle a variety of specialized adjustments and functions, including Hunting Prevention.

 n1: Hunting Prevention
Hunting Prevention keeps the drive from hunting as a result of low inertia and operating with light load.

 n1-02: Hunting Prevention Gain Setting
Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Defaultn1-02

Hunting Prevention Gain Setting

0.00 to 2.50

1.00

Normally, n1-02 does not need to be changed, but adjustment may help under the following conditions:• If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
• If the motor stalls decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.

 n3: Overexcitation Deceleration
Overexcitation deceleration increases the flux during deceleration and allows shorter deceleration time settings
than with normal deceleration without the use of a braking resistor. Enabled by setting L3-04 = 4.
Notes on Overexcitation Deceleration•	As regenerative energy is mainly dissipated as heat in the motor, the motor temperature will rise if overexcitation
deceleration is applied frequently. In such cases, make sure the motor temperature does not exceed the maximum
allowable value or consider using a braking resistor option instead.
• The drive decelerates at the active deceleration time. Make sure to set this time so that no overvoltage (ov) fault
occurs.
• When a Run command is entered during overexcitation deceleration, overexcitation operation is cancelled and thedrive will reaccelerate to the specified speed.
• Do not use overexcitation deceleration in combination with a braking resistor option.
Use parameter n3-13 for adjusting overexcitation deceleration.

 n3-13: Overexcitation Deceleration Gain
Applies a gain to the V/f pattern output value during overexcitation deceleration, thereby determining the level ofoverexcitation. The drive returns to the normal V/f value after the motor has stopped or when it is accelerating to thefrequency reference.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Defaultn3-13Overexcitation Deceleration Gain

1.00 to 1.40

1.10

The optimum setting for n3-13 depends on the motor flux saturation characteristics.
• Increase the gain by 1.25 to 1.30 to improve the breaking power of overexcitation.
• Reduce the value when the motor slip gets too high, which can trigger overcurrent (oC), motor overload (oL1), or
drive overload (oL2) faults.

1165.9  o: Operator Related Settings

5.9  o: Operator Related Settings
These parameters concern the various functions and features of the digital operator.

 o1: Display Settings and Selections
These parameters determine how data is shown on the operator display.

 o1-02: User Monitor Selection after Power Up
Selects which monitor parameter will be displayed upon power up. Defaulted to show the frequency reference
when the drive is first turned on.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o1-02

User Monitor Selection after Power Up

1 to 4

1

Setting 1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
Setting 2: Forward/Reverse
Setting 3: Output Frequency (U1-02)
Setting 4: Output Current (U1-03)

 o1-03: Digital Operator Display Selection
Sets the units used to display the frequency reference and output frequency.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o1-03

Digital Operator Display Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: 0.01 Hz Units
Setting 1: 0.01% Units (100% = Max. Output Frequency)
Note:

Parameter o1-03 allows the user to change units used in the following parameters and monitors:
U1-01, Frequency Reference
U1-02, Output Frequency
d1-01 to d1-08, Frequency References 1 to 8

These parameters determine the functions assigned to the operator keys.

 o2-02: STOP Key Function Selection
Selects if the STOP key on the digital operator can be used to stop the operation when the drive is controlled from aremote source (i.e., not from digital operator).
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o2-02

STOP Key Function Selection

0 or 11

Setting 0: Disabled
The STOP key has no function when the drive is controlled by a source other than the digital operator. The drive canonly be stopped from the Run command source that has been selected.
Setting 1: Enabled
The STOP key can be used to terminate the operation, even if the Run command source is not assigned to the digital
operator. If operation has been interrupted by pressing the STOP key, the Run command must be cycled to restart the drive.

 o2-04: Drive Model Selection
Parameter o2-04 matches the control board to the drive hardware. Proper setting of o2-04 is important for optimal
performance and proper protection for the drive hardware. This parameter is configured at the factory and does notnormally require adjustment in the field. It is available primarily to accommodate control board replacement in theevent of damage.
No.
o2-04
Note:

Name
Drive Model Selection

Setting Range

Default-

Depending on
drive size

1.	Refer to Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD on page 200 for a list of o2-04 settings and parameters that change
depending on the drive model selection.
2.	Drive performance will suffer if the correct drive capacity is not set to o2-04, and protective functions will fail to operateproperly.
117

Parameter Details

 o2: Operator Key Selections

55.9  o: Operator Related Settings
3. This parameter is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized using A1-03.

 o2-05: Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection
Determines if the ENTER key must be used to input a frequency reference from the digital operator.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o2-05

Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: ENTER Key Required
Every change in the frequency reference setting on the digital operator has to be finalized by pressing the ENTER
key before it becomes effective.
Setting 1: ENTER Key Not Required
The output frequency changes immediately when the reference is changed by the UP and DOWN key on the digital
operator. The ENTER key does not need to be pressed. The frequency reference is saved five seconds after the Up or
DOWN key has been released.
If an undervoltage (Uv) error occurs within 5 seconds of pressing the ENTER key, the frequency reference will not besaved to memory. The digital operator display flashes when settings can be made to the frequency reference.

Figure 5.40 Ready to Set Frequency Reference o2-06: Operation Selection when LED Operator is Disconnected
Determines if the drive will stop when an external LED operator (JVOP-182-H) is removed in LOCAL mode or with b102 set to 0.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o2-06

Digital Operator Disconnection Operation

0 or 10

Setting 0: Continue Operation
The operation is continued.
Setting 1: Trigger a Fault
The operation is stopped and an “oPr” fault is triggered. The motor coasts to stop.

 o3: Copy Function
Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy, and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive using an LED operator(option).

 o3-01: Copy Function Selection
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the LED operator (option). The copy function willchange certain parameter default settings depending on the regional specification of the drive.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Defaulto3-01

Copy Function Selection

0 to 30

0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV --> OP READ
All parameters are copied from the drive to the digital operator.
Note:

Set o3-02 to 1 to unlock copy protection.

2: OP --> INV WRITE
All parameters are copied from the digital operator to the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY
Parameter settings in the drive are compared to those in the digital operator.
Note:

Setting 3 is only available when using the LED operator option (JVOP-182-H).

 o3-02: Copy Allowed Selection
Prevents accidentally overwriting the data stored in the operator.
118

5.9  o: Operator Related Settings
No.

Name

Setting Range

Defaulto3-02

Copy Allowed Selection

0 to 1

0

0: READ Prohibited
The data in the operator are write protected. The READ operation cannot be performed.

Parameter Details

1: READ Permitted
The data in the operator are not write protected. The READ operation can be performed.

51195.9  o: Operator Related Settings

 o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings
 o4-01: Accumulated Operation Time Setting
Parameter o4-01 sets the cumulative operation time and allows the user to set the starting value of the accumulated
operation time displayed in monitor U4-01.
Note:

The value in o4-01 is set in 10 h units. For example, a setting of 30 will set the cumulative operation time counter to 300 h. 300 hwill also be displayed in monitor U4-01.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-01

Accumulated Operation Time Setting

0 to 9999

0 o4-02: Accumulated Operation Time Selection
Selects the conditions for what is to be considered “accumulated operation time.” Accumulated operation time isdisplayed in U4-01.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-02

Accumulated Operation Time Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: Power On Time
The drive logs the time it is connected to a power supply, no matter if the motor is running or not.
Setting 1: Run Time
The drive logs the time that the output is active, i.e., whenever a Run command is active (even if the motor is not
rotating) or a voltage is output.

 o4-03: Cooling Fan Maintenance Setting
Sets the value of the cooling fan operation time base value used for the maintenance value displayed in U4-04. Be
sure to reset this parameter back to 0 if the cooling fan is replaced.
Note:

1. The value in o4-03 is set in 10 h units.
2. The actual maintenance time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Defaulto4-03

Cooling Fan Operation Time

0 to 9999

0 o4-05: Capacitor Maintenance Setting
Sets value of the maintenance monitor for the DC bus capacitors displayed in U4-05 as a percentage of the total
expected performance life. This value should be reset to 0 when the DC bus capacitors have been replaced.
Note:

The actual maintenance time will depend on the environment the drive is used in.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-05

Capacitor Maintenance Setting

0 to 150%0% o4-07: DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting
Sets the value of the softcharge bypass relay maintenance time displayed in U4-06 as a percentage of the total
expected performance life. This value should be reset to 0 when the relay has been replaced.
Note:

The maintenance actual time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-07

DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting

0 to 150%0% o4-09: IGBT Maintenance Setting
Sets the value of the IGBT maintenance time displayed in U4-07 as a percentage of the total expected performancelife. This value should be reset to 0 when the IGBTs have been replaced.
Note:

120

The actual maintenance time depends on the environment the drive is used in.

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-09

IGBT Maintenance Setting

0 to 150%0%5.9  o: Operator Related Settings

 o4-11: U2 Initialization
When the drive is initialized, the fault history monitors (U2-) are not reset. Parameter o4-11 can be used toinitialize them.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

o4-11

U2 Initialization

0 or 10

Setting 0: No Action
The drive keeps a record of the fault history.

Parameter Details

Setting 1: Reset Fault Data
Resets the data for the U2- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the fault data areerased and the display returns to 0.

5

121

5.10  U: Monitor Parameters5.10  U: Monitor Parameters
Monitor parameters let the user view various aspects of drive performance as it is shown on the operator display.
Some monitors can be output from terminal AM by assigning the specific monitor parameter number to H4-01.
Refer to H4-01: Multi-Function Analog Terminal AM Monitor Selection on page 106 for details on assigning
functions to the analog output.

 U1: Operation Status Monitors
Status monitors display drive status like output frequency, current etc. Refer to U1: Operation Status Monitors on
page 197 for a complete list of U1- monitors and descriptions.

 U2: Fault History
The fault history monitors can be used to view the current and the last occurred fault. Refer to U2: Fault History on
page 198 for a list of U2- monitors and descriptions.
U2- monitors are not reset when the drive is initialized. Refer to o4-11: U2 Initialization on page 121 for
instructions to initialize the fault history.

 U4: Maintenance Monitors
Maintenance monitors show:• Runtime data of the drive.
• Maintenance data and replacement information for various drive components.
• Highest peak current that has occurred and output frequency at the time the peak current occurred.
Refer to U4: Maintenance Monitors on page 194 for a complete list of U4- monitors and descriptions.

1226TroubleshootingThis chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms, errors, related displays, andpossible solutions. This chapter can also serve as a reference guide for tuning the drive
during a trial run.

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8

SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................. 124
MOTOR PERFORMANCE FINE TUNING............................................................... 126
DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS.............................................................. 127
FAULT DETECTION............................................................................................... 129
ALARM DETECTION............................................................................................. 136
OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS................................................................. 139
DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS.............................................................. 141
TROUBLESHOOTING WITHOUT FAULT DISPLAY................................................ 142

123

6.1  Section Safety

6.1  Section Safety
DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may illustrate drives without covers or safety shields to display details. Be sure to
reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions describedin this manual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not touch terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the drive input power is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50
Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage
level to confirm safe level.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Fire Hazard

Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electricalconnections.
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming drive input power before applying
power.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.

1246.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Troubleshooting

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twistedpair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Sumitomo is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user.
Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure that all connections
are correct.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

6125

6.2  Motor Performance Fine Tuning

6.2  Motor Performance Fine Tuning
This section offers helpful information for counteracting oscillation, hunting, or other faults that occur while
performing a trial run.

 Parameters for Tuning the Drive
Table 6.1 Parameters for Tuning the Drive
Problem• Motor hunting andoscillation at speeds
between 10 and 40 Hz• Motor noise• Motor hunting andoscillation at speeds up to
40 Hz• Poor motor torque atspeeds below 10 Hz• Motor hunting andoscillation• Poor motor torque at low
speeds• Motor instability at motorstart• Poor speed precision
Note:

Parameter

Corrective Action• If insufficient motor torque relative to the size of theload causes hunting, reduce the setting.
• When motor hunting and oscillation occur with a light
Hunting Preventionload, increase the setting.
Gain (n1-02)• Lower this setting if hunting occurs when using a
motor with a relatively low inductance, such as a highfrequency motor or a motor with a larger frame size.
• If the motor noise is too loud, increase the carrier
frequency.
• When motor hunting and oscillation occur at speeds
Carrier Frequency
up to 40 Hz, lower the carrier frequency.
Selection (C6-02)• The default setting for the carrier frequency depends
on the drive capacity (o2-04) and the Drive Duty
Selection (C6-01).
• If motor torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz,
Torqueincrease the setting.
Compensation Gain•If motor hunting and oscillation with a relatively light(C4-01)load, decrease the setting.
• If torque is insufficient at speeds below 10 Hz, increase
Mid Output Voltage the setting.
A (E1-08)• If motor instability occurs at motor start, decrease thesetting.
Minimum Output
Voltage (E1-10)
Note: The recommended setting value is for 200 V classdrives. Double this value when using a 400 V class drive.
• After setting the motor-rated current (E2-01), motorSlip Compensation
rated slip (E2-02) and motor no-load current (E2-03),
Gain (C3-01)
adjust the slip compensation gain (C3-01).

Default
Value

Suggested
Setting

1.00

0.00 to 2.00

7 (Swing
PWM)

1 to 71.00

0.50 to 1.50

E1-08:
16.0 V
E1-10:
12.0 V

Initial value ±5 V-

0.5 to 1.5

Use slip compensation to improve speed precision. First make sure that the proper values have been set for the motor rated
current to E2-01, motor rated slip (E2-02), and motor no-load current (E2-03). Next, adjust the slip compensation gain set to C3-01
so that it is between 0.5 to 1.5.

 Motor Hunting and Oscillation Control Parameters
The following parameters indirectly affect motor hunting and oscillation.
Table 6.2 Parameters that Affect Control Performance in Applications
Name (Parameter No.)
Accel/Decel Time (C1-01 throughC1-09)
S-Curve Characteristics  (C2-01
through C2-04)

Application
Adjusting accel and decel times will affect the torque presented to the motor during acceleration
or deceleration.
Prevents shock at the beginning and end of acceleration and deceleration.

Jump Frequency (d3-01 through d3-04) Skips over the resonant frequencies of connected machinery.
Analog Filter Time Constant  (H3-13)

Prevents fluctuation in the analog input signal due to noise.

Stall Prevention (L3-01 throughL3-06)• Prevents motor speed loss and overvoltage. Used when the load is too heavy and also during
sudden acceleration/deceleration.
• Adjustment is not normally required because Stall Prevention is enabled as a default. Disable Stall
Prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = “0”) when using a braking resistor.

126

6.3  Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors

6.3  Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Check the LED operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using theDigital LED Operator on page 56.
Table 6.3 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating thedrive.
Table 6.3 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Type

Drive Responses to Alarms, Faults, and Errors

Minor Faults andAlarmsOperation Errors

 Alarm and Error Displays Faults
When the drive detects a fault, the ALM indicator LEDs remain lit without flashing. If the LEDs flash, the drive has
detected a minor fault or alarm. Refer to Minor Faults and Alarms on page 128 for more information. Conditions
such as overvoltage or external faults can trip both faults and minor faults, therefore it is important to note whether
the LEDs remain lit or if the LEDs flash.
Table 6.4 Fault Displays
LED Operator Display

or
<1>

Name
MEMOBUS/Modbus
CE
Communication Error
CoF
Current Offset Fault
CPF11 – RAM Fault
CPF12 – FLASH Memory Fault
CPF00 orCPF14 – Control Circuit Fault
CPF01
CPF17 – Timing Fault
CPF18 – Control Circuit Fault
CPF02 A/D Conversion Error
Drive specification mismatch
CPF06 during Terminal Board or Control
Board replacement
EEPROM Serial Communications
CPF08
Fault

Pg.

LED Operator Display

129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
129
130

or
<2>

to

Name

RAM Fault
CPF20 or FLASH Memory Fault
CPF21 Watchdog Circuit Exception
Clock Fault
CPF22 A/D Conversion Error
CPF23 PWM Feedback Data Fault
CPF24 Drive Capacity Signal Fault
EF0
Option Unit External Fault
EF1 to External Fault (input terminal S1
EF5
to S5)Err
EEPROM Write Error
LF
Output Phase LossoC
Overcurrent

Pg.
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
131
131
131

127

Troubleshooting

FaultsWhen the drive detects a fault:• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until thefault is reset.
• The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop.
• Depending on the setting, the drive and motor may stop via different methods than listed.
• If a digital output is programmed for fault output (H2-01 = E), it will close if a fault occurs.
When the drive detects a fault, it will remain inoperable until that fault has been reset. Refer to Fault Reset Methods
on page 141.
When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault:• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific alarm or minor fault and the ALM indicator LED flashes.
• The motor does not stop.
• The multi-function contact output closes if set to be tripped by a minor fault (H2-01 = 10), but not by an alarm.
• The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes.
Remove the cause of an alarm or minor fault to automatically reset.
When parameter settings conflict with one another or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option unit),
it results in an operation error.
When the drive detects an operation error:• The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific error.
• The multi-function contact output does not operate.
When the drive detects an operation error, it will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct thesettings that caused the operation error to reset.

66.3  Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
LED Operator Display
oFA01
oH1
oL1
oL2
oL3

Name
Option Disconnected
Heatsink Overheat
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Overtorque Detection 1

Pg.
132
132
132
133
133

LED Operator Display
oPr
ov
PF
<3>
Uv1
Uv3

Name
Operator Connection Fault
Overvoltage
Input Phase Loss
Undervoltage
Soft Charge Circuit Fault

Pg.
133
138
134
134
135

<1> Displayed aswhen occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the drive, the display
will show.
<2> Displayed aswhen occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the drive, the display
will show.
<3> Uv1 fault is not saved to the fault history

 Minor Faults and Alarms
When a minor fault or alarm occurs, the ALM LED flashes and the text display shows an alarm code. A fault has
occurred if the text remains lit and does not flash. Refer to Alarm Detection on page 136. An overvoltage situation,for example, can trigger both faults and minor faults. It is therefore important to note whether the LEDs remain lit orif the LEDs flash.
Table 6.5 Minor Fault and Alarm Displays
LED Operator Display

to

Name

Minor Fault Output(H2-01 = 10)

Pg.

bb

Drive BaseblockNo output

136

CALL

Serial Communication Transmission Error

YES

136

CE

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error

YES

136

CrST

Cannot Reset

YES

136

EF

Run Command Input Error

YES

137

External Fault (input terminal S1 to S5)

YES

137

EF1 to EF5
oH

Heatsink Overheat

YES

137

oL3

Overtorque 1

YES

137

ov

Overvoltage

YES

138

PASS

MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Complete

No output

138

SE

MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault

YES

138

Uv

Undervoltage

YES

138

 Operation Errors
Table 6.6 Operation Error Displays
LED Operator
Display
oPE01
oPE02
oPE03

128

Name

Pg.

Drive Unit Setting Error
Parameter Setting Range Error
Multi-Function Input Setting Error

139
139
139

LED Operator
Display
oPE05
oPE10
oPE11

Name

Pg.

Run Command Selection Error
V/f Data Setting Error
Carrier Frequency Setting Error

139
139
139

6.4  Fault Detection

6.4  Fault Detection
 Fault Displays, Causes and Possible Solutions
Table 6.7 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes and Possible Solutions

CE
Cause
Faulty communications wiring, or a shortcircuit exists.

A communications data error occurred
due to noise.

LED Operator Display
CoF

Fault NameMEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
No data was received for longer than 2 seconds.
Possible Solution• Check for faulty wiring.
• Correct the wiring.
• Check for loose wiring and short circuits. Repair as needed.
• Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring.
• Use Yaskawa-recommended cables, or another type of shielded line. Ground the shield on thecontroller side or on the drive input power side.
• Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge
suppressors if required.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines. Install a noise
filter to the input side of the drive input power
Fault Name
Current Offset Fault
The current sensor is damaged or there was residual current in the motor (e.g., during sudden
acceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to start the motor.
Possible Solution

Cause
Due to residual induction current in the
motor when the drive attempted to start
Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for residual induction voltage tothe motor, the drive tried to adjust thedissipate.
current offset value beyond the allowable
range.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
CPF11 – RAM Fault
CPF12 – Problem with the ROM (FLASH memory)
or
CPF00 or CPF01 CPF14 – CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
CPF17 – A timing error occurred during an internal process
CPF18 – CPU error (CPU operates incorrectly due to noise, etc.)
Cause
Possible Solution
Hardware is damaged.
Replace the drive.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
A/D Conversion Error
CPF02
An A/D conversion error occurred.
Cause
Possible Solution
Control circuit is damaged.
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
• Check for wiring errors along the control circuit terminals.
Control circuit terminals have shorted out• Correct the wiring.
(+V, AC).
Check the resistance of the speed potentiometer and related wiring.
• Check the input current.
Control terminal input current has
exceeded allowable levels.
• Reduce the current input to control circuit terminal (+V) to 20 mA.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
EEPROM Data Error
CPF06
There is an error in the data saved to EEPROM.
Cause
Possible Solution
Control circuit is damaged.
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem continues, replace the drive.
The power supply was switched off when • Cycle power to the drive and check operation again.
parameters were written (e.g., using an• Initialize the drive using A1-03.
option unit).
• If the problem continues, replace the drive.
The power supply was switched off within
Set up the external operation to allow at least 5 seconds pass before the power supply is shut off
5 seconds after changing the frequency
and after changing the frequency reference while o2-05 is set to 1.
reference when o2-05 is set to 1.

129

Troubleshooting

LED Operator Display

6

6.4  Fault Detection
LED Operator Display
CPF08
Cause
Control circuit is damaged.
LED Operator Display

or

CPF20 or CPF21

Cause
Hardware is damaged.
LED Operator Display
CPF22
Cause
Control circuit is damaged.
LED Operator Display
CPF23
Cause
Hardware is damaged.
LED Operator Display
CPF24
Cause
Hardware is damaged.
LED Operator Display
EF0

Fault Name
EEPROM Communication Fault
EEPROM communications are not functioning properly.
Possible Solution
Cycle power to the drive. If the problem persists, replace the drive.
Fault Name
One of the following faults occurred: RAM fault, FLASH memory error, watchdog circuit exception,clock error• RAM fault.
• FLASH memory error (ROM error).
• Watchdog circuit exception (self-diagnostic error).
• Clock error.
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.
Fault Name
A/D Conversion Fault
A/D conversion error.
Possible Solution• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 141.
• If the problem continues, replace the drive.
Fault NamePWM Feedback Fault
PWM feedback error.
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.
Fault Name
Drive Capacity Signal Fault
Entered a capacity that does not exist. (Checked when the drive is powered up.)
Possible Solution
Replace the drive.
Fault NameMEMOBUS/Modbus Communication External Fault
An external fault condition is present.
Possible Solution

Cause
An external fault was received from the
PLC with other than H5-04 = 3 “alarm only” • Remove the cause of the external fault.
(the drive continued to run after external • Remove the external fault input from the PLC.
fault).
Problem with the PLC program.
Check the PLC program and correct problems.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
External Fault (input terminal S1)
EF1
External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
External Fault (input terminal S2)
EF2
External fault at multi-function input terminal S2.
External Fault (input terminal S3)
EF3
External fault at multi-function input terminal S3.
External Fault (input terminal S4)
EF4
External fault at multi-function input terminal S4.
External Fault (input terminal S5)
EF5
External fault at multi-function input terminal S5.
Cause
Possible Solution
An external device has tripped an alarm• Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault.
function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for externalfault detection (H1-oo = 20 to 2F).
Wiring is incorrect.
• Reconnect the signal line.
Incorrect setting of multi-function contact • Check if the unused terminals set for H1-oo = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
inputs.
• Change the terminal settings.
130

6.4  Fault Detection
LED Operator Display
Err
Cause

Fault Name
EEPROM Write Error
Data does not match the EEPROM being written to.
Possible Solution• Press the
button.
• Correct the parameter settings.
• Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page 141.

LED Operator Display
LF
Cause
The output cable is disconnected.
The motor winding is damaged.
The output terminal is loose.
The motor being used is less than 5% of
the drive rated current.
An output transistor is damaged.
A single-phase motor is being used.
LED Operator DisplayoC
Cause
The motor has been damaged due tooverheating or the motor insulation isdamaged.

Fault Name
Output Phase Loss
Phase loss on the output side of the drive.
Possible Solution• Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly.
• Correct the wiring.
• Check the resistance between motor lines.
• Replace the motor if the winding is damaged.
• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size
and Torque Specifications on page 44.
Check the drive and motor capacities.
Replace the drive.
The drive being used cannot operate a single phase motor.
Fault Name
Overcurrent
Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level.
Possible Solution• Check the insulation resistance.
• Replace the motor.

• Check the motor cables.
One of the motor cables has shorted out • Remove the short circuit and power the drive back up.
or there is a grounding problem.
• Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal .
• Replace damaged cables.
• Measure the current flowing into the motor.
• Replace the drive with a larger capacity unit if the current value exceeds the rated current of thedrive.
The load is too heavy.
• Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level.
• Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive.
Calculate the torque needed during acceleration relative to the load inertia and the specified
acceleration time.
The acceleration or deceleration times are If the right amount of torque cannot be set, make the following changes:• Increase the acceleration time (C1-01, -03)
too short.
• Increase the S-curve characteristics (C2-01 through C2-04)• Increase the capacity of the drive.
• Check the motor capacity.
The drive is attempting to operate a
specialized motor or a motor larger than • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating foundthe maximum size allowed.
on the motor nameplate.
Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output
Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is outputting current.
side of the drive has turned on or off.
• Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency.
V/f setting is not operating as expected.
• Set parameters E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately.
• Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency• Check the amount of torque compensation.
Excessive torque compensation.
• Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current.
• Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, maininterference.
circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Check if fault occurs simultaneously to overexcitation function operation.
Overexcitation gain is set too high.
• Consider motor flux saturation and reduce the value of n3-13 (Overexcitation DecelerationGain).
131

Troubleshooting-

66.4  Fault Detection
Run command applied while motor was
coasting.
The motor cable is too long
LED Operator Display
oFA01• Program the Speed Search command input through one of the multi-function contact input
terminals (H1-oo = “61” or “62”).
Use a larger drive.
Fault Name
Option Unit Fault
Replace the option unit.
Possible Solution

Cause
The option unit is not properly connected
Turn the power off and reconnect the option unit.
to the drive.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
Overheat 1 (Heatsink Overheat)oH1
The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level.
Cause
Possible Solution• Check the temperature surrounding the drive.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too high.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area.
• Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat.
• Measure the output current.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Load is too heavy.
• Reduce the load.
Current flowing to control circuit terminal • Check the current level of the terminal.
+V exceeded the tolerance level.
• Set the current to the control circuit terminal to be 20 mA or less.
LED Operator Display
oL1

Fault Name
Motor Overload
The electrothermal sensor tripped overload protection.
Note:
The integrated value of the internal register for oL1 must decrease before oL1 canbe reset.
Possible Solution
Reduce the load.

Cause
Load is too heavy.
Cycle times are too short during
Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).
acceleration and deceleration.
• Drive overloaded at low speeds.
• Reduce the load.
• Overload may occur at low speeds when • Increase the speed.
using a general-purpose motor, even
• If the drive is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a
if operating within the rated current
motor specifically designed to operate with the drive.
limitation.
Although a special type of motor is being
used, the motor protection selection is set Set L1-01 to 2.
for a general-purpose motor (L1-01 = 1).
• Adjust the user set V/f patterns (E1-04 through E1-10). Parameters E1-08 and E1-10 may need toVoltage is too high for the V/fbe reduced.
characteristics.
• If E1-08 and E1-10 are set too high, there may be very little load tolerance at low speed.
• Check the motor-rated current.
The wrong motor-rated current is set toE2-01.
• Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01.
• Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate.
The motor base frequency for the drive
input power is set too low.
• Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency).
Multiple motors are running off the same
Disable the Motor Protection function (L1-01 = “0”) and install a thermal relay to each motor.
drive.
• Check the motor characteristics.
The electrical thermal protection
characteristics and motor overload• Correct the value set to L1-01 (Motor Protection Function).
characteristics do not match.
• Install an external thermal relay.
The electrical thermal relay is operating at • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate.
the wrong level.
• Check the value set for the motor-rated current (E2-01).
• Overexcitation increases the motor losses and thereby the motor temperature. If applied too
long, motor damage can occur. Prevent excessive overexcitation operation or apply proper
Motor overheated by overexcitation
cooling to the motor.
operation.
• Reduce the excitation deceleration gain (n3-13).
• Set L3-04 (Stall Prevention during Deceleration) to a value other than 4.
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss
132

6.4  Fault Detection
LED Operator Display
oL2
Cause
Load is too heavy.
Cycle times are too short during
acceleration and deceleration.

Fault Name
Drive Overload
The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection.
Possible Solution
Reduce the load.
Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-04).

• Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 andE1-10.
• Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively because this reduces load tolerance at low
speeds.
Drive capacity is too small.
Replace the drive with a larger model.
• Reduce the load when operating at low speeds.
Overload occurred when operating at low• Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger.
speeds.
• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
Excessive torque compensation.
Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less current.
Output current fluctuation due to input
Check the power supply for phase loss.
phase loss.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
Overtorque Detection 1
oL3
The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable
time (L6-03).
Cause
Possible Solution
Parameter settings are not appropriate for
Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03.
the type of load.
There is a fault on the machine side (e.g.,
Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault.
the machine is locked up).
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
External Digital Operator Connection Fault
The external operator has been disconnected from the drive.
Note: An oPr fault will occur when both of the following conditions are true:oPr• Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1)
• The run command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected)
Cause
Possible Solution• Check the connection between the operator and the drive
External operator is not properly• Replace the cable if damaged
connected to the drive.
• Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Next reconnect the operator andturn the drive input power back on.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
Overvoltage
Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
ov• For 200 V class: approximately 410 V• For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 is less than 400)
Cause
Possible Solution• Increase the deceleration time (C1-02, C1-04).
Deceleration time is too short and• Install a braking resistor or a dynamic braking resistor unit.
regenerative energy flows from the motor• Enable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 1.
into the drive.
Stall prevention is enabled as the default setting.
The braking torque was too high, causing regenerative energy to charge the DC bus. Reduce theExcessive braking load.
braking torque, use a braking option, or lengthen decel time.
Install a DC reactor.
Surge voltage entering from the drive
Note: Voltage surge can result from thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using
input power.
same drive main input power supply.
Ground fault in the output circuit causing • Check the motor wiring for ground faults.
the DC bus capacitor to overcharge.
• Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
Excessive regeneration when overshootLengthen the S-curve at acceleration end.
occurs after acceleration.
• Check the voltage.
Drive input power voltage is too high.
• Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications.
The dynamic braking transistor is damaged. Replace the drive.
133

Troubleshooting

Voltage is too high for the V/fcharacteristics.

66.4  Fault Detection• Check braking transistor wiring for errors• Properly rewire the braking resistor device.
• Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise.
Drive fails to operate properly due to noise• Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, maininterference.
circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Adjust the parameters that control hunting.
Motor hunting occurs.
• Set the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
Input Phase LossPF
Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases.
Detected when L8-05 = 1 (enabled).
Cause
Possible Solution• Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power.
There is phase loss in the drive input
power.
• Correct the wiring.
• Ensure the terminals are tightened properly.
There is loose wiring in the drive input• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire
power terminals.
Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 39 for details.
• Check the voltage from the drive input power.
• Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power.
There is excessive fluctuation in the drive• Disable Input Phase Loss Detection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if DC bus ripple is too high. If it
input power voltage.
is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too high, thereby the capacitors are stressedmore and lose lifetime.
There is poor balance between voltage
Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection.
phases.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
• Replace the drive if U4-05 is greater than 90%.
• Check for anything wrong with the drive input power.
• If nothing is wrong with the drive input power, try the following solutions if the alarm
The main circuit capacitors are worn.
continues:• Disable Input Phase Loss Protection selection (L8-05 = “0”). PF is detected if DC bus ripple is toohigh. If it is disabled, there is no fault but the ripple is still too high, thereby the capacitors arestressed more and lose lifetime.
• Replace the drive.
LED Operator Display
Fault Name
DC Bus Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was in operation:• Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level.
Uv1• For 200 V class: approximately 190 V (160 V for single phase drives)• For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400) The fault is output only
if L2-01 = 0 or the DC bus voltage is below the Uv detection level for a certain time while L2-01
= 1.
Cause
Possible Solution• The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly.
Input power phase loss.
• Correct the wiring.
• Ensure there are no loose terminals.
One of the drive input power wiring• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wireterminals is loose.
Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 39 for details.
There is a problem with the voltage from • Check the voltage.
the drive input power.
• Correct the voltage to within range listed in drive input power specifications.
The power has been interrupted.
Correct the drive input power.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
Drive internal circuitry has become worn.
• Replace the drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%
The drive input power transformer is notlarge enough and voltage drops after
Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
switching on power.
Air inside the drive is too hot.
Check the drive internal temperature.
Problem with the CHARGE indicator.
Replace the drive.
The braking transistor is wired incorrectly.

1346.4  Fault Detection

Uv3
Cause
The contactor on the inrush prevention
circuit is damaged.

Fault Name
Undervoltage 3 (Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault)
The inrush prevention circuit has failed.
Possible Solution• Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs.
• Replace the drive if the fault continues to occur.
• Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the inrush prevention circuit.
• Replace the drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%.

Troubleshooting

LED Operator Display

6135

6.5  Alarm Detection

6.5  Alarm Detection
Alarms are drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact. The drive will return to original statuswhen the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multifunction output (H2-01), if programmed.
Investigate the cause of the alarm and refer to Table 6.8 for the appropriate action.

 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 6.8 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display
bb
Cause

Minor Fault Name
BaseblockDrive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal.
Possible Solutions

External baseblock signal entered via
Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing.
multi-function input terminal (S1 to S5).
LED Operator Display
Minor Fault Name
Serial Communication Transmission Error
CALL
Communication has not yet been established.
Cause

Possible Solutions

Communications wiring is faulty, there
is a short circuit, or something is notconnected properly.
Programming error on the master side.
Communications circuitry is damaged.
Terminal resistance setting is incorrect.
LED Operator Display
CE
Cause

• Check for wiring errors.
• Correct the wiring.
• Remove and ground shorts and reconnect loose wires.
Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors.
• Perform a self-diagnostics check.
• Replace the drive if the fault continues to occurs.
The terminal slave drive must have the internal terminal resistance switch set
correctly. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position.
Minor Fault NameMEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error
Control data was not received correctly for two seconds.
Possible Solutions• Check options available to minimize the effects of noise.
• Counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and ground wiring.
• Reduce noise on the controller side.
• Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the
A data error occurred due to noise.
disturbance.
• Use cables recommended by Yaskawa or another type of shielded line. The shieldshould be grounded on the controller side or on the drive input power side.
• Separate all wiring for communications devices from drive input power lines.
Install a noise filter to the input side of the drive input power.
•
Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in the controller.
Communication protocol is
incompatible.
• Ensure settings are compatible.
The communication cycle is longer than • Check the PLC.
2 seconds.
• Change the software settings in the PLC.
Incompatible PLC software settings or • Check the PLC.
there is a hardware problem.
• Remove the cause of the error on the controller side.
Communications cable is disconnected • Check the connector for a signal through the cable.
or damaged.
• Replace the communications cable.
LED Operator Display
Minor Fault Name
CrST
Cannot Reset
Cause

136

Possible Solutions

Minor Fault(H2-01 = 10)
No output

Minor Fault(H2-01 = 10)
YES
YES
YES
YES

Minor Fault(H2-01 = 10)

YES

YES
YES
YES
YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)

6.5  Alarm Detection

LED Operator Display
EF
Cause

• Ensure that a run command cannot be entered from the external terminals or
option unit during fault reset.
• Turn off the run command.
Minor Fault Name
Forward/Reverse Run Command Input Error
Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s.
Possible Solutions

Sequence error
LED Operator Display
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF5
Cause

Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the problem.
Note: When minor fault EF detected, motor ramps to stop.
Minor Fault Name
External fault (input terminal S1)External fault at multi-function input terminal S1.
External fault (input terminal S2)External fault at multi-function input terminal S2.
External fault (input terminal S3)External fault at multi-function input terminal S3.
External fault (input terminal S4)External fault at multi-function input terminal S4.
External fault (input terminal S5)External fault at multi-function input terminal S5.
Possible Solutions

An external device has tripped an alarm
Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function input value.
function.
• Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned forexternal fault detection (H1-oo = 20 to 2F).
Wiring is incorrect.
• Reconnect the signal line.
• Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1-oo = 20 to 2F (External Fault).
Multi-function contact inputs are set
incorrectly.
• Change the terminal settings.
LED Operator Display
Minor Fault NameHeatsink OverheatoH
The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level.
Cause

Possible Solutions

Surrounding temperature is too highInternal cooling fan has stopped.

Airflow around the drive is restricted.

LED Operator Display
oL3
Cause
Inappropriate parameter settings.

• Check the surrounding temperature.
• Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel.
• Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area.
• Remove anything near drive that may cause extra heat.
• Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement on page 157.
• After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter to (o4-03 =“0”).
• Provide proper installation space around the drive as indicated in the manual.
Refer to Correct Installation Orientation on page 27.
• Allow for the specified space and ensure that there is sufficient circulation aroundthe control panel.
• Check for dust or foreign materials clogging cooling fan.
• Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation.
Minor Fault Name
Overtorque 1
Drive output current was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03.
Possible Solutions
Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03.

There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., • Check the status of the machine.
the machine is locked up).
• Remove the cause of the fault.

YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
YES
YES
YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
YES

Troubleshooting

Fault reset was being executed when arun command was entered.

6
YES

YES

YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
YES
YES

137

6.5  Alarm Detection
LED Operator Display
ov

Cause

Minor Fault Name
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point.
For 200 V class: approximately 410 V
For 400 V class: approximately 820 V (740 V when E1-01 < 400)
Possible Solutions• Install a DC reactor or an AC reactor.
Surge voltage present in the drive input• Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and a phase advancing
power.
capacitor operating on the same drive input power system.
• The motor is short-circuited.
• Check the motor power cable, relay terminals and motor terminal box for short• Ground current has over-charged thecircuits.
main circuit capacitors via the drive• Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on.
input power.
• Review possible solutions for handling noise interference.
• Review section on handling noise interference and check control circuit lines, main
circuit lines and ground wiring.
Noise interference causes the drive tooperate incorrectly.
• If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector
to the MC coil.
Set number of fault restarts (L5-01) to a value other than 0.
LED Operator Display
Minor Fault NamePASSMEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Complete
Cause
MEMOBUS/Modbus test has finishednormally.
LED Operator Display
SE
Cause
A digital input programmed to 67H(MEMOBUS/Modbus test) was closed
while the drive was running.
LED Operator Display

Possible Solutions
This verifies that the test was successful.

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
YES

YES

YES

YES

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
No output

Minor Fault NameMEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Error
Possible Solutions
Stop the drive and run the test again.

Minor Fault
Output(H2-01 = 10)
No output

Minor Fault Name

Undervoltage
One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was in operation:• DC bus voltage dropped below the under voltage detection level.
Uv• Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was open.
• Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus
voltage is below the detection level.
Minor Fault
Cause
Possible Solutions
Output(H2-01 = 10)
Phase loss in the drive input power.
Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. Correct the wiring.
YES• Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened.
Loose wiring in the drive input power
YES• Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Referterminals.
to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page 39• Check the voltage.
There is a problem with the drive input
YES• Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the limits listed in
power voltage.
the specifications.
• Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05).
Drive internal circuitry is worn.
YES• Replace the drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%.
The drive input power transformer is not • Check for a tripped alarm when the magnetic contactor, line breaker and leakage
breaker are turned on.
large enough and voltage drops whenYES
the power is switched on.
• Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer.
Air inside the drive is too hot.
• Check the temperature inside the drive.
YES
The CHARGE indicator light is broken or• Replace the drive.
YES
disconnected.

138

6.6  Operator Programming Errors

6.6  Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when an inappropriate parameter is set or an individual parametersetting is inappropriate.
The drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an oPEoccurs, investigate the cause and Refer to oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 139 for theappropriate action.

 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Table 6.9 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
LED Operator Display

Error Name
oPE01

Cause
The drive capacity setting (o2-04) and the actual capacity of the drive
are not the same.
LED Operator Display
oPE02
Cause
Parameters were set outside the possible setting range.

Drive Capacity Setting Fault
Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match.
Possible Solutions
Correct the value set to o2-04.
Error Name
Parameter Range Setting Error
Possible Solutions
Set parameters to the proper values.

Note: Other errors are given precedence over oPE02 when multiple errors occur at the same time.
LED Operator Display

Error Name

Multi-Function Input Selection ErroroPE03

A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs
H1-01 to H1-05.
Possible Solutions• Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions.
• Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur.
Correctly set functions that need to be enabled in combination withother functions.
Correctly set functions that need to be enabled in combination withother functions.

oPE05

Troubleshooting

Cause• The same function is assigned to two multi-function inputs.
• Excludes “Not used” and “External Fault.”
The Up command was set but the Down command was not, or viceversa (settings 10 vs. 11).
Run command for a 2-Wire sequence was set, but forward/reverse
command for a 2-Wire sequence was not.
The following two functions are set at the same time:• Up/Down Command (10 vs. 11)• Hold Accel/Decel Stop (A)• Check if contradictory settings have been assigned to the multiOne of the following settings is set at the multi-function input
function input terminals at the same time.
terminals:•• External Search Command 1 and External Search Command 2 (61 vs. Correct setting errors.
62)• Fast-Stop N.O. and Fast-Stop N.C.
(15 vs. 17)
LED Operator Display
Error Name

6

Run Command/Frequency Reference Source Selection Error

Cause
Possible Solutions
Frequency reference is assigned to an option unit (b1-01 = 2 or 3) thatis not connected to the drive.
Reconnect the option unit to the drive.
The Run command is assigned to serial communication (b1-02 = 2) but
no communication option is connected to the drive.
LED Operator Display
Error Name
V/f Data Setting Error
oPE10
Cause
V/f pattern setting error.

One or more of the parameters listed below are not set according to
the formula:E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-04
Possible Solutions
Correct the settings for E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09.

LED Operator Display

Error NameoPE11

Carrier Frequency Setting Error
Correct the setting for the carrier frequency.
139

6.6  Operator Programming Errors
Cause
The following simultaneous contradictory settings: C6-05 is greaterthan 6 and C6-04 is greater than C6-03 (carrier frequency lower limit
is greater than the upper limit). If C6-05 is less than or equal to 6, thedrive operates at C6-03.
Upper and lower limits between C6-02 and C6-05 contradict eachother.

140

Possible Solutions

Correct the parameter settings.

6.7  Diagnosing and Resetting Faults

6.7  Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
When a fault occurs and the drive stops, follow the instructions below to remove whatever conditions triggered thefault, then restart the drive.

 Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power LossWARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the
ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage toequipment.

1. Turn on the drive input power.
2. Remove the cause of the fault and reset.

Note:

1. To find out what faults were triggered, Check U2-02 (Fault History) to determine the faults that have been triggered.
2. If the fault continues to be displayed after cycling power, remove the cause of the fault and reset.

 If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs
1. Look at the LED operator for information on the fault that occurred.
2. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes and Possible Solutions on page 129.
3. Reset the fault. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page 141.

 Viewing Fault History Data After Fault
Step1.

Display/Result

Turn on the drive input power. The first screen
displays.

2. Press

until the monitor screen is displayed.

3. Pressscreen.

to display the parameter setting

and > until U2-02 (Fault History) is
4. Press
displayed.
to view previous fault (here, EF3).
Troubleshooting

5. Press Fault Reset Methods
After the Fault Occurs

ProcedureFix the cause of the fault, restart thePress
drive, and reset the fault

Fix the cause of the fault and reset
via Fault Reset Digital Input S4.

on the digital operator.

Close then open the fault signal digital input
via terminal S4. S4 is set fault reset as default(H1-04 = 12)

6
Drive
Fault Reset Switch

S4 Fault Reset Digital Input
SC Digital Input Common

2ON

If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply.
Reapply power after LED operator display is out.
1 OFF

141

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display
This section describes troubleshooting problems that do not trip an alarm or fault.

 Cannot Change Parameter Settings
Cause
The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Run
command is present).
The Access Level is set to restrict access toparameter settings.
The operator is not in the Parameter Setup Mode(the LED screen will display “PAr”).

The wrong password was entered.

Undervoltage was detected.

Possible Solutions• Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode.
• Most parameters cannot be edited during run.
• Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2).
• See what mode the LED parameter is current set for.
• Parameters cannot be edited when in the Setup Mode (“STUP”). Switch modes so that“PAr” appears on the screen.
• If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, thendrive settings cannot be changed.
• Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password:• Display parameter A1-04. Press the
button while pressing
at the sametime.
Parameter A1-05 will appear.
• Set a new password to parameter A1-05.
• Check the drive input power voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage (U1-07).
• Check all main circuit wiring.

 Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering External
Run Command Motor Does Not Rotate
Cause

Possible Solutions• Check if the DRV light on the LED operator is lit.
The drive is not in the Drive• Enter the Drive Mode to begin operating the motor. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page
Mode.
59.
Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected. If the operator keypad shall be
the source, the LO/RE button LED must be on, if the source is REMOTE, it must be off.
The
button was pushed. Take the following step to solve the problem:• Push the

button.

A Fast-Stop was executed andReset the Fast-Stop command.
has not yet been reset.
Check parameter b1-02 (Run Command Selection).
Settings are incorrect for the
Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct run command source.
source that provides the run
0: LED operator
command.
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications• Check the wiring for the control terminal.
There is faulty wiring in the• Correct wiring mistakes.
control circuit terminals.
• Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10).
Check parameter b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection 1).
Set b1-01 to the correct source of the frequency reference.
The drive has been set to0: LED operator
accept the frequency reference
1: Control circuit terminal (default setting)from the incorrect source.
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications
3: Potentiometer (option)
The terminal set to accept themain speed reference is set to Check DIP switch S1. Next assign the correct input level to terminal A1 (H3-01).
the incorrect voltage and/or
Refer to DIP Switch S1 Analog Input Signal Selection on page 49.
current.
Selection for the sink/source
Check DIP switch S3. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Switch on page 47.
mode is incorrect.
• Check the frequency reference monitor (U1-01).
Frequency reference is too low.
• Increase the frequency by changing the maximum output frequency (E1-09).

142

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display
Cause
Multi-function analog input
is set up to accept gain for
the frequency reference, but
no voltage (current) has been
provided.

Possible Solutions• Check the multi-function analog input settings.
• Check if H3-02 has been set to the proper values.
• Check if the analog input value has been set properly.

• When the
button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop.
Thebutton was• Switch off the run command and then re-enter a run command.
pressed when the drive wasstarted from a REMOTE source. • The
button is disabled when o2-02 is set to 0.
• Ensure the selected V/f pattern corresponds with the characteristics of the motor being used.
• Increase both the minimum and mid output frequency voltages (E1-08, E1-10).
Increase the frequency reference so that it is higher than the minimum frequency reference (E1-09).
Increase the torque compensation gain (C4-01).
• The drive is set for a 3-Wire sequence when one of the parameters H1-03 through H1-05 is set to 0.
The drive is set for both 2-Wire• If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 2-Wire sequence, then ensure parameters H1-03 through H1-05
and 3-Wire sequence at theare not set to 0.
same time.
• If the drive is supposed to be set up for a 3-Wire sequence, then H1-oo must be set to 0.
Motor is not producing
enough torque.

 Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command
Cause
Phase wiring between the drive and motor isincorrect.

Possible Solutions• Check the motor wiring.
• Switch two motor cables (U, V, and W) to reverse motor direction.
• Connect drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 in the right order to thecorresponding motor terminals U, V, and W.
• Change the setting of parameter b1-14.
Typically, forward is designated as being counterclockwise when looking from the motor
shaft (refer to the figure below).

1

The forward direction for the motor is setup
incorrectly.

2
1. Forward Rotating Motor (looking down the motor shaft)
2. Motor Shaft
Note:

Check the motor specifications for the forward and reverse directions.
Cause

The load is too heavy.

The air around the motor is too hot.

Insufficient voltage insulation between motor
phases.

The motor fan has stopped or is clogged.

Possible Solutions
If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated
torque value for an extended period of time.
Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in addition to thepossible solutions provided below:• Reduce the load.
• Increase the acceleration and deceleration times.
• Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor rated
current (E2-01).
• Increase motor capacity.
• Check the ambient temperature.
• Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range.
When the motor is connected to terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, voltage surges occur
between the motor coils and drive switching.
Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply voltage (600
V for 200 V class, and 1200 V for 400 V class).
• Use a motor with voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge.
• Use a motor designed to work specifically with a drive when using a 400 V class unit.
• Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive.
Check the motor fan.

143

Troubleshooting Motor is Too Hot66.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display

 oPE02 Error Occurs when Lowering the Motor Rated Current Setting
Cause

The motor rated current and the motor no-loadcurrent settings in the drive are incorrect.

Possible Solutions
The user is trying to set the motor rated current in E2-01 to a value lower than the noload current set in E2-03.
• Make sure that value set in E2-01 is higher than E2-03. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will trigger
an oPE02 error.
• If it is necessary to set E2-01 lower than E2-03, first lower the value set to E2-03, thenchange the setting in E2-01 as needed.

 Motor Stalls During Acceleration or With Large Loads
Cause

Load is too heavy.

Possible Solutions
Take the following steps to resolve the problem:• Reduce the load.
• Increase the acceleration time.
• Increase motor capacity.
• Although the drive has a Stall Prevention function and a Torque Compensation Limit
function, accelerating too quickly or trying to drive an excessively large load canexceed the capabilities of the motor.

 Motor Will Not Accelerate or the Acceleration Time is Too Long
Cause

Possible Solutions• Check the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
• Increase E1-04 if it is set too low.
Frequency reference is too low. Check U1-01 for proper frequency reference.
Check if a frequency reference signal switch has been set to one of the multi-function input terminals.
Check for low gain level set to terminal A1 (H3-03).
• Reduce the load so that the output current remains within the motor-rated current.
• In extruder and mixer applications, the load will sometimes increase as the temperature drops.
Load is too heavy.
Check if the mechanical brake is fully releasing as it should.
Acceleration time has been set
Check if the acceleration time parameters have been set too long (C1-01, -03).
too long.
Motor characteristics and• Set the correct V/f pattern so that it matches the characteristics of the motor being used.
drive parameter settings areincompatible with one another • Check the motor data and adjust V/f pattern settings.
in V/f Control.
Incorrect frequency reference • Check the multi-function analog input settings.
setting.
• Ensure the analog input value is set to the right value (U1-13).
• Check the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).
The Stall Prevention level
during acceleration and• If L3-02 is set too low, acceleration will take a fair amount of time.
deceleration set too low.
• Increase L3-02.
• Check the Stall Prevention level during run (L3-06).
The Stall Prevention level
during run has been set too• If L3-06 is set too low, speed will drop as the drive outputs torque.
low.
• Increase the setting value.

 Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency Reference Command
Cause
The analog input frequency gain and bias are set
to incorrect values.

Possible Solutions
Check the frequency reference terminal input gain level assigned to terminal A1(parameter H3-03).

 Poor Speed Control Accuracy
Cause
Slip compensation function disabled or set up
incorrectly.

Possible Solutions
Adjust the slip compensation gain (C3-01).

 Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected when Using a Braking Resistor
Cause
L3-04 is set incorrectly.
The deceleration time is set too long.

144

Possible Solutions• Check the Stall Prevention Level during deceleration (L3-04).
• If a braking resistor option has been installed, disable Stall Prevention during
deceleration (L3-04 = “0”).
Set deceleration to more appropriate time (C1-02 and C1-04).

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display
Cause

Possible Solutions• Assuming parameter settings are normal and that no overvoltage occurs when there
is insufficient torque, it is likely that the demand on the motor has exceeded the motor
capacity.
• Use a larger motor.

Insufficient motor torque.
Load exceeded the internal torque limit
determined by the drive rated current.

Switch to a larger capacity drive.

 Motor Hunting Occurs When Operating With a Light Load
Cause
Carrier frequency is too high.
Large V/f setting value at low speeds triggers
overexcitation.
The maximum output frequency and the basefrequency reference are not set properly in
relationship to each other.
Hunting Prevention is set up incorrectly.

Possible Solutions
Lower the carrier frequency setting C6-02.
• Use parameters E1-04 through E1-10 to set the V/f pattern in relation to the load
characteristics.
Set the proper values for the maximum output frequency and base frequency (E1-04, E106).
Adjust the hunting prevention gain (n1-02).

 Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On
Cause

Possible Solutions

Relay switching in the drive
generates excessive noise.

• Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
• Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power.
• Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive.
• Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise.
• Ground the drive and motor properly.
• Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines.

 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Trips During Run
Cause

Possible Solutions• Increase the GFCI sensitivity or use GFCI with a higher threshold.
Excessive leakage current trips • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-02).
MCB.
• Reduce the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor.
• Install a noise filter or reactor on the output side of the drive.

 Connected Machinery Vibrates When Motor Rotates
Cause
Poor balance between motor phases.

Possible Solutions
Check drive input power voltage to ensure that it provides stable power.

Unexpected Noise from Connected Machinery
Cause
Possible Solutions
The carrier frequency is at the resonant frequency
Adjust the carrier frequency using parameters C6-02 through C6-05.
of the connected machinery.
• Adjust the parameters used for the Jump Frequency function (d3-01 through d3-04) to
The drive output frequency is the same as theskip the problem-causing bandwidth.
resonant frequency of the connected machinery.
• Place the motor on a rubber pad to reduce vibration.
Note:

The drive may have trouble assessing the status of the load due to white noise generated when using Swing PWM (C6-02 = 7).

 Oscillation or Hunting
Cause

Possible Solutions
Insufficient tuning.
Adjust Hunting prevention Gain Setting (n1-02).
• Ensure that noise is not affecting the signal lines.
The frequency reference is assigned to an external • Separate main circuit wiring and control circuit wiring.
source and the signal is noisy.
• Use twisted-pair cables or shielded wiring for the control circuit.
• Increase the analog input time filter constant (H3-13).
The cable between the drive and motor is too• Reduce the length of the cable.
long.

145

Troubleshooting

Excessive Motor Oscillation and Erratic Rotation

66.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display

 Motor Rotates After the Drive Output is Shut Off
Cause
Low DC Injection Braking and the drive cannot
decelerate properly.

Possible Solutions• Adjust the DC Injection braking settings.
• Increase the value of b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current).
• Increase the b2-04 (DC Injection Braking Time at Stop).

 ov or Speed Loss Occurs When Starting into a Rotating Load
Cause
The load is already rotating when the drive istrying to start it.

Possible Solutions• Stop the motor using DC Injection braking. Restart the motor.
• Increase the value of b2-03 (DC Injection Braking Time at start).
• Set a multi-function input terminal for external Speed Search command (H1-oo=“61”or “62” during restart).

 Output Frequency is not as High as Frequency Reference
Cause

Possible Solutions• Adjust the parameters used for the Jump Frequency function (d3-01, d3-02).
Frequency reference is set within the range of the• Enabling the Jump Frequency prevents the drive from outputting the frequencies
Jump Frequency.
specified in the Jump Frequency range.
• Set the maximum output frequency and the upper limit for the frequency reference tomore appropriate values (E1-04, d2-01).
Upper limit for the frequency reference has been
exceeded.
• The following calculation yields the upper value for the output frequency = E1-04 x d201 / 100•
Reduce the load.
Large load triggered Stall Prevention function
during acceleration.
• Adjust the Stall Prevention level during acceleration (L3-02).

 Buzzing Sound from Motor at 2 kHz
Cause

Possible Solutions• If the output current rises too high at low speeds, the carrier frequency automaticallyreduces and causes a whining or buzzing sound.
Exceeded 110% of the rated output current of the• If the sound is coming from the motor, disable carrier frequency derating (L8-38 = “0”).
drive while operating at low speeds.
• Disabling the automatic carrier frequency derating increases the chances of an overload
fault (oL2). Switch to a larger capacity motor if oL2 faults occur too frequently.

 Motor Does Not Operate When the RUN Button on the Digital Operator is Pressed
Cause
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected
properly.
The drive is not in drive mode.
The frequency reference is too low.

Possible Solutions
Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be on for LOCAL mode.
A run command will not be issued. Exit to the drive mode and cycle the run command.
• If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output
Frequency), the drive will not operate.
• Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

 Motor Does Not Operate When an External Run Command is Input
Cause
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected
properly.
The drive is not in Drive Mode.
The frequency reference is too low.

Possible Solutions
Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button to switch. The LO/RE LED should be off for REMOTE
mode.
A run command will not be issued. Exit to the Drive mode and cycle the run command.
• If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output
Frequency), the drive will not operate.
• Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

 Motor Stops During Acceleration or When a Load is Connected
Cause
Possible Solution• The load is too heavy.
• The limit of motor response may be reached
Increase the acceleration time (C1-01) or reduce the motor load. Also, consider increasing
during rapid acceleration. This may be a result of the motor size and/or drive size.
improper stall prevention or automatic torqueboost function adjustment.

146

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display

 Motor Rotates in One Direction Only
Cause
Possible Solutions"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04(Reverse Prohibit Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run
Set b1-04 = “0” to allow reverse run operation.
prohibited), the drive will not accept a reverse runcommand.
• Check parameter b1-04.
The drive prohibits reverse rotation.
• Set the drive to allow the motor to rotate in reverse (b1-04 = “0”).
A Reverse run signal has not been entered,• Make sure that one of the input terminals S3 to S5 used for the 3-Wire sequence has
although 3-Wire sequence is selected.
been set for reverse.

 Peripheral Devices Affected by Drive Operation
Cause

Radio frequency interference may be generated
by drive output PWM waveform.

Possible Solutions• Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will
help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the input power terminals.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the motor terminals.
• Use conduit. Metal can shield electrical noise.
• Ground the drive and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.

 Ground Fault Interrupter Activates When Drive is Running
Possible Solutions• Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current detection level (suchThe output of the drive is a series of highas, a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s orfrequency pulses (PWM), so there is a certain
more), or one that incorporates high-frequency corrective actions.
amount of leakage current. This may cause theground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the • Change the Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency.
drive input power.
Note: Leakage current increases in proportion to cable length.

Troubleshooting

Cause

6

147

6.8  Troubleshooting without Fault Display

This Page Intentionally Blank

148

7
Periodic Inspection & MaintenanceThis chapter describes the periodic inspection and maintenance of the drive to ensure thatit receives the proper care to maintain overall performance.

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................. 150
INSPECTION......................................................................................................... 152
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE................................................................................... 154
DRIVE COOLING FANS......................................................................................... 156

149

7.1  Section Safety

7.1  Section Safety
DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstallcovers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in thismanual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment, and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage levelto confirm safe level.

Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electricalconnections.
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying
power.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.

1507.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Periodic Inspection &MaintenanceObserve proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twistedpair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Sumitomo is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be
modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting anyother devices.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

7151

7.2  Inspection

7.2  Inspection
Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changed characteristics or performance deterioration after yearsof use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenanceand periodic inspection on the drive.
Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans,and relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control.
Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program.
Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as:• High ambient temperatures• Frequent starting and stopping• Fluctuations in the AC supply or load
• Excessive vibrations or shock loading• Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres• Poor storage conditions.
Perform the first equipment inspection 3 months after installation.

 Recommended Daily Inspection
Table 7.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis
to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked”
column after each inspection.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious personal injury.
Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned
off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all
indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Table 7.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist
Inspection Category

Inspection Points

Motor• Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise comingfrom the motor.

Cooling• Inspect for abnormal heat generated from thedrive or motor and visible discoloration.

Cooling Fan• Inspect drive cooling fan operation.

Environment• Verify the drive environment complies with thespecifications listed in the Installation section ofthis manual.

Load• The drive output current should not be higher
than the motor or drive rating for an extended
period of time.

Power Supply Voltage • Check main power supply and control voltages.

152

Corrective Action• Check the load coupling.
• Measure motor vibration.
• Tighten all loose components.
• Check for excessive load.
• Loose connections• Check for dirty heatsink or motor.
• Ambient temperature• Check for clogged or dirty fan.
• Check fan operation drive parameter.
• Eliminate the source of contaminants orcorrect poor environment.
• Check for excessive load.
• Check the motor parameter settings of thedrive.
• Correct the voltage or power supply to within
nameplate specifications.
• Verify all main circuit phases.

Checked7.2  Inspection

 Recommended Periodic Inspection
Table 7.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations. Periodic inspections
should generally be checked every 3-6 months; however, the drive may require more frequent inspection due
to poor environments or rigorous use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in eachapplication, will determine the actual inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help toavoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column
after each inspection.

 Periodic Inspection
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious personal injury.
Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned
off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all
indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspection Checklist

GeneralConductors andWiringTerminals
Relays andContactors

Braking Resistors

GeneralLEDs

Cooling Fan

Heatsink
Air DuctOperation Check
Note:

Inspection Points
Corrective Action
Main Circuit Periodic Inspection• Replace damaged components as required.
• Inspect equipment for discoloration fromoverheating or deterioration.
• The drive has few serviceable parts and may
require complete drive replacement.
• Inspect for damaged or deformed parts.
• Inspect enclosure door seal if present. Replacecomponents if cleaning is not possible.
• Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust
collection on components.
• Remove foreign particles and dust with avacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts.
• Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration,
damage, or heat stress.
• Repair or replace damaged wiring.
• Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear.
• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged
connections.
screws or terminals.
• Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise • Check coil voltage for over or under voltage
during operation.
conditions.
• Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as• Replace damaged removable relays contactors
melted or cracked insulation.
or circuit board.
• Minor discoloration may be acceptable.
• Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or• If discoloration exists check for loose
around resistors.
connections.
Control Circuit Periodic Inspection• Tighten loose screws and replace damaged• Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged or loose
screws or terminals.
connections.
• If terminals are integral to a circuit board then
• Check for tightness.
board or drive replacement may be required.
LED Periodic Inspection• Make sure the LED lights correctly.
• Contact your Yaskawa representative if there is• Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may any trouble with the LED or keypad.
have collected on surrounding components.
• Clean the LED.
Cooling System Periodic Inspection• Replace as required.
• Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise. • Refer to Drive Cooling Fans on page 156• Check for damaged or missing fan blades.
for information on cleaning or replacing thecooling fan.
• Inspect for dust or other foreign material• Remove foreign particles and dust with acollected on the surface.
vacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts.
•
Visually inspect the area.
• Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They
must be free from obstruction and properly• Clear obstructions and clean air duct as
installed.
required.
Motor Periodic Inspection• Stop the motor and contact qualified• Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise.
maintenance personnel as required.

Checked

Periodic Inspection &MaintenanceInspection Area

7

Periodic inspections should be performed every one or two years. The drive, however, may require more frequent inspection due
to poor environments or rigorous use.

153

7.3  Periodic Maintenance7.3  Periodic MaintenanceThe drive has various “maintenance monitors.” This feature provides advance maintenance warning and eliminates
the need to shut down the entire system for unexpected problems. The drive allows the user to check the following
maintenance periods.
• Cooling Fan• Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit)• Inrush Prevention Circuit• IGBT Replacement Parts
Table 7.3 contains the estimated performance life of components that require replacement during the life of thedrive. Only use Yaskawa replacement parts for the appropriate drive model and revision.
Table 7.3 Estimated Performance Life
Component
Cooling Fan
Electrolytic Capacitors (Main Circuit)

Estimated Performance Life2 ~ 3 years
10 years <1><1> The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement.
NOTICE: Estimated performance life based on specific usage conditions. These conditions are provided for the purpose of replacing parts to maintainperformance. Some parts may require more frequent replacement due to poor environments or rigorous use.
Usage conditions for estimated performance life:• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30 °C• Load factor: 80% maximum• Operation time: 12 hours a day Performance Life Monitors
The drive calculates the maintenance period for components that may require replacement during the life of thedrive. A percentage of the maintenance period is displayed on the LED digital operator by viewing the appropriatemonitor parameter.
When the maintenance period reaches 100%, there is increased risk that the drive may malfunction. Yaskawa
recommends checking the maintenance period regularly to ensure maximum performance life.
Refer to Recommended Periodic Inspection on page 153 for more details.
Table 7.4 Performance Life Monitors Used for Component Replacement
Parameter

Component

U4-04

Cooling Fan

U4-05

Main Circuit (DC bus)
Electrolytic Capacitors

U4-06

Inrush (pre-charge) relay

U4-07

IGBT

Contents
Displays the accumulated cooling fan operation time as a percentage of the specified
maintenance period (displayed in percent %).
Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified
maintenance period.
Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performancelife of the inrush circuit.
Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs.

 Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors
An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected performance life.
When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance monitor function (H2-
= 2F), the terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the
expected performance life, or when the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life. Additionallythe digital operator will display an alarm like shown in Table 7.5 to indicate the specific components that may needmaintenance.
Table 7.5 Maintenance Alarms
Digital Operator Alarm Display

154

<1>

LT-1

<1>

LT-2

<1>

LT-3

Function
Corrective Action
The cooling fans have reached 90% of their designated life
Replace the cooling fan.
time.
Contact a Yaskawa representative or the
The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of theirnearest Yaskawa sales office on possible
designated life time.
drive replacement.
Contact a Yaskawa representative or the
The DC bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its
nearest Yaskawa sales office on possible
designated life time.
drive replacement.

7.3  Periodic MaintenanceDigital Operator Alarm Display
<1>

LT-4

<2>

TrPC

Function

Corrective Action
Check the load, carrier frequency, and
The IGBTs have reached 50% of their designated life time.
output frequency.
Contact a Yaskawa representative or the
The IGBTs have reached 90% of their designated life time. nearest Yaskawa sales office on possible
drive replacement.

<1> This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The
alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).
<2> This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of the digital outputs (H2-
= 2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10).

 Related Drive Parameters
Use parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 to reset a Maintenance Monitor to zero after replacing a specificcomponent. Refer to Parameter List on page 179 for details on parameter settings.

Periodic Inspection &Maintenance

NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the Maintenance Monitor function will continue tocount down the performance life from the value that was reached with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will not havethe correct value of the performance life for the new component.

7155

7.4  Drive Cooling Fans

7.4  Drive Cooling FansNOTICE: Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed incorrectly and could seriously
damage the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance.

Contact your Sumitomo representative or supplier to order replacement cooling fans as required.

 Number of Cooling Fans
Drive Model

Cooling Fans
Single-Phase 200 V Class

SF520S-A20
SF520S-A40
SF520S-A75
SF520S-1A5–––
1
Three-Phase 200 V Class

SF5202-A10
SF5202-A20
SF5202-A40
SF5202-A75
SF5202-1A5
SF5202-2A2

–
–
–
1
1
1
Three-Phase 400 V Class

SF5204-A20
SF5204-A40
SF5204-A75
SF5204-1A5SF5204-2A2

156

–
–
–
1
1

7.4  Drive Cooling Fans

 Cooling Fan Replacement
The cooling fan is installed on the top of the drive. The cooling fan can easily be replaced without tools or removal ofthe drive or enclosure parts.
WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply can result in serious personal
injury. Before servicing the drive, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned
off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all
indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
CAUTION! Burn Hazard. Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate injury. Shut off the power to the drive
when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes and ensure the heatsink has cooled down.

 Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Depress the right and left sides of the fan cover tabs and pull upward. Remove the fan cover from the top of the drive.
The following figure illustrates a drive with a single cooling fan.
ABCC – TabPeriodic Inspection &Maintenance

A – Fan cover
B – Cooling fan

Figure 7.1 Remove the Cooling Fan Cover

2. Remove the fan cable carefully, disconnect the pluggable connector and remove the fan.

7

Figure 7.2 Disconnect and Remove the Fan

157

7.4  Drive Cooling Fans

 Installing the Cooling Fan
NOTICE: Prevent Equipment Damage. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. Improper cooling fan replacement could result in damage toequipment. When installing the replacement cooling fan into the drive, make sure the fan is facing upwards. To ensure maximum useful product life,
replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance.

1. Install the replacement cooling fan into the drive, ensuring the alignment pins line up, as shown in the figure below:
B

AC
A – Label facing up
B – BackC – Front
Figure 7.3 Cooling Fan Orientation

2. Ensure the connectors are properly connected and place the cable back into the recess of the drive.

A
A – Push the connectors together so no space remains between them.
Figure 7.4 Connectors
Note:

Ensure that the left and right tabs are locked back into place.

3. Align the left and right cover tabs to install the fan cover back on the top of the drive.

Figure 7.5 Installation

158

8Peripheral Devices & Options
This chapter explains the installation of available peripheral devices and options for thedrive.

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5

SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................. 160
DRIVE OPTIONS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES..................................................... 161
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES.................................................................. 163
INSTALLING PERIPHERAL DEVICES.................................................................... 164
OPTIONS............................................................................................................... 170

159

8.1  Section Safety

8.1  Section Safety
DANGER
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Disconnect all power to the drive, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off, measure the DC bus voltage
to confirm safe level, and check for unsafe voltages before servicing to prevent electric shock. The internal
capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguishwhen the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstallcovers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after
the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc.
To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage levelto confirm safe level.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar
with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not change wiring or remove option unit while power is running through the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing.
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electricalconnections.

NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
160

8.2  Drive Options and Peripheral Devices

8.2  Drive Options and Peripheral Devices
The following table of peripheral devices lists the names of the various devices/options available for Sumitomo
drives.
• Peripheral Device Selection: Refer to the catalog for selection and part numbers.
Table 8.1 Available Peripheral Devices

—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—

—

Model Number
Power Options

Description

DC Reactor

Y220DA032~36
Y220DA003~06

DC reactor to improve power factor

AC Reactor

Y220CA053~56
Y220CA080~83

AC reactor to improve power factor

Braking Resistor

200,300,400W
70 to 750Ω

braking resistor

Zero Phase Reactor

X480AC188

Reduces electromagnetic noise

Input Noise Filter

X480AC289,290,296

Reduces electromagnetic noise flowing back from the drive into power
supplyOutput Noise Filter

X480AC163~165

Reduces electromagnetic noise generated by the drive output

Reference Setting / Monitor Options
X525AA048
External meter for displaying the output frequency or current using an
Frequency Meter
analog signal from the drive（DCF-12NB)
ACF-12NB
External meter for displaying the output current using the current
Ammeter
X525AA078~82transformer
Frequency Reference Setting
External potentiometer for setting the frequency reference by an
VF07
Potentiometer (1 kΩ)analog inputInterface Options
Remote operator with LED display and copy function; Cable length
Remote LED Operator
JVOP-182-H
max. 3 m
RS-232C Serial
RS-232/C communications interface to either connect the drive to a PC,
SI-232/JC-H
Communication Interface
to the external LED operator JVOP-182-H.
Potentiometer option for setting the frequency reference directly at the
Potentiometer Option
AI-V3/J-H
drive
PC Serial Cable
WV103
Cable to connect the drive to a serial port of a PC (3m)Extension cable (1 m or 3 m) to connect an external operator to theExternal Operator Cable
ICS-1 / ICS-3
drive
Others
PC tool for drive setup and parameter management
Engineering Software Tools—
The installation files can be obtained at no charge from:http://cyclo.co.jp
Communication Options
RS-422/RS-485 SerialInterface for RS-422/RS-485 communications using the MEMOBUS/
SI-485/J-H
Communications Interface
Modbus RTU protocol

161

Peripheral Devices &Options

Option88.2  Drive Options and Peripheral Devices

This Page Intentionally Blank

162

8.3  Connecting Peripheral Devices

8.3  Connecting Peripheral Devices
Figure 8.1 illustrates connections between the drive, motor, and various peripheral devices.
Refer to peripheral device option manual for detailed installation instructions.
Engineering software toolsPowersupply<1>Linebreaker(MCCB)or
Leakagebreaker

Dedicated Cable(RJ-45/D-sub adapter)(30 cm)

PC

Drive

B1 B2

Magnetic
contactor(MC)

Thermal Relay

Surge
protector
AC reactor
Zero phasereactor
Fuse
Input side

Braking
Resistor

Interface
Optionunit
DC reactor
Ground+1 +2

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Output side
Motor

BackupContactor

Zero phasereactorGroundFigure 8.1 Connecting Peripheral Devices

Note:

If the drive is set to trigger an output terminal when performing a fault restart (L5-02 = 1), the power supply will be shut off
during fault restart as the drive outputs a fault signal. Keep this in mind when designing a wiring sequence to interrupt the power
to the drive. The default setting for the drive is to not trigger an output terminal that indicates a fault restart is being performed(L5-02 = 0).

Peripheral Devices &Options<1> The Interface Option Unit can be directly connected to a PC with a D-sub 9-pin connector. Use a cable designed
for PC use (part number WV103).

8163

8.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

8.4  Installing Peripheral Devices
This section describes the proper steps and precautions to take when installing or connecting various peripheraldevices to the drive.
Refer to peripheral device manual for detailed installation instructions.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could resultin drive performance degradation due to improper power supply.

 Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCB) and Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB)
Install an MCB or ELCB for line protection between the power supply and the main circuit power supply input
terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3. This protects the main circuit and devices wired to the main circuit while also
providing overload protection.
Consider the following when selecting and installing an MCB or ELCB:• The rated current of the MCB or ELCB should be 1.5 to 2 times the rated output current of the drive. Use an MCB or
ELCB with operation characteristics that do not trip the MCB or ELCB faster than the drive overload protection (shuts
off the drive after 1 minute of operation at 150% of the drive rated current).
• If several drives are connected to one MCB or an ELCB that is shared with other equipment, use a sequence thatshuts the power OFF when errors are output by using magnetic contactor (MC) as shown in the following figure.
Drive
MCB

MC

Power
Supply

MC
SA

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
MB
MC

MC

Figure 8.2 Connecting an MCBWARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Disconnect the MCB (or ELCB) and MC before wiring terminals. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or
death.

 Installing a Leakage Breaker
Drive outputs generate high-frequency leakage current as a result of high-speed switching. Install an Earth Leakage
Circuit Breaker (ELCB) on the input side of the drive to switch off potentially harmful leakage current. Because eachdrive generates about 100 mA of leakage current across a 1 m cable and another 5 mA for each additional meter,each drive should have a leakage breaker with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per drive to eliminate
harmonic leakage current and suppress any potentially harmful frequencies.
Refer to the Sumitomo catalog for ELCB selection. Leakage current can cause unprotected components to operate
incorrectly. If this is a problem, lower the carrier frequency, replace the components in question with parts protectedagainst harmonic current, or increase the sensitivity amperage of the leakage breaker to at least 200 mA per drive.
Factors in determining leakage current:• Size of the AC drive• AC drive carrier frequency• Motor cable type and length• EMI/RFI filter
To safely protect the drive system, select a breaker that senses AC and DC currents and high frequency currents.

1648.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

 Installing a Magnetic Contactor
 Disconnecting the Power Supply
The drive should be shut off in the case of a fault in external equipment such as braking resistors through use of aMagnetic Contactor (MC).
NOTICE: Do not connect electromagnetic switches or MCs to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Improper sequencing of output
motor circuits may cause damage to the drive.
NOTICE: Install an MC on the input side of the drive when the drive should not automatically restart after power loss. To get the full performance life
out of the electrolytic capacitors and circuit relays, refrain from switching the MC more than once every 30 minutes. Frequent use can damage thedrive. Use the drive to stop and start the motor.
Note:

1.	Install an MC to the drive output to prevent the drive from restarting automatically when the power is restored after
momentary power loss.
2.	Set up a delay for the MC so that it does not open prematurely for the drive to continue operating through momentary powerloss.

 Protecting the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit
Use an MC on the input side of the drive to protect a braking resistor or braking resistor unit from overheat or fire.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. When using a braking unit, use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and configure a fault contact output for the braking
resistor unit to disconnect drive main power via an input contactor. Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by firefrom overheating resistors.

 Connecting an AC or DC Reactor
AC and DC reactors suppress surges in current and improve the power factor on the input side of the drive.
Use a DC reactor or AC reactor or both:• To suppress harmonic current or improve the power factor of the power supply.
• When using a phase advancing capacitor switch.
• With a large capacity power supply transformer (over 600 kVA).
Note:

Use an AC or DC reactor when also connecting a thyristor converter (such as a DC drive) to the same power supply system,
regardless of the conditions of the power supply.

 Connecting an AC Reactor
A

B

D

U

X

R/L1

V

Y

S/L2

W

Z

T/L3

A – Power supply
B – MCBC – AC reactor
D – Drive

Figure 8.3 Connecting an AC Reactor

 Connecting a DC Reactor
Ensure the jumper between terminals +1 and +2 (terminals are jumpered for shipment) is removed whenconnecting a DC reactor. The jumper must be installed if no DC reactor is used. Refer to Connecting a DC Reactor on
page 165 for an example of DC reactor wiring.
C
A

B

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

+1

+2

D

A – Power supply
B – MCBC – Drive
D – DC reactor

Figure 8.4 Connecting a DC Reactor

165

Peripheral Devices &OptionsC88.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

 Connecting a Surge Absorber
A surge absorber suppresses surge voltage generated from switching an inductive load near the drive. Inductive
loads include magnetic contactors, relays, valves, solenoids and brakes. Always use a surge absorber or diode when
operating with an inductive load.
Note:

Never connect a surge absorber to the drive output.

 Connecting a Noise Filter
 Input-Side Noise Filter
Drive outputs generate noise as a result of high-speed switching. This noise flows from inside the drive back toward
the power supply, possibly affecting other equipment. Installing a noise filter to the input side of the drive canreduce the amount of noise flowing back into the power supply. This also prevents noise from entering the drivefrom the power supply.
• Use a noise filter specifically designed for AC drives.
• Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive.
B
A

C

MCB
1

3

R/L1

2

4

S/L2

E

MCB

D

A – Power supply
B – Input-side noise filter

C – Drive
D – Other control device

Figure 8.5 Input-Side Noise Filter (Single-Phase 200 V)
A

B

MCB

C

R

U

S

V

T

W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

E
MCB

D

A – Power supply
B – Input-side noise filter

C – Drive
D – Other control device

Figure 8.6 Input-Side Noise Filter (Three-Phase 200/400 V)

Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 228 for details about EMC filter selection and installation in order to makethe drive compliant with European standards IEC/EN 61800-3 and the EMC guidelines.

1668.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

 Output-Side Noise Filter
A noise filter on the output side of the drive reduces inductive noise and radiated noise. Figure 8.7 illustrates anexample of output-side noise filter wiring.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper application of noise filters could result indamage to the drive
B
A

MCB

C

R/L1

U/T1

1

4

S/L2

V/T2

2

5

T/L3

W/T3

3

6

A – Power supply
B – DriveD

C – Output-side noise filter
D – Motor
Figure 8.7 Output-Side Noise Filter• Radiated Noise: Electromagnetic waves radiated from the drive and cables create noise throughout the radio
bandwidth that can affect devices.
• Induced Noise: Noise generated by electromagnetic induction can affect the signal line and may cause thecontroller to malfunction.
Preventing Induced Noise
Use a noise filter on the output side or use shielded cables. Lay the cables at least 30 cm away from the signal line toprevent induced noise.
B
A

C

MCB

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

V/T2

T/L3

W/T3

D
E
G
F

E – Separate at least 30 cm
F – Controller
G – Signal line

Figure 8.8 Preventing Induced Noise

Reducing Radiated/Radio Frequency Noise
The drive, input lines, and output lines generate radio frequency noise. Use noise filters on input and output sides
and install the drive in a metal enclosure panel to reduce radio frequency noise.
Note:

The cable running between the drive and motor should be as short as possible.

8

A
B

C

MCB

A – Metal enclosure
B – Power supply
C – Noise filter
D – Drive

R/L1

D

U/T1

S/L2

V/T2

T/L3

W/T3

E

Peripheral Devices &Options

A – Power supply
B – Drive
C – Shielded motor cable
D – MotorFG

E – Noise filter
F – Shielded motor cable
G – Motor

Figure 8.9 Reducing Radio Frequency Noise167

8.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

 EMC Filter Installation
This drive is tested according to European standards IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and it complies with the EMC guidelines.
Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 228 for details about EMC filter selection and installation.

 Zero-Phase Reactor
A zero-phase reactor can be used to reduce the noise on the input and output sides of the drive.
D

CA

Close-up of V/T2-phase wiringEB

1st pass

R/L1 U/T1
S/L2

V/T2

F

T/L3 W/T3

2nd pass
3rd pass
4th pass

Pass each wire (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
through the core 4 times.

A – Power supply
B – MCBC – Zero-phase reactor on input side

D – DriveE – Zero-phase reactor on output side
F – Motor

Figure 8.10 Zero-Phase Reactor

 Installing Fuses on the Input Side
Always install input fuses to the input side of the as a protective measure against damage caused by a short circuit.
Refer to Table 8.2 for input fuse selection.
Table 8.2 Input Fuses
Drive
Model

SF520S-A20
SF520S-A40
SF520S-A75
SF520S-1A5
SF5202-A10
SF5202-A20
SF5202-A40
SF5202-A75
SF5202-1A5
SF5202-2A2
SF5204-A20
SF5204-A40
SF5204-A75
SF5204-1A5SF5204-2A2

168

Class L Fuse Type
Manufacturer: Fuji Electric
ModelSingle-Phase 200 V Class
CR6L-30/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-75/UL
CR6L-100/UL
Three-Phase 200 V Class
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-30/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
Three-Phase 400 V Class
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-20/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL
CR6L-50/UL

Fuse Ampere Rating
30
50
75
100
20
20
20
30
50
50
20
20
50
50
50

8.4  Installing Peripheral Devices

 Noise Filter Installation
This drive has undergone testing in conformance with IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and is in compliance with low voltage
directives. Refer to EMC Guidelines Compliance on page 228 for information on selecting a noise filter.

 Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive Output
Motor thermal overload relays protect the motor by disconnecting power lines to the motor due to a motor
overload condition.
Install a motor thermal overload relay between the drive and motor:• When operating multiple motors on a single AC drive.
• When using a power line bypass to operate the motor directly from the power line.
It is not necessary to install a motor thermal overload relay when operating a single motor from a single AC drive.
The AC drive has UL recognized electronic motor overload protection built into the drive software.
Note:

Disable the motor protection function (L1-0 1 = “0”) when using an external motor thermal overload relay. The relay should shutoff main power on the input side of the main circuit when triggered.

 General Precautions when Using Thermal Overload Relays
The following application precautions should be considered when using motor thermal overload relays on the
output of AC drives in order to prevent nuisance trips or overheat of the motor at low speeds:• Low speed motor operation• Use of multiple motors on a single AC drive• Motor cable length• Nuisance tripping resulting from high AC drive carrier frequency

Using One Drive with Multiple Motors
Turn off the electronic thermal overload function. Please refer to the appropriate product instruction manual todetermine which parameter disables this function.
The UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive cannot be applied when using multiple motors
on one drive.
Long Motor Cables
When long motor cables and high carrier frequency are used, nuisance tripping of the thermal relay may occur due
to increased leakage current. Therefore, reduce the carrier frequency or increase the tripping level of the thermal
overload relay.
Nuisance Tripping Resulting from High AC Drive Carrier Frequency
Current waveforms generated by high carrier frequency PWM drives tend to create additional temperature risein overload relays. Therefore, it may be necessary to increase the trip level setting when encountering nuisancetriggering of the relay.
WARNING! Fire Hazard. Confirm an actual motor overload condition is not present prior to increasing the thermal oL trip setting. Check local
electrical codes before making adjustments to motor thermal overload settings.

169

Peripheral Devices &Options

Low Speed Operation and Motor Thermal oL Relays
Generally, thermal relays are applied on general-purpose motors. When general-purpose motors are driven by
AC drives, the motor current is approximately 5 to 10% greater than if driven by the commercial power supply. In
addition, the cooling capacity of a motor with a shaft-driven fan decreases when operating at low speeds. Even if
the load current is within the motor rated value, motor overheating may occur. A thermal relay cannot effectively
protect the motor due to the reduction of cooling at low speeds. For this reason, apply the UL recognized electronic
thermal overload protection function built into the drive whenever possible.
UL recognized electronic thermal overload function of the drive: Speed-dependent heat characteristics are
simulated using data from standard motors and force-ventilated motors. The motor is protected from overload using
this function.

88.5  Options

8.5  Options
Table 8.6 and Table 8.7 give detailed information about the available options that allow Sumitomo drives to connect
to communication networks. A host controller can control and monitor the drive, read and change parameters byusing a communication option.
• Option Installation: Refer to option unit manual for option unit installation instructions.

 Interface Options
Table 8.6 Interface Option Units
Option
RS-232C Interface (Removable)
RS-422/RS-485 Interface for
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication
Potentiometer

Model
SI-232/JC-H
SI-485/J-H
AI-V3/J-H

Function
Allows the user to take advantage of the Remote LED Operator option.
Allows the drive to connect to a network using MEMOBUS/Modbus RTU
protocol. Option includes a communication cable connector.
Allows for easier speed control.

 Other Options
Table 8.7 Other Options
OptionRemote LED Operator

170

Model
JVOP-182-H

Function
Allows for remote operation when using the optional LED operator. This
option is used in combination with the LED extension cable and the RS-232C
interface. Option includes a Copy function for saving drive settings.

Appendix: A
Specifications

A.1 HEAVY DUTY AND NORMAL DUTY RATINGS..................................................... 172
A.2 SINGLE/THREE-PHASE 200 V CLASS DRIVE....................................................... 173
A.3 THREE-PHASE 400 V CLASS DRIVES................................................................... 174
A.4 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................... 175
A.5 DRIVE WATT LOSS DATA...................................................................................... 177
A.6 DRIVE DERATING DATA....................................................................................... 178

171

A.1  Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings

A.1 Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Ratings
The capacity of the drive is based on two types of load characteristics: Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND).
Refer to Selecting the Appropriate Load Rating on page 172 for the differences between HD and ND. Specifications
for capacity ratings are listed on the following pages.
Table A.1  Selecting the Appropriate Load RatingS
SettingParameter C6-01

Rated Output Current

Overload Tolerance

Default Carrier Frequency

0: Heavy Duty
(default)

HD Rating

150% rated output current for 60 s

5 kHz

1: Normal Duty

ND Rating

120% rated output current for 60 s
varies by model

2 kHz, Swing PWM<1> The following pages list information on rating changes based on drive model.
TERMS• HD and ND: HD refers to applications requiring constant torque output, while ND refers to applications
with variable torque needs. The drive allows the user to select HD or ND torque depending on theapplication.
Fans, pumps, and blowers should use ND (C6-01 = 1), and other applications generally use HD (C6-01 = 0).
• Swing PWM: Swing PWM equivalent to a 2 kHz audible noise. This function turns the motor noise into aless obtrusive white noise.

Note: Differences between HD ratings and ND ratings for the drive include rated input and output current, overload capacity, carrier
frequency, and current limit. The default setting is for HD (C6-01 =0).

172

A.2  Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive

A.2 Single/Three-Phase 200 V Class Drive
Table A.2  Power RatingsSpecification
A10

A20

A40

A75

1A5

Single-Phase Drive Model <1> SF520S

-

A20

A40

A75

1A5

-

Maximum Motor Size Allowed(kW) <2>

HD Rating

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

ND Rating

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.1

2.2

3.0

ThreePhase

HD Rating

0.7

1.5

2.9

5.8

7.5

11.0

ND Rating

1.1

1.9

3.9

7.3

10.8

13.9

HD Rating

1.4

2.8

5.5

11.0

14.1

-

ND Rating

2.0

3.6

7.3

13.8

20.2

-

HD Rating

0.3

0.6

1.1

1.9

3.0

4.2

ND Rating

0.5

0.7

1.3

2.3

3.7

4.6

HD Rating

0.8
<6>

1.6
<6>

3.0
<6>

5.0
<6>

8.0
<7>

11.0
<7>

ND Rating
<5>

1.2

1.9

3.5
(3.3)

6.0

9.6

12.0

Input

Input
Current(A) <3>SinglePhase

Rated Output
Capacity (kVA) <4>

Output Current (A)Overload Tolerance

HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 1 minute(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)

Carrier Frequency

2 kHz (user-set, 2 to 15 kHz)Max Output Voltage (V)Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V
Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V(both proportional to input voltage)

Max Output Frequency (Hz)400 Hz (user-adjustable)

Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency

Three-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
Single-phase power: 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
DC power supply: 270 to 340 V <8>

Allowable Voltage Fluctuation-15 to 10%

Allowable Frequency Fluctuation±5%

OutputPower
SupplyHarmonic Corrective
Actions

DC Reactor

2A2

Optional<1> Drives with a single-phase power supply input will output three-phase power and cannot run a single-phase motor.
<2> The motor capacity (kW) refers to the 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greaterthan the motor rated current.
<3> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and power supply
impedance.
<4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required in order to raise the carrier frequency.
<6> Carrier frequency is set to 10 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<7> Carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<8> DC is not available for UL standards.
Note: Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated input and output current,
overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to “0” for HD or “1” for ND (default).

Specifications

Item
Three-Phase Drive Model SF5202

A

173

A.3  Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives

A.3 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives
Table A.3  Power Ratings
Item

Specification

Three-Phase Drive Model SF5204
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity(kW)
<1>
Input

Input Current (A) <2>
Output Current (kVA) <3>
Output Current (A)OutputPower
Supply

A20

A40

A75

1A5

2A2

HD Rating

0.37

0.55

1.1

1.5

2.2

ND Rating

0.37

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0

HD Rating

1.2

1.8

3.2

4.4

6.0

ND Rating

1.2

2.1

4.3

5.9

8.1

HD Rating <5>

0.9

1.4

2.6

3.7

4.2

ND Rating <4>

0.9

1.6

3.1

4.1

5.3

HD Rating <5>

1.2

1.8

3.4

4.8

5.5

ND Rating <4>

1.2

2.1

4.1

5.4

6.9

HD Rating: 150% of rated output current for 60 s
ND Rating: 120% of rated output current for 60 s
(Derating may be required for applications that start and stop frequently)

Overload Tolerance
Carrier Frequency

5 kHz (user-adjustable from 2 to 15 kHz)

Maximum Output Voltage (V)Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)

Maximum Output Frequency (Hz)400 Hz (user-adjustable)

Rated Voltage
Rated Frequency

Three-phase power: 380 to 480 V 50/60 Hz
DC power supply: 510 to 680 V <6>

Allowable Voltage Fluctuation-15 to 10%

Allowable Frequency Fluctuation±5%

Harmonic Corrective Actions

DC Reactor

Optional<1> The motor capacity (kW) refers to the 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greaterthan the motor rated current.
<2> Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and power supply impedance.
<3> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V.
<4> Carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz (Swing PWM). Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<5> Carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz. Current derating is required to raise the carrier frequency.
<6> DC is not available for UL standards.
Note: Differences between Heavy Duty (HD) ratings and Normal Duty (ND) ratings for the drive include rated input and output current,
overload capacity, carrier frequency and current limit. Set parameter C6-01 to “0” for HD or “1” for ND (default).

174

A.4  Drive Specifications

A.4 Drive Specifications
Note: For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the environmental conditions.
Item

Specification

Frequency Control Range
Frequency Accuracy
Frequency Setting
Resolution

1/220 x Maximum output frequency (E1–04)

Frequency Setting Signal

Main frequency reference: 0 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
150%/3 Hz
1: 20~40
0.00 to 6000.0 s (allows four separate settings for accel and decel)

Speed Control Range
Accel/Decel Time
Braking TorqueInstantaneous Average Decel Torque <1> : 0.1/0.2 kW: over 150%, 0.4/0.75 kW: over
100%, 1.5 kW: over 50%, 2.2 kW and above: over 20%
Continuous Regenerative Torque: 20%,

V/f Characteristics

User-set, programmable.

Functions

Motor Protection
Overcurrent Protection
Overload Protection
Overvoltage Specification
Low Voltage Protection

Protection Functions

Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz
Analog inputs: 1/1000 of maximum output frequency

Output Frequency
Calculation Resolution
Starting TorqueControl
Characteristics

V/f Control
0.01 to 400 Hz
Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output frequency (-10 to +50 °C)
Analog input: within ±0.5% of the max output frequency (25 °C ±10 °C)

Momentary Power Loss
Ride-Thru• Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru• Speed Search• Multi-Step Speed (9 steps max)
• Accel/Decel Time Switch• S-Curve Accel/Decel• 2-Wire/3-Wire Sequence• Cooling Fan ON/OFF• Slip Compensation• Torque Compensation• Jump Frequencies (reference dead band)• Frequency Reference Upper/Lower Limit• DC Injection Braking (start and stop)• Overexcitation Braking• Fault Reset
Motor overheat protection via output current sensor
Drives stops when output exceeds 200% of the rated current (Heavy Duty)
A stop command will be entered after operating at 150% for 60 s (Heavy Duty) <3>
200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approximately 410 V
400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approximately 820 V
Drive stops when DC bus voltage falls below the levels indicated:
190 V (3-phase 200 V), 160 V (single-phase 200 V), 380 V (3-phase 400 V), 350 V (3phase 380 V)
Stops after 15 ms

Heatsink Overheat
Protection

Protected by thermistor

Stall Prevention

During acceleration and during run: Separate settings for each type of stall prevention
determine the current level at which stall prevention is triggered.
During deceleration: Select, enable/disable.

Cooling Fan Failure
Protection
Ground Fault Protection
DC Bus Charge LED

Specifications

Control Method

A

Circuit protection (“fan-lock” sensor)
Electronic circuit protection <4>Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V

175

A.4  Drive Specifications
Item

Specification

Storage/Installation Area
Ambient Temperature
Humidity
Storage Temperature
Altitude
Shock, Impact
Environment

Surrounding Area

Orientation
Standards
Protective Enclosure

Cooling Method

Indoors
IP20/IP00 Open-Chassis enclosure: -10 °C to +50 °C
95% RH or less with no condensation-20 to +60 °C allowed for short-term transport of the productUp to 1000 meters without derating; up to 3000 meters with output current andvoltage derating. Refer to Altitude Derating on page 178 for details.
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2
Install the drive in an area free from:• oil mist and dust
• metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials• radioactive materials• combustible materials• harmful gases and liquids• excessive vibration• chlorides• direct sunlight
Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects• UL508C• IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 61800-5-1
IP20/Open-Chassis
SF520S-A20 to A75: self-cooled
SF520S-1A5: cooling fan
SF5202-A10 to A40: self-cooled
SF5202-A75 to 2A2: cooling fan
SF5204-A20 to A75: self-cooled
SF5204-1A5 to 2A2: cooling fan<1> Instantaneous average deceleration torque refers to the torque required to decelerate the motor (uncoupled from the load) from therated motor speed down to zero in the shortest time.
<2> Ensure that Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration is disabled (L3-04 = 0) or set to 3 when using a braking resistor. The default
setting for the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
<3> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output frequency is less than 6 Hz.
<4> Ground protection cannot be provided under the following circumstances when a ground fault is likely in the motor windings during
run: Low ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; low ground resistance for the motor cable and terminal block; or thedrive is powered up from a ground short.

176

A.5  Drive Watt Loss Data

A.5 Drive Watt Loss Data
Table A.4  Watt Loss 200 V Class Single-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8/10 kHz) <1>

Normal Duty (Swing PWM equal 2 kHz)

Drive
Model
SF520S

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss(W)

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss
(W)

A20

1.6

7.9

8.9

16.7

1.9

7.6

9.7

17.3

A40

3.0

16.1

11.5

27.7

3.3

14.6

14.4

29.1

A75

5.0

33.7

16.8

50.5

6.0

30.1

19.4

49.5

1A5

8.0

54.8

25.9

80.7

9.6

51.7

29.8

81.4

<1> 10 kHz for SF520S-A20 to A75
Table A.5  Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8/10 kHz) <1>

Normal Duty (Swing PWM equal 2 kHz)

Drive
Model
SF5202

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss(W)

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss
(W)

A10

0.8

4.3

7.3

11.6

1.2

5.0

8.0

13.0

A20

1.6

7.9

8.8

16.7

1.9

7.6

9.5

17.1

A40

3.0

16.2

11.5

27.7

3.5

15.8

13.6

29.4

A75

5.0

27.4

15.9

43.3

6.0

27.5

17.2

44.7

1A5

8.0

54.8

23.8

78.6

9.6

51.7

25.8

77.5

2A2

11.0

70.7

29.9

100.6

12.0

61.3

30.4

91.7

<1> 10 kHz for SF5202-A10 to A75
Table A.6  Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models
Heavy Duty (Carrier Frequency 8 kHz)

Normal Duty (Swing PWM equal 2 kHz)

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss(W)

Rated Amps(A)

Heatsink
Loss (W)Interior Unit
Loss (W)

Total Loss
(W)

A20

1.2

19.2

11.5

30.7

1.2

10.0

9.6

19.6

A40

1.8

28.9

14.8

43.7

2.1

18.5

13.9

32.4

A75

3.4

42.3

17.9

60.2

4.1

30.5

16.8

47.3

1A5

4.8

70.7

26.2

96.9

5.4

44.5

21.8

66.3

2A2

5.5

81.0

30.7

111.7

6.9

58.5

28.4

86.9

Specifications

Drive
Model
SF5204

A

177

A.6  Drive Derating Data

A.6 Drive Derating Data
The drive can be operated at above rated temperature, altitude and default carrier frequency by derating the drive capacity.

◆ Carrier Frequency Derating
Derate drive capacity using Figure A.1 as the carrier frequency of the drive increases above the factory setting.
Drive
RatingCarrier Frequency Derating

ND
200 V Class:
80% of HD

HD

400 V Class:
60% of HD02

10 (8)
Carrier Frequency (C6-02)

15

Figure A.1  Carrier Frequency Derating◆ Temperature Derating
As the ambient temperature for the drive is increased above the drive specification the drive should be derated.
Additionally parameter L8-35 Installation Method Selection on page 178 should be set according to enclosure typeand mounting method as illustrated in Figure A.2.

■ Output Current Derating Due to Ambient Temperature
Set L8-12 and L8-35 according to the installation conditions when the ambient temperature is above the drive
specification or if drives are side-by-side mounted in a cabinet. The output current is derated as shown in Figure A.2.
No.

Name

Description

L8-12

Ambient
Temperature
Setting

L8-35

Installation Method
Selection

Range

Def.

Adjust the drive overload (oL2) protection level when the drive is installed
in an environment that exceeds its ambient temperature rating.

-10 to 50

30 °C

0: IP20/IP00 Drive
1: Side-by-Side Mounting

0 to 10

Parameter L8-35 = 0 (IP20/IP00 Drive)
100%
85%
80%
Drive 70%

Rating50%
Parameter L8-35 = 1(Side-by-side Mounting)
0

30

o

o

35 40

o

50

o

Ambient temp C
Parameter L8-12

Figure A.2 Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Derating◆ Altitude Derating
The drive standard ratings are valid for an installation altitude up to 1000 m. If the altitude exceeds 1000 m, both the drive
input voltage and the rated output current must be derated for 1% per 100 m. The maximum altitude is 3000 m.

178

Appendix: B
Parameter List
This appendix contains a full listing of all parameters and settings available in the drive.

B.1 PARAMETER GROUPS.......................................................................................... 179
B.2 PARAMETER TABLE.............................................................................................. 181
B.3 DEFAULTS BY DRIVE MODEL AND DUTY RATING ND/HD................................. 195

179

B.1  Parameter Groups

B.1 Parameter Groups
Table B.1  Parameter Groups
Parameter
Group
A1
b1
b2
C1
C2
C3
C4
C6
d1
d2
d3
d4
E1
E2
H1
H2
H3
H4

180

Name
Initialization
Operation Mode Selection
DC Injection Braking
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
S-Curve Accel/Decel
Motor Slip Compensation
Motor Torque Compensation
Carrier Frequency
Frequency Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Frequency Reference Hold
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs

Page
181
181
182
182
182
182
182
183
184
184
184
184
185
185
186
187
188
188

Parameter
Group
H5
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L8
n1
n3
o1
o2
o3
o4
U1
U2
U4

Name
Serial Communications Setup
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ride-Thru
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Overtorque Detection
Hardware Protection
Hunting Prevention
Overexcitation Braking
Monitor Display Selection
Operator Keypad Functions
Copy Function
Maintenance Functions
Status Monitor
Fault History
Maintenance Monitor

Page
188
189
189
189
190
190
190
190
191
191
192
192
192
192
193
194
194

B.2  Parameter Table

B.2 Parameter Table
An “O” in the “Mode” column indicates that the parameter is available in the Advanced menu.
An “S” in the “Mode” column indicates that the parameter is available in the Startup menu.

◆ A: Initialization Parameters
The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level,
and Password.
No.

Name

Description

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

0, 2

2

O

101

72

0 to 3330

0

O

103

72

Range

A1: Initialization Parameters
Use A1 parameters to configure the basic environment for drive operation.
A1-01
<1>

Access Level
Selection

Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator.
0: Operation only
2: Advanced Access Level

A1-03

Initialize
Parameters

Resets all parameters to factory default settings. (Initializes thedrive then returns A1-03 to 0)
0: No Initialization
2220: 2-Wire Initialization
3330: 3-Wire Initialization

A1-04

Password

A1-05

Password Setting

When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 and A1-03 cannot be changed.

E1-03, L8-35, o2-04, o2-09, and all U2 monitors are
not reset when performing initialization.
0 to 9999

0

O

104

72

0 to 9999

0

O

105

72

This parameter is hidden from view. To access A1-05,
first display A1-04. Then press the STOP key while
holding down the up arrow key. Parameter A1-05
will appear.

<1> Parameter can be changed during run.

◆ b: Application
Application parameters configure the Run Command Source, DC Injection Braking, and other application-related
settings.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

b1-01

Frequency
Reference
Selection

Selects the frequency reference input source.
0: Digital Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01 to d1-08
1: Terminals - Analog input terminal A1
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (option)
3: Potentiometer (option)

0 to 3

1

S

180

75

b1-02

Run Command
Selection

Selects the run command input source.
0: Digital Operator - RUN and STOP keys on the digital operator
1: Digital input terminals
2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications (option)

0 to 2

1

S

181

76

b1-03

Stopping Method
Selection

Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop

0, 1

0

S

182

77

b1-04

Reverse Operation
Selection

Permits or prohibits reverse operation.
0: Reverse enabled.
1: Reverse disabled.

0, 1

0

O

183

78

b1-07

LOCAL/ REMOTERun Selection

Determines the operation when the Run command source isswitched from LOCAL to REMOTE or between REMOTE andMEMOBUS/Modbus communication.
0: External Run command has to be cycled at the new source to be
activated.
1: External Run command at new source is accepted immediately.

0, 1

0

O

186

78

b1-08

Run Command
Selection while
in Programming
Mode

0: Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
1: Run command accepted in all menus.
2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during Run

0 to 2

0

O

187

78

b1-14

Phase Order
Selection

Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/
T3.
0 : Standard
1 : Switch phase order

0, 1

0

O

1C3

79

Parameter List

b1: Operation Mode Selection
Use b1 parameters to configure the operation mode.

B

181

B.2  Parameter Table
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

b1-17

Run Command at
Power Up

Determines the operation when a Run command is active at power
up of the drive.
0: Run command not issued, needs to be cycled
1: Run command issued, motor operation start

0, 1

1

O

1C6

79

b2: DC Injection Braking
Use b2 parameters to configure DC Injection Braking operation
b2-02

DC Injection
Braking Current

Sets the DC Injection Braking current as a percentage of the drive
rated current.

0 to 75

50%

O

18A

79

b2-03

DC Injection
Braking Time/DC
Excitation Time at
Start

Sets DC Injection Braking time at start. Disabled when set to 0.00
seconds.

0.00 to10.00

0.00 s

O

18B

79

b2-04

DC Injection
Braking Time at
Stop

Sets DC Injection Braking time at stop. When b1-03 = 0, thisparameter sets the amount of DC Injection time applied to themotor at the end of the decel ramp. Disabled when set to 0.00.

0.00 to10.00

0.00 sO

18C

80◆ C: Tuning
C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration times, S-curves, slip and torque compensation
functions and carrier frequency selections.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Use C1 parameters to configure motor acceleration and deceleration.
C1-01
<1>

Acceleration Time 1 Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency.

S

200

81

C1-02
<1>

Deceleration Time1

Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0.

S

201

81

C1-03
<1>

Acceleration Time 2

Sets the time to accelerate from 0 to maximum frequency when
Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a digital input.

O

202

81

C1-04
<1>

Deceleration Time
2

Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0 when
Accel/Decel times 2 are selected by a digital input.

O

203

81

C1-09

Fast-Stop Time

Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to 0 for themulti-function input fast-stop function.
Note: This parameter is also used by selecting “Fast-Stop” as a Stop
Method when a fault is detected.

O

208

81

0.0 to6000.010.0 sC2: S-Curve Characteristics
Use C2 parameters to configure S-curve operation.
S-Curve
Characteristic at
Accel Start

The S-curve can be controlled in the four points shown below.
ON

OFF

C2-02

S-Curve
Characteristic at
Accel End

C2-02

C2-03

C2-03

S-Curve
Characteristic at
Decel Start

C2-04

S-Curve
Characteristic at
Decel End

C2-01

Run
command
Outputfrequency

C2-01

C2-04
Time

S-curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp.
The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting and stopping
ramp.

0.00 to10.00

0.00 sO

20B

82

0.00 to10.00

0.00 sO

20C

82

0.00 to10.00

0.00 sO

20D

82

0.00 to10.00

0.00 s

O

20E

82

0.0

O

20F

82

O

210

82

C3: Slip Compensation
Use C3 parameters to configure the slip compensation function.
C3-01
<1>

Sets the slip compensation gain. Decides for what amount the
Slip Compensation
output frequency is boosted in order to compensate the slip.
Gain
Note: Adjustment is not normally required.

0.0 to 2.5

C3-02

Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time.
Slip Compensation
Decrease the setting when the slip compensation response is tooPrimary Delay Timeslow, increase it when the speed is not stable.

0 to 10000 2000 ms

C4: Torque Compensation
Use C4 parameters to configure Torque Compensation function.

182

B.2  Parameter Table
No.

C4-01
<1>

Name

TorqueCompensation
Gain

Description

Range

Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function andhelps to produce better starting torque.
Increase this setting when using a long motor cable or when the
motor is significantly smaller than the drive capacity.
0.00 to 2.50
Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs. Set the value
so that the current at low speed does not exceeds the drive rated
current.

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

1.00

O

215

83

C6: Carrier Frequency
Use C6 parameters to configure the carrier frequency drive settings.
Drive Duty
Selection

Selects the load rating for the drive.
0: Heavy Duty (HD) for constant torque applications.
1: Normal Duty (ND) for variable torque applications.
This setting affects the Rated output current and overload
tolerance of the drive.

0, 1

0

S

223

83

C6-02

Carrier Frequency
Selection

Selects the carrier frequency
1 : 2.0 kHz
2 : 5.0 kHz
3 : 8.0 kHz
4 : 10.0 kHz
5 : 12.5 kHz
6 : 15.0 kHz
7 : Swing PWM
8 to E : No setting possible
F: User defined (determined by C6-03 through C6-05)

1 to F

2

S

224

83

C6-03

Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit

C6-03 and C6-04 set upper and lower limits for the carrier
frequency.
Note: Set C6-02 to F before setting C6-03.

1.0 to 15.0

<2>

O

225

84

1.0 to 15.0

<2>

O

226

84

00 to 99

<2>

O

227

84

C6-01

carrier frequency
C6-03
C6-04

C6-04

Carrier Frequency
Lower Limit

output frequency× (C6-05) × K

outputfrequency
E1-04
max output
frequency

The coefficient K depends on C6-03:
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
When C6-05 ≤ 6, C6-04 is disabled (makes the carrier frequency C603 value).
C6-05

Carrier Frequency
Proportional Gain

Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency
when C6-02 = F.

Parameter List

<1> Parameter can be changed during run.
<2> Default setting value is dependent on parameter C6-02, Carrier Frequency Selection.

B

183

B.2  Parameter Table◆ d: References
Reference parameters are used to set the various frequency reference values during operation.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

d1: Frequency ReferenceUse d1 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference.
d1-01
<1>

Frequency
Reference 1

Frequency reference. Refer to b1-01: Frequency Reference
Selection on page 75 for instructions to use d1-01 as the mainfrequency reference.

0.00
Hz

S

280

86

d1-02
<1>

Frequency
Reference 2

Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 1" (H1-oo = 3) is on.

0.00
Hz

S

281

86

d1-03
<1>

Frequency
Reference 3

Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 2” (H1-oo = 4) is on.

0.00
Hz

S

282

86

d1-04
<1>

Frequency
Reference 4

Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 1, 2" (H1-ooo = 3 and 4) are on.

0.00
Hz

S

283

86

d1-05
<1>

Frequency
Reference 5

Frequency reference when digital input "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 3" (H1-oo = 5) is on.

0.00
Hz

O

284

86

d1-06
<1>

Frequency
Reference 6

Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 1, 3 " (H1-oo = 3 and 5) are on.

0.00
Hz

O

285

86

d1-07
<1>

Frequency
Reference 7

Frequency reference when digital inputs "Multi-Step Speed
Reference 2, 3" (H1-oo = 4 and 5) are on.

0.00
Hz

O

286

86

d1-08
<1>

Frequency
Reference 8

Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-Step speed
reference 1, 2, 3" (H1-oo = 3, 4, 5) are on.

0.00
Hz

O

287

86

d1-17
<1>

Jog Frequency
Reference

Frequency reference when digital inputs "Jog Frequency
Reference", "Forward Jog" or "Reverse Jog." are on.

5.00
Hz

S

292

86

0.00 to400.00 Hz<2>

d2: Frequency Upper and Lower Limits
Use d2 parameters to configure the frequency reference limits.
d2-01

Frequency
Reference Upper
Limit

Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage ofmaximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited to thisvalue even if the frequency reference is higher. This limit applies
to all frequency reference sources.

0.0 to
110.0

100.0
%

O

289

87

d2-02

Frequency
Reference Lower
Limit

Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage ofmaximum output frequency (E1-04). Output speed is limited to thisvalue even if the frequency reference is lower. This limit applies
to all frequency reference sources.

0.0 to
110.0

0.0%

O

28A

87

0.0 HzO

294

88

0.0 HzO

295

88

1.0 Hz

O

297

88

0

O

298

89

d3: Jump Frequency
Use d3 parameters to configure the drive Jump Frequency settings.
d3-01

Jump Frequency
1

d3-02

Jump Frequency
2

d3-04

Jump Frequency
Widthd3-01 to d3-04 allow programming of three prohibited frequency
reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibrationof the motor/machine. This feature does not eliminate the selected
frequency values, but accelerates and decelerates the motor
through the prohibited bandwidth.
The parameters must be according to the rule
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 .

0.0 to400.0This parameter sets the dead-band width around each selected
prohibited frequency reference point. The bandwidth becomes thedesignated Jump frequency, plus or minus d3-04.

0.0 to 20.0

d4: Frequency Reference HoldUse d4 parameters to configure the drive frequency reference hold function.

d4-01

Frequency
Reference Hold
Function Selection

Determines if the frequency reference or frequency reference bias
is saved when the Run command is removed or the power goes off.
0: Disabled
1: EnabledThis parameter is effective when the multi-function inputs “Accel/
Decel Ramp Hold” or “Up/Down” commands are selected (H1oo = A or 10/11).

0, 1<1> Parameter can be changed during run.
<2> Range upper limit is dependent on parameters E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency, and d2-01, Frequency Reference Upper Limit.

184

B.2  Parameter Table◆ E: Motor Parameters
E parameters set V/f characteristics and motor-related data.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

E1: V/f Pattern Characteristics
Use E1 parameters to set V/f characteristics for the motor.
E1-01
<1>

Input Voltage
Setting

This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage.
WARNING! Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set
in E1-01 for the protective features of the drive to function
properly. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and/or
death or personal injury.

155 to 255

200

S

300

90

E1-03

V/f Pattern
Selection

F: Custom V/f. E1-04 through E1-10 settings define the V/f pattern.

F

F

O

302

-

E1-04

Maximum Output
Frequency

40.0 to
400.0

60 Hz

S

303

90

0.0 to
255.0

200 V

S

304

90

0.0 to
E1-04

60 Hz

O

305

90

E1-05

0.0 toE1-04

3.0 Hz

O

306

90

E1-08

0.0 to255.0

16.0 V

O

307

90

0.0 toE1-04

1.5 HzS

308

90

0.0 to255.0

12.0 VO

309

90

10 to 200%of drive
rated
current

<2>

S

30E

92

0.00 to
20.00

<2>

O

30F

92

E1-05
<1>

Maximum Output
Voltage

E1-06

Base Frequency

E1-07

Middle Output
Frequency

E1-08
<1>

Middle Output
Frequency
Voltage

E1-09

Minimum Output
Frequency

E1-10
<1>

Minimum Output
Frequency
Voltage

E1-04, E1-06 to E1-10 can only be changed when E1-03 is set to F.
To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 andE1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Ensure that the four frequencies are set according to these rules toprevent triggering an oPE10 fault:
E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-04
VACrms Out (V)

E1-10
E1-09

E1-07 E1-06
Frequency (Hz)E1-04

E2: Motor Parameters
Use E2 parameters to set motor-related data.
E2-01

Motor Rated
Current

Sets the motor nameplate full load current in amperes.
Note: Set E2-03 (Motor No-Load Current) before making changes
to E2-01. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will trigger an oPE02 error.

E2-02

Motor Rated Slip

Sets the motor rated slip in Hertz.

E2-03

Motor No-LoadCurrent

Sets the magnetizing current of the motor in amperes.
Note: Set E2-03 (Motor No-Load Current) before making changes
to E2-01. Setting E2-01 < E2-03 will trigger an oPE02 error.

0 to lessthan E2-01

<2>

O

310

93

E2-05

Motor
Line-to-LineResistance

Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance in ohms.

0.000 to65.000
<3>

<2>

O

312

93

Parameter List

<1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive.
<2> Default setting value is dependent on parameter o2-04, Drive Model Selection and C6-01, Drive Duty Selection.
<3> Setting range becomes 0.00 to 130.00 for drives 0.2 kW and smaller.

B

185

B.2  Parameter Table◆ H Parameters: Multi-Function Terminals
H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

H1: Multi-Function Digital Input
H1 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital input terminals. Unused terminals should be set to "F".
H1-01

Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S1 Function
Selection

H1-02

Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S2 Function
Selection

H1-03

Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S3 Function
Selection

H1-04

Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S4 Function
Selection

H1-05

Multi-Function Digital Input
Terminal S5 Function
Selection

40

O

438

94

41

O

439

94

24

O

400

94

14

O

401

94

3 (0)
<1>

O

402

94

1 to 67

Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs.
Refer to H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections
on page 190 for a description of setting values.
0 to 67<1> Parenthetical value is the default when parameter A1-03 = 3330 3-Wire Initialization.

H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections
H1-oo
Setting

Description

Page

3-Wire Sequence

Closed: Reverse rotation (only if the drive is set up for 3-Wire sequence)

94

1

LOCAL/REMOTE Selection

Open: REMOTE, Run and frequency reference source set in b1-01/02
Closed: LOCAL, LED operator is run and reference source

95

2

Serial Communication Reference
Selection

Open: REMOTE, Run and frequency reference source set in b1-01/02
Closed: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication

95

3
4
5

Multi-Step Speed Reference 1
Multi-Step Speed Reference 2
Multi-Step Speed Reference 3

Used to select Multi-Step Speeds set in d1-01 to d1-08

95
95
95

6

Jog Reference Selection

Open: Selected speed reference
Closed: Jog Frequency reference (d1-17). Jog has priority over all otherreference sources.

95

7

Accel/Decel Time 1

Used to switch between Accel/Decel Time 1 and 2

95

8Baseblock Command (N.O.)

Open: Normal operation
Closed: No drive output

95

9Baseblock Command (N.C.)

Open: No drive output
Closed: Normal operation

95

A

Accel/Decel Ramp Hold

Closed: The drive pauses during acceleration or deceleration and maintains theoutput frequency.

96

F

Not used

Select this setting when not using the terminal or when using the terminal in a passthrough mode.

96

10

Up Command

Open: Maintains the current frequency reference

96

11

Down Command

Closed: Increases or decreases the current frequency reference.
Ensure that the increase and decrease commands are set in conjunction with
one another.

14

Fault Reset

Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Run command is removed.

97

15

Fast-Stop (N.O.)

Closed: Decelerates at the Fast-Stop time C1-09.
To restart the Fast-Stop input must be released and Run must be cycled.

97

17

Fast-stop (N.C.)

Open: Decelerates according to C1-09 (Fast-stop Time)

97

0

186

Function96

B.2  Parameter Table
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Selections
H1-oo
SettingFunction

Description

Page

External Fault

20: N.O., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
21: N.C., Always Detected, Ramp To Stop
22: N.O., During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: N.C., During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: N.O., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
25: N.C., Always Detected, Coast To Stop
26: N.O., During Run, Coast To Stop
27: N.C., During Run, Coast To Stop
28: N.O., Always Detected, Fast-stop
29: N.C., Always Detected, Fast-stop
2A: N.O., During Run, Fast-stop
2B: N.C., During Run, Fast-stop
2C: N.O., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2D: N.C., Always Detected, Alarm Only (continue running)
2E: N.O., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)
2F: N.C., During Run, Alarm Only (continue running)

98

40

Forward Run Command (2-Wiresequence)

Open: Stop
Closed: Forward run

98

41

Reverse Run Command (2-Wiresequence)

Open: Stop
Closed: Reverse run

98

61

External Search Command 1

Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the max. output
frequency (E1-04)

99

62
67

External Search Command 2
Communications Test Mode

Closed: Activates Current Detection Speed Search from the frequency reference
Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-422/485 interface.

99
99

20 to 2F

No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

O

40B

99

H2: Multi-Function Digital Output MA-MB-MC
Use H2 parameters to assign functions to the multi-function digital output MA-MB-MC.
H2-01

Terminal MA, MB
and MC Function
Selection (relay)

Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on page 191
for a description of setting values.

0 to 13DE

H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings
H2-01
Setting

Description

Page

0
1

During Run
Zero Speed

Closed: A Run command is active or voltage is output
Closed: Output frequency is 0

99
100

2

Speed Agree 1

Closed: Output frequency equals the speed reference (plus or minus 2 Hz
hysteresis)

1004Frequency Detection 1

Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with 2 Hz
hysteresis

100

5Frequency Detection 2

Closed: Output frequency is greater than the value in L4-01 with 2 Hz hysteresis

101

6

Drive Ready

Closed: Drive Ready. The drive is powered up, not in a fault state, and in the
Drive mode

101

7
8

DC Bus Undervoltage
During Baseblock (N.O.)

Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level
Closed: There is no output voltage

101
102

B

Torque Detection 1 (N.O.)

Closed: Output current/torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6-02
for longer than the time set in parameter L6-03

102

E

Fault

Closed: Fault occurred (other than CPF00 and CPF01)

102

F

Not used

Set this value when the terminal is not used, or when using the terminal in the
pass-through mode

102

10

Minor Fault

Closed: An alarm is triggered

102

Parameter List

Function

17

Torque Detection 1 (N.C.)

Open: When the output current exceeds the value set in parameter L6-02 formore time than is set in parameter L6-03

102

B

1A
1E

Reverse Direction
Restart Enabled

Closed: Drive is running in the reverse direction
Closed: An automatic restart is performed

102
102

3C

LOCAL/REMOTE Status

Closed: LOCAL
Open: REMOTE

102

3D

Speed Search

Closed: Speed search is being executed

103

187

B.2  Parameter Table
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings
H2-01
Setting
100 to 102;
104 to 108;
10B, 10E,
110, 117,
11A, 11E,
13C, 13D
No.

Function

H2 Parameter Functions Reversed
Output Switching of 0 to 13D

Name

Description

Page

Reverse the output switching of the multi-function output functions. Set the lasttwo digits of 1oo to reverse the output signal of that specific function
Examples:Setting “108” reverses the output of “During baseblock”, which is setting value 08
Setting “13C” reverses the output of “LOCAL/REMOTE Status”, which is setting “3C”

103

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

H3: Analog Input A1
Use H3 parameters to set the analog input terminal A1.

H3-01

Terminal A1
Signal Level
Selection

Sets the input level for terminal A1.
0: 0 to +10 V (lower limit)
1: 0 to +10 V (no lower limit)
2: 4 to 20 mA
3: 0 to 20 mA

0 to 3

0

O

410

103

H3-03
<1>

Terminal A1 Gain
Setting

Sets the level of the input value when 10 V (20 mA) is input atterminal A1.

-999.9 to999.9100.0%

O

411

104

H3-04
<1>

Terminal A1 Bias
Setting

Sets the level of the input value when 0 V (0 or 4 mA) is input atterminal A1.

-999.9 to
999.9

0.0%

O

412

104

H3-13

Analog Input
Filter Time
Constant

Sets the primary delay filter time constant for terminal A1 or
potentiometer (optional). Used for noise filtering.

0.00 to
2.00

0.03 s

O

41B

105

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

<1> Parameter can be changed during run.
No.

Name

Description

H4: Multi-Function Analog Output AM
Use H4 parameters to configure the multi-function analog output terminal AM.

H4-01

Multi-Function
Analog Output
Terminal AM

Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog
output terminal AM.
Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in Uooo. For example, enter “103” for U1-03.
When using this terminal in through mode or when not using it atall, set “000” or “031”.

000 to 999

102

O

41D

106

H4-02
<1>

Multi-Function
Analog Output
Terminal AM
Gain

Sets terminal AM output level when selected monitor is at 100%.
Maximum output voltage is 10 V.

-999.9 to999.9100.0%

S

41E

106

H4-03
<1>

Multi-Function
Analog Output
Terminal AM Bias

Sets terminal AM output level when selected monitor is at 0%.

-999.9 to
999.9

0.0%

O

41F

106

H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
Use H5 Parameters to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
The settings for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications become effective when the drive is restarted.
H5-01
<2>

188

Drive Slave
Address

Selects drive slave number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus
communication. Cycle power for the setting to take effect.

0 to FF

1F

O

425

204

H5-02

Comm. Speed
Selection

Selects the baud rate for MEMOBUS/Modbus communication.
Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0 : 1200 bps
1 : 2400 bps
2 : 4800 bps
3 : 9600 bps
4 : 19200 bps
5 : 38400 bps

0 to 5

3

O

426

204

H5-03

Comm. Parity
Selection

Selects the communication parity for MEMOBUS/Modbus
communication. Cycle power for the setting to take effect.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity

0 to 2

0

O

427

204

H5-04

Stopping Method
After Comm.
Error

Selects the stopping method when a communication time-out
fault (CE) is detected.
0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast-stop
3: Alarm only

0 to 3

3

O

428

204

B.2  Parameter Table
Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

0, 1

1

O

429

204

10 to 65

10 ms

O

42A

204

Selects "request to send" (RTS) control:
0: Disabled - RTS is always on.
1: Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending.

0, 1

1

O

42B

204

Run Command
Method Selection

0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP Method
1: RUN/STOP, FWD/REV Method

0, 1

0

O

43D

204

MEMOBUS Freq.
Reference andFreq. Monitor
Unit

0: 0.1 Hz/1
1: o1-03 based
2: 100%/30000
3: 0.1%/1

0 to 3

0

O

43E

204

No.

Name

Description

H5-05

Comm. Fault
Detection
Selection

Enables or disables the communications timeout fault (CE).
0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause acommunication fault.
1: Enabled - If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds, a
CE fault will occur.

H5-06

Drive Transmit
Wait Time

Set the wait time between receiving and sending data.

H5-07

RTS Control
Selection

H5-12

H5-13

<1> Parameter can be changed during run.
<1> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands.
Note: Cycle power to the drive to enable MEMOBUS/Modbus settings.

◆ L: Protection Function
L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, such as: control during momentary power loss, Stall
Prevention, frequency detection, fault restarts, overtorque detection, and other types of hardware protection.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

L1: Motor Protection Functions
Use L1 parameters to configure motor protective functions.

L1-01

Motor Overload
Protection
Selection

Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) based on thecooling capacity of the motor.
0: Disabled
1: General Purpose Motor (Standard Fan-Cooled)
2: Drive Dedicated Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10
NOTICE: When multiple motors are used the drive may not be able
to provide protection, even if it is enabled in L1-01. Set L1-01 to “0”and ensure each motor has a thermal relay installed.

L1-02

Motor Overload
Protection Time

Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time.
A larger L1-02 time will increase the time for an oL1 fault to occur.
This parameter does not typically require adjustment. Should be
set in accordance with the overload tolerance of the motor.

0.1 to 5.0

1.0 min

O

481

108

L1-08

Electrothermal
Level
Setting

Sets the electrothermal level setting for the motor load protection.

10 to 150
%

100
%

O

1103

108

L1-13

Continuous
Electrothermal
Operation
Selection

Determines whether or not to hold the electrothermal value when
the power supply is interrupted.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0, 1

1

O

46D

108

0

O

485

108

0 to 2

1

S

480

107

L2-01

Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection

Enables and disables the momentary power loss function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (Uv1) fault when power is lost.
1: Power Loss Ride-Thru Time - Drive will restart if power returns
within the Power Loss Ride-Thru Time.
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns as longas the CPU is working.

0 to 2

L3: Stall Prevention Function
Use L3 parameters to configure the Stall Prevention function.

L3-01

Stall Prevention
Selection during
Acceleration

Selects the Stall Prevention method used to prevent excessive
current during acceleration.
0: Disabled - Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The
motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short.
1: General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-02 level,
acceleration stops. Acceleration will continue when the output
current level falls below the L3-02 level.

L3-02

Stall Prevention
Level during
Acceleration

Used when L3-01 = 1.
100% is equal to the drive rated current.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs withdefault setting.

Parameter List

L2: Momentary Power Loss
Use L2 parameters to configure drive functions for momentary power loss conditions.

B

0, 1
<1>

1

O

48F

109

0 to 150
<4>

<2>
<4>

O

490

110

189

B.2  Parameter Table
Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

Stall Prevention
Selection during
Deceleration

When using a braking resistor, use setting "0".
0: Disabled - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate.
If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short, an ov
fault may occur.
1: General Purpose - The drive decelerates at the active deceleration
rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the Stall
Prevention level, deceleration will stop. Deceleration will continue
once the DC bus level drops below the Stall Prevention level.
4: Overexcitation Deceleration - Decelerates with the flux level
determined by n3-13 (Overexcitation Gain).

0, 1, 4

1

S

492

110

L3-05

Stall Prevention
Selection during
Run

Selects the Stall Prevention method to use to prevent drive faults
during run.
0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause
the drive to trip on an oC or oL fault.
1: Decel Time 1 - The drive will decelerate at Decel Time 1 (C1-02)
if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-06. Once thecurrent level drops below the L3-06 level, the drive will accelerateback to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate.
2: Decel Time 2 - Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at
Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
When output frequency is 6 Hz or less, Stall Prevention during run
is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05.

0 to 2

1

O

493

110

L3-06

Stall Prevention
Level during Run

Enabled when L3-05 is set to "1" or "2". 100% is equal to the drive
rated current.
Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs withthe default settings.
Upper level is determined by C6-01 and L8-38.

30 to 150
<4>

<2>
<4>

O

494

110

No.

L3-04

L4: Frequency Detection
Use L4 parameters to configure frequency detection operation.
L4-01

Speed Agreement
Detection Level

These parameters configure the multi-function output (H2- 01 = 2,4, 5) settings "Speed Agree 1", "Frequency Detection 1," and"Frequency detection 2".

0.0 to400.0

0.0 Hz

O

499

111

L4-07

Speed Agreement
Detection
Selection

0: No detection during baseblock.
1: Detection always enabled.

0, 1

0

O

470

111

0 to 10

0

O

49E

112

0 to 4

0

O

4A1

113

L5: Fault Reset
Use L5 parameters to configure Automatic Restart after fault.

L5-01

Number of Auto
Restart Attempts

Sets the counter for the number of times the drive attempts to restartwhen one of the following faults occurs: oC, oH1, ov, PF, rH, oL1,
oL2, oL3, Uv1.
When the drive operates without fault for 10 minutes, the counter
will be reset.
L6: Overtorque Detection
Use L6 parameters to configure overtorque detection.

L6-01

Torque Detection
Selection 1

Selects the overtorque operation. Overtorque is determined by thesettings in parameters L6-02 and L6-03. The multi-function output
settings (H2- 01= B and 17) are also active if programmed.
0: Disabled
1: oL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (overtorque detection only active
during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection).
2: oL3 at RUN - Alarm (overtorque detection is always active andoperation continues after detection).
3: oL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (overtorque detection only active
during Speed Agree and drive output will shut down on an oL3
fault).
4: oL3 at RUN - Fault (overtorque detection is always active anddrive output will shut down on an oL3 fault).

L6-02

Torque Detection
Level 1

Sets the overtorque detection level. 100% is equal to the motor rated
current.

0 to 300

150%

O

4A2

113

L6-03

Torque Detection
Time 1

Sets the length of time an overtorque condition must exist before
Torque Detection is triggered.

0.0 to 10.0

0.1 s

O

4A3

113

0, 1

0

O

4B1

114

0, 1

0

O

4B6

114

L8: Hardware Protection
Use L8 parameters to configure hardware protection functions.

190

L8-05

Input Phase Loss
Protection
Selection

L8-10

Heatsink Cooling
Fan Operation
Selection

Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power
supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic capacitor
deterioration.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Note: This parameter is disabled in 200 V single-phase drives.
Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation.
0: Run with timer (Fan operates only during run and for 60 seconds
after stop.)
1: Run always (Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is poweredup.)B.2  Parameter Table
Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

Ambient
Temperature
Setting

Used to input the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the driveoL2 detection level.

-10 to 50

30 °C

O

4B8

114

L8-18

Soft Current Limit
Selection

Selects the software current limit function. Typically no adjustment
is required.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0, 1

1

O

4BE

114

L8-35
<3>

Installation
Method Selection

Selects the installation type:
0: IP20/IP00 Drive
1: Side-by-Side Mounting

0 to 1

0

O

4EC

115

0 to 1

1

O

4EF

115

No.

Name

L8-12

L8-38

Carrier Frequency
Reduction

Provides protection to the IGBTs by reducing the carrier frequency
at low speeds.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled below 6 Hz
2: Enabled for the whole speed range
Current
ND
HD
200 V Single Phase
80% of HD
400 V: 60% of HD
0

C6-02
Carrier Frequency
2

10 (8)

15<1> When enabled, the drive stops accelerating when it exceeds the value of L3-02, Stall Prevention Level. The drive decelerates after 100 ms
and begins accelerating again after restoring the current level.
<2> Default setting value is 120% when C6-01 is set to 1 (ND) and 150% when C6-01 is set to 0 (HD).
<3> This parameter is not reset to the default value when the drive is reinitialized using A1-03.
<4> The default setting and the upper limit of the setting range are determined by C6-01, Drive Duty Mode, and L8-38, Carrier Frequency
Reduction Selection.

◆ n: Advanced Performance Set-Up
The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

1.00

O

581

116

1.10

O

531

116

n1: Hunting Prevention
Use n1 parameters to configure hunting prevention operation.
n1-02

HuntingPrevention Gain
Setting

Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, increase the gain by 0.1
until vibration ceases.
If the motor stalls, decrease the gain by 0.1 until the stalling ceases.

0.00 to
2.50

n3-13

Overexcitation
Deceleration Gain

Applies a gain to the V/f pattern during deceleration (L3-04 = 4).
Returns to normal values after ramp to stop or at re-acceleration.
To increase the braking power of overexcitation, increase the gain
by 1.25 to 1.30.

1.00 to1.40

Parameter List

n3: Overexcitation Braking
Use n3 parameters to configure the overexcitation braking function.

B

191

B.2  Parameter Table◆ o: Operator Related Parameterso parameters are used to set up the LED digital operator displays.
No.

Name

Description

Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

o1: Display Settings
Use o1 parameters to configure the digital operator display.
o1-02
<1>

User Monitor
Selection After
Power Up

Selects the information displayed when power is applied.
1: Frequency Reference (U1-01)
2: Forward/Reverse
3: Output Frequency (U1-02)
4: Output Current (U1-03)

1 to 4

1

O

501

117

o1-03

Digital Operator
Display Selection

Sets the units to display the frequency reference and output
frequency.
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04)

0, 1

0

O

502

117

o2: Operator Keypad Functions
Use o2 parameters to configure LED digital operator key functions.

o2-02

STOP Key
Function
Selection

Determines if the STOP key on the digital operator will stop thedrive when operating from the external terminals or via serial
communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

0, 1

1

O

506

117

o2-04

Drive Model
Selection

Sets the drive model.
This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new control
board. Do not change for other reason.

0 to FFdep. on
drive
spec.

O

508

117

o2-05

Frequency
Reference Setting
Method Selection

Selects if the ENTER key must be pressed when inputting thefrequency reference by the operator keypad.
0: Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a frequency reference.
1: Data/Enter key is not required.
The output frequency changes immediately when the reference ischanged by the UP or DOWN keys on the digital operator. The
ENTER key does not need to be pressed.
Note: When o2-05 is set to 1, the power supply to the drive mustremain on for at least 5 seconds after making changes to thefrequency reference.

0, 1

0

O

509

118

o2-06

Operation
Selection when
Digital Operator is
Disconnected

Sets drive action when the digital operator is removed in LOCAL
mode or with b1-02 = 0 (valid for optional remote operator only).
0: The drive will continue operation
1: The drive will trigger a fault (oPr) and the motor will coast to
stop

0, 1

0

O

50A

118

o2-09

–

Factory use.

–

–

–

–

–

o3: Copy Function
Use o3 parameters to Read, Copy and Verify the parameter settings to and from the drive.

o3-01

Copy Function
Selection

0: Copy select1: INV → OP READ (Read parameters from the drive, saving them
onto the digital operator.)
2: OP → INV WRITE (Copy parameters from the digital operator,
writing them to the drive.)
3: OP → INV VERIFY (Verify parameter settings on the drive tocheck if they match the data saved on the operator.)
To read the drive parameter settings into the digital operator, set
o3-02 to 1 (to allow reading).

o3-02

Copy Allowed
Selection

Locks the READ operation to prevent accidental overwriting of thedata stored in the LED operator.
0: READ operation prohibited
1: READ operation allowed

0 to 3

0

O

515

118

0, 1

0

O

516

118

0 to 9999

0

O

50B

120

0, 1

0

O

50C

120

o4: Maintenance Period
Use o4 parameters to perform maintenance.

192

o4-01

Accumulated
Operation Time
Setting

Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the drive inunits of 10 h.

o4-02

Accumulated
Operation Time
Selection

Determines, how the cumulative operation time (U4-01) is counted.
0: Logs power-on time
1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output
operation time).

o4-03

Cooling Fan
Operation Time
Setting

Sets the value of the fan operation time in units of 10 h.

0 to 9999

0

O

50E

120

o4-05

Capacitor
Maintenance
Setting

Sets the value of the capacitor maintenance time monitor U4-05.

0 to 150

0%

O

51D

120

B.2  Parameter Table
Range

Def.

Mode

Addr.
Hex

Pg.

Sets the value of the Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenancemonitor U4-06.

0 to 150

0%

O

523

120

IGBT
Maintenance
Setting

Sets the value of the IGBT Maintenance monitor U4-07.

0 to 150

0%

O

525

120

U2 Initialization

0: U2-oo monitor data are not reset when the drive is initializedusing A1-03.
1: U2-oo monitor data are reset when the drive is initialized using
A1-03. (The value of o4-11 is automatically returned to 0.)

0, 1

0

O

510

121

No.

Name

o4-07

DC Bus PreCharge Relay
Maintenance
Setting

o4-09

o4-11

Description<1> Parameter can be changed during run.

◆ U: Monitors
Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other information about drive
operation.
No.

Name

Description

Analog Output
Level

Unit

Mode

Addr.
Hex

U1: Operation Status Monitors
Use U1 monitors to display the operation status of the drive.
U1-01

Frequency
Reference

Monitors the frequency reference

10 V: Max frequency

0.01 Hz

O

40

U1-02

OutputFrequency

Displays the output frequency. Display units are determinedby o1-03.

10 V: Max frequency

0.01 Hz

O

41

U1-03

Output Current

Displays the output current.

10 V: Drive rated current

0.01 A
<1>

O

42

U1-06

Output Voltage
Reference

Displays the output voltage.

10 V: 200 Vrms
(400 Vrms)

0.1 V

O

45

U1-07

DC Bus Voltage

Displays the DC bus voltage.

10 V: 400 V (800 V)

1V

O

46

No output signal
available

–

O

49

No output signal
available

–

O

4A

10 V/20 mA: 100%

0.1%

O

4E

Displays the input terminal status.
Digital input terminal
S1 enabled

U1-10

Digital input terminal
S2 enabled

Input Terminal
StatusDigital input terminal
S3 enabled
Digital input terminal
S4 enabled
Digital input terminal
S5 enabled

U1-11

Output Terminal
StatusU1-13

Terminal Input
Level

Multi-Function
Digital Output (fault)(terminal MA/MB-MC)

Displays analog input A1 level: 100% when input is 10 V or 20
mA.
Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error.
CRC Error

U1-19

B

Data Length Error

MEMOBUS/
Modbus Error
Code

Not Used
Parity Error

No output signal
available

–

O

66

No signal output avail.

–

O

4D

Overrun Error
Framing Error
Timed Out
Not Used

U1-25

Software No.
(ROM)

ROM ID

Parameter List

Displays the output terminal status.

193B.2  Parameter Table
No.

Name

U1-26

Software No.
(Flash)Description
Flash ID

Analog Output
Level

Unit

Mode

Addr.
Hex

No signal output avail.

–

O

5B

U2: Fault History
Use U2 monitors to view fault history data.
U2-01

Current Fault

Displays the current fault.

No signal output avail.

–

O

80

U2-02

Previous Fault

Displays the previous fault. o4-11 resets the values for U2-02

No signal output avail.

–

O

81

U4: Maintenance Monitors
Use U4 monitors to display drive maintenance information.

U4-01
<3>

Accumulated
Operation Time

Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The
value for the cumulative operation time counter can be resetin parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to determine if theoperation time should start as soon as the power is switchedon or only while the run command is present. The maximum
number displayed is 99999, after which the value is reset to
0.

U4-04

Cooling Fan
MaintenanceDisplays main cooling fan usage time as a percentage of the
expected performance life. Parameter o4-03 can be used toreset this monitor.

No signal output avail.

1%

O

7E

U4-05
<2>

Capacitor
MaintenanceDisplays main circuit capacitor usage time as a percentageof the expected performance life. Parameter o4-05 can beused to reset this monitor.

No signal output avail.

1%

O

7C

U4-06
<2>

Soft Charge
Bypass Relay
MaintenanceDisplays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as apercentage of the estimated product life. Parameter o4-07
can be used to reset this monitor.

No signal output avail.

1%

O

7D6

U4-07
<2>

IGBT
MaintenanceDisplays IGBT usage time as a percentage of expected
performance life. Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset thismonitor.

No signal output avail.

1%

O

7D7

U4-08

Heatsink
Temperature

Displays the heatsink temperature.

10 V: 100 °C

1 °C

O

68

U4-09

LED Check

Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is
working properly.

No signal output avail.

–

O

3C

U4-13

Peak Hold Current

Displays the peak hold current during run.

No signal output avail.

0.01 A<1>

O

7CF

No signal output avail.

1h

O

4C

<1> U1-03 and U4-13 display monitor contents in amp units. When reading the value of these monitors via MEMOBUS/Modbus, a value of8192 is equal to 100% of the drive rated output current.
<2> When this value reaches 100%, the maintenance period has been reached for the component in question and the drive is at risk offaulting out due to component failure. Periodically check the maintenance monitors to avoid this situation.
<3> MEMOBUS/Modbus communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register 0099H.

194

B.3  Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD

B.3 Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD
Table B.3  Single-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD Settings
No.

Description

Unit

Default Settings−

Model SF520S

−

A20

o2-04

Drive Model Selection

Hex

31

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

A40
32

HD

ND

HD

0

1

0

ND
1

0.25

0.37

0.55

0.75

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

2

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

1.50

2.05

2.30

3.43

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.56

3.65

1.62

3.57

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

1.28

1.71

1.96

1.85

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistanceΩ

10.84510.845

7.075

7.075

−

Momentary power loss ride-through time

s

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

−

Mom. power loss Baseblock time

s

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

No.

Description

Unit

Default Settings−

Model SF520S

−

A75

o2-04

Drive Model Selection

Hex

33

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

1A5
34

HD

ND

HD

0

1

0

ND
1

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

2

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

3.90

4.86

6.60

8.90

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.40

2.95

1.97

3.21

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

2.90

2.36

3.66

3.45

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistance

Ω

2.933

3.849

1.706

1.706

−

Momentary power loss ride-through time

s

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

−

Momentary power loss Baseblock time

s

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.5

Table B.4  Three-Phase, 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD settings
Description

Unit

Default Settings−

Model SF5202

−

A10

A20

A40

A75

o2-04

Drive Model Selection−

96 (60H)

97 (61H)

98 (62H)

99 (63H)

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

HD

ND

HD

ND

HD

ND

HD

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

ND
1

0.1

0.18

0.25

0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.1

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

2

7

2

7

2

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

0.83

1.09

1.50

2.05

2.30

3.43

3.90

4.86

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.36

3.12

1.56

3.65

1.62

3.57

1.40

2.95

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

0.75

0.72

1.28

1.71

1.96

1.85

2.90

2.36

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistanceΩ

24.80524.80510.84510.845

7.075

7.075

2.933

3.849

−

Momentary power loss ride-through
time

s

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

−

Momentary power loss Baseblock
time

s

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.4

Parameter List

No.

B

195

B.3  Defaults by Drive Model and Duty Rating ND/HD
No.

Description

Unit

−

Model SF5202−

1A5

Default Settings
2A2

o2-04

Drive Model Selection−

101 (65H)

102 (66H)

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

HD

ND

HD

ND

0

1

0

1

1.5

2.2

2.2

3.0

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

3

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

6.60

8.90

9.30

11.90

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.97

3.21

1.27

2.50

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

3.66

3.45

5.11

3.88

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistance

Ω

1.706

1.706

0.804

1.150

−

Momentary power loss ride-through
time

s

0.3

0.3

0.5

0.5

−

Momentary power loss Baseblock
time

s

0.4

0.5

0.5

0.5

Table B.5  Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity and ND/HD Setting

196

No.

Description

Unit

−

Model SF5204

−

A20

A40

A75

o2-04

Drive Model Selection

−

91

92

93

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

Default Settings

HD

ND

HD

ND

HD

1A5
94
ND

HD

ND

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0.37

0.37

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

1.5

2.2

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

2

7

2

7

2

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

0.74

1.04

1.20

1.72

1.90

3.14

3.30

4.45

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.50

3.54

1.62

3.57

1.40

3.25

1.97

3.21

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

0.660

0.634

0.980

0.925

1.45

1.40

1.83

1.73

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistanceΩ

47.91447.91428.30128.30111.73411.714

6.823

6.823

−

Momentary power loss ride-through
time

s

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

−

Momentary power loss Baseblock
time

s

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.5

No.

Description

Unit

Default Settings−

Model SF5204

−

2A2

o2-04

Drive Model Selection

−

C6-01

Normal/Heavy Duty−−

Motor rated power

kW

95
HD

ND

0

1

2.2

3.0

C6-02

Carrier frequency

−

2

7

E2-01

Motor rated current

A

4.70

5.93

E2-02

Motor rated slip

Hz

1.27

2.50

E2-03

Motor no-load current

A

2.56

1.94

E2-05

Motor line-to-line resistance

Ω

3.218

4.598

−

Momentary power loss ride-through time

s

0.5

0.5

−

Momentary power loss Baseblock time

s

0.5

0.5

Appendix: C
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications

C.1 SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................. 198
C.2 MEMOBUS/MODBUS CONFIGURATION............................................................. 199
C.3 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................. 200
C.4 CONNECTING TO A NETWORK............................................................................ 201
C.5 MEMOBUS/MODBUS SETUP PARAMETERS....................................................... 204
C.6 DRIVE OPERATIONS BY MEMOBUS/MODBUS................................................... 206
C.7 COMMUNICATIONS TIMING................................................................................ 207
C.8 MESSAGE FORMAT.............................................................................................. 208
C.9 MESSAGE EXAMPLES........................................................................................... 210
C.10 MEMOBUS/MODBUS DATA TABLE...................................................................... 212
C.11 CHANGING DRIVE PARAMETERS........................................................................ 219
C.12 COMMUNICATION ERRORS................................................................................. 220
C.13 SELF-DIAGNOSTICS............................................................................................. 221

197C.1  Section Safety

C.1 Section Safety
DANGER

Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To
prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level toconfirm safe level.

WARNING
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before
beginning work on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Maintenance, inspection and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar withinstallation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment.
The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will
extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all
indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.

Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.

CAUTION

Crush Hazard
Do not carry the drive by the front cover.
Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.

NOTICE
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting anyother devices.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

198

C.2  MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration

C.2 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration
Drives can be controlled from a PLC or other master device via serial communications after installing the interface
for MEMOBUS/Modbus communication (SI-485/J-H).
MEMOBUS/Modbus communication can be configured using one master (PLC) and a maximum of 255 slaves. The
drive has slave functionality only, meaning that serial communication is normally initiated from the master andresponded to by the slaves.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. The address or node for each slave
must be set beforehand so that the master can communicate with the slave at that address. A slave that receives acommand from the master will perform the specified function and then send a response back to the master.
Master (PLC or other)

DRIVE

DRIVE

DRIVE

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Figure C.1  Connecting Multiple Drives to a PLC

C

199

C.3  Communication Specifications

C.3 Communication Specifications
MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications appear in the following table:
Item
InterfaceCommunications Cycle

Communication
Parameters

ProtocolMax Number of Slaves

200

Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communication Speeds
Available

1.2; 2.4; 4.8; 9.6; 19.2; 38.4 kbps

Data length
8 bit (fixed)
ParitySelect even, odd, or none
Stop bit
1 bit (fixed)
MEMOBUS/Modbus (using RTU mode only)
255 drives (RS-485)

C.4  Connecting to a Network

C.4 Connecting to a Network
This section explains the connection of a drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network and the network termination.

◆ Network Cable Connection
Follow the instructions below to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network.
1. With the power shut off, connect the communications cable to the drive and the master. Use the terminals
shown in the figure below for network cable connections.
S– S+ IG R– R+

SF-520SS+
IG
RR+

Send (-)
Send (+)
Shield Ground
Receive (-)
Receive (+)

Figure C.2  Serial Communications Cable Connection Terminals
Note: Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables. Use shielded cables forthe communications cables, and properly shielded clamps to prevent problems with noise. When using RS-485 communications,connect S+ to R+, and S- to R- as shown in the diagram below.

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

2. Check or set the terminating resistance at all slaves. Refer to Network Termination for Network Termination
on SI-485/J-H.
3. Switch the power on.
4. Set the parameters needed for serial communications (H5-01 through H5-07, -12, -13) using the LED
operator.
5. Shut the power off and wait until the display on the LED operator goes out completely.
6. Turn the power back on.
7. The drive is now ready to begin communicating with the master.

C

201

C.4  Connecting to a Network◆ Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connections
Figure C.3 and Figure C.4 explain the wiring diagrams for multiple connections using MEMOBUS/Modbus
communication.

■ RS-485 Interface
PLC

R+
R–
IG
S+
S–

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

Drive
S2
OFF ONDrive
S2
OFF ONDrive
S2
OFF ON

Figure C.3  RS-485 Interface
Note: 1. Turn on the DIP switch at the SI-485/J-H that is located at the end of the network. Turn it off at all other slaves.
2. Set H5-07 to “1” when using the RS-485 interface.

■ RS-422 Interface
PLC

S+
S–
IG
R+
R–

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

R+
R–
S+
S–
IG

Drive
S2
OFF ONDrive
S2
OFF ONDrive
S2
OFF ON

Figure C.4  RS-422 Interface
Note: 1. Turn on the DIP switch at the SI-485/J-H that is located at the end of the network. Turn it off at all other slaves.
2. Set H5-07 to “0” when using the RS-422 interface.

202C.4  Connecting to a Network◆ Network Termination
The two ends of the MEMOBUS/Modbus network line have to be terminated. The Interface for MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communication (SI-485/J-H) has a built in terminating resistance that can be enabled or disabled using DIP switch
S2. If a drive is located at the end of a network line, enable the terminating resistance by setting DIP switch S2 to the
ON position. Disable the terminating resistance on all slaves that are not located at the network line end. Figure C.5
llustrates the setting of DIP switch S2.
+S+
DIP switch S2(in the ON position)
OFF

ON

-

SRS-422or
RS-485R+

R-

DIP
switchS2terminal resistance (1/2 W, 120)

Figure C.5  Serial Communications Terminal and DIP Switch S2

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

SF-520C

203

C.5  MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters

C.5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication
This section describes parameters necessary to set up MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.

■ H5-01: Drive Slave Address
Sets the drive slave address used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Note: After changing this parameter, the power must be cycled to enable the new setting.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-01

Drive Slave Address

0 to FF <1>

1F<1> If the address is set to 0, no response will be provided during communications.

For serial communications to work, each individual slave drive must be assigned a unique slave address. Setting H501 to any value besides 0 assigns the drive its address in the network. Slave address don't need to be assigned insequential order, but each address needs to be unique so that no two drives have the same address.

■ H5-02: Communication Speed Selection
Sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications speed.
Note: After changing this parameter, the power must be cycled to enable the new setting.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-02

Communication Speed Selection

0 to 53

H5-02Communication Speed

01200 bps

1

2400 bps24800 bps

39600 bps

4

19200 bps

538400 bps

■ H5-03: Communication Parity Selection
Sets the parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Note: After changing this parameter, the power must be cycled to enable the new setting.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-03

Communication Parity Selection

0 to 20

Setting 0: No Parity
Setting 1: Even Parity
Setting 2: Odd Parity■ H5-04: Stopping Method after Communication Error
Selects the stopping method after a communications error (CE) has occurred.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-04

Stopping Method after Communication Error

0 to 3

3

Setting 0: Ramp to Stop Using Current Accel/Decel Time
Setting 1: Coast to Stop
Setting 2: Fast-stop Using C1-09
Setting 3: Alarm Only, Continue Operation

204C.5  MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters■ H5-05: Communication Fault Detection Selection
Enables or disabled the communication error (CE) detection for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-05

Communication Fault Detection Selection

0 or 11

Setting 0: Disabled
No error detection. The drive continues operation.
Setting 1: Enabled
If the drive does not receive data from the master for longer than 2 s, then a CE fault will be triggered and the drive
will operate as determined by parameter H5-04.

■ H5-06: Drive Transmit Wait Time
Sets the time the drive waits after receiving data from a master until responding data.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-06

Drive Transmit Wait Time

5 to 65 ms

10 ms

PLC→Drive

Drive→PLC

PLC→Drive

Command message

Response message

Command message

24 bit lengthTime

H5-06 setting

Figure C.6  Drive Transmit Wait Time Setting■ H5-07: RTS Control Selection
Enables or disables RTS control.
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-07

RTS Control Selection

0 or 11

Setting 0: Disabled - RTS is Always ON
Use this setting with point-to-point or multi-drop RS-422 communications.
Setting 1: Enabled - RTS Switches while Sending
Use this setting when using RS-485 signals for communications or when using the RS-422 signals for point-to-point
communications.

■ H5-12: Run Command Method Selection

No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-12

Run Command Method Selection

0 or 10

Setting 0: FWD/Stop, REV/Stop
Bit 0 of MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0001H will start and stop the drive in the forward direction. Bit 1 will start andstop the drive in reverse.
Setting 1: Run/Stop, FWD/REV
Bit 0 of MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0001H will start and stop the drive. Bit 1 changes the direction.

■ H5-13 MEMOBUS Frequency Reference and Frequency Monitor Unit
No.

Name

Setting Range

Default

H5-13

MEMOBUS Frequency Reference and Frequency Monitor Unit

0 to 30

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Selects the type of sequence used when the Run command source is set to MEMOBUS/Modbus communications(b1-02 = 2).

C

Setting 0: 0.1Hz / 1
Setting 1: o1-03 Based
Setting 2: 100% / 30000
Setting 3: 0.1% / 1
205C.6  Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus

C.6 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus
The drive operations that can be performed by MEMOBUS/Modbus communication depend on drive parametersettings. This section explains the functions that can be used and related parameter settings.

◆ Observing the Drive Operation
A PLC can perform the following actions with MEMOBUS/Modbus communications at any time regardless ofparameter settings (except H5-oo).
• Observe drive status and drive control terminal status from a PLC.
• Read and write parameters.
• Set and reset faults.
• Set multi-function inputs. Inputs settings from the input terminals So and from MEMOBUS/Modbus
communications are both linked by an OR operation.

◆ Controlling the Drive
To start and stop the drive or set the frequency reference using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, an externalreference must be selected and the parameters listed below must be adjusted accordingly.
Table C.1  Setting Parameters for Drive Control from MEMOBUS/Modbus
Parameter

Name

Required Setting

b1-01

Frequency Reference Selection

2

b1-02

Run Command Selection

2

Refer to b1-01: Frequency Reference Selection on page 75 and Refer to b1-02: Run Command Selection on page
76 for details on external reference parameter selections.

206

C.7  Communications Timing

C.7 Communications Timing
To prevent overrun in the slave drive, the master should wait a certain time between sending messages to the same
drive. In the same way, the slave drive must wait before sending response messages to prevent an overrun in themaster. This section explains the message timing.

◆ Command Messages from Master to Drive
In order to prevent overrun and data loss, the master must wait between receiving a response and sending the same
type of command as before to the same slave drive. The minimum wait time depends on the command as shown in
the table below.
Table C.2  Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages
Command Type

ExampleMinimum Wait Time

• Control command (Run, Stop)1• Set inputs/outputs

10 ms• Read monitors and parameter values
2• Write parameters

50 ms <1>

3

• Save changes using an Enter command

3 to 5 s <1><1> If the drive receives command type 1 data during the minimum wait time, it will perform the command and then respond. However, if it
receives a command type 2 or 3 during that time, either a communication error will result or the command will be ignored.
PLC→Drive

Drive→PLC

PLC→Drive

Command message

Response message

Command message

24 bit length

Time

Master Send
Wait Time

Figure C.7   Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages

A timer should be set in the master to check how long it takes for the slave drive(s) to respond to the master. If noresponse is received within a certain amount of time, the master should try resending the message.

◆ Response Messages from Drive to Master
If the drive receives a command from the master, it will process the data received and wait for the time set in H5-06
until it responds. Increase H5-06 if the drive response causes overrun in the master.
PLC→Drive

Drive→PLC

PLC→Drive

Command message

Response message

Command message

24 bit length

Time

H5-06
setting

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Figure C.8  Minimum Response Wait TimeC207

C.8  Message Format

C.8 Message Format◆ Message Content
In MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The
message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets
depends on the command (function) content.
SLAVE ADDRESSFUNCTION CODEDATAERROR CHECK◆ Slave Address
The slave address in the message defines the note the message is sent to. Use addresses between 0 and FFH. If a
message with slave address 0 is sent (broadcast), the command from the master will be received by all slaves. The
slaves do not provide a response to a broadcast type message.

◆ Function CodeThe three types of function codes are shown in the table below.
Data Length (bytes)
Function﻿
CodeFunction Name

Command Message

Response Message

Minimum

Maximum

Minimum

Maximum

03H

Read MEMOBUS/Modbus registers

8

8

7

37

08H

Loopback test

8

8

8

8

10H

Write to multiple MEMOBUS/Modbus registers

11

41

8

8

◆ DataConfigure consecutive data by combining the MEMOBUS/Modbus register address (test code in case of a loopbacktest) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
A drive MEMOBUS/Modbus register always has a data length of two bytes. Therefore data written into drive registers
must also always have a length of two bytes. Register data read out from the drive will always consist of two bytes.

◆ Error Check
The drive uses a CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method) for checking data validity. Use the proceduredescribed below when calculating the CRC-16 checksum for command data or when verifying response data.

◆ Command Data
When the drive receives data, it calculates the CRC-16 checksum from the data and compares it to the CRC-16 value
received within the message. Both must match before a command is processed.
An initial value of FFFFH (i.e., all 16 bits equal 1) must be used for CRC-16 calculations for the MEMOBUS/Modbus
protocol.
Calculate the CRC-16 checksum using the following steps:• The starting value is FFFFH.
• Perform an XOR operation of this value and the slave address.
• Right shift the result.
• When the overflow bit of the shift operation becomes 1, perform an XOR operation of the result from step 3 above
and the fix value A001H.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 until eight shift operations have been performed.
• After eight shift operations, perform an XOR operation with the result and the next data in the message (function
code, register address, data). Continue with steps 3 to 5 until the last data has been processed.
• The result of the last shift or XOR operation is the checksum.

208

C.8  Message Format
The example in Table C.3 shows the CRC-16 calculation of the slave address 02H and the function code 03H, yielding
the result D140H.
Note: This example does not show the calculation for a complete MEMOBUS/Modbus command. Normally data would follow in thecalculation.
Table C.3  CRC-16 Checksum Calculation Example
Description

Calculation

Description

Calculation

Initial Value (FFFFH)

1111 1111 1111 1111

Overflow

Function Code 03H

0000 0000 0000 0011

Address 02H

0000 0000 0000 0010

XOR w result

1000 0001 0011 1101

XOR w initial value

1111 1111 1111 1101

Shift 10111 1111 1111 1110

XOR w A001HXOR result

Shift 10100 0000 1001 1110

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1110 0000 1001 1111

1101 1111 1111 1111

Shift 20111 0000 0100 1111

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1101 0000 0100 1110

1

1

Overflow1

1

Shift 20110 1111 1111 1111

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1100 1111 1111 1110

Shift 30110 1000 0010 0111

0

Shift 30110 0111 1111 1111

0

Shift 40011 0100 0001 0011

01

Shift 40011 0011 1111 1111

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1001 0100 0001 0010

XOR result

1001 0011 1111 1110

Shift 50100 1010 0000 10010

Shift 50100 1001 1111 1111

0

Shift 60010 0101 0000 0100

1

Shift 60010 0100 1111 1111

1

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1000 0101 0000 0101

XOR result

1000 0100 1111 1110

Shift 70100 0010 1000 0010

Shift 70100 0010 0111 1111

0

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

Shift 80010 0001 0011 1111

1

XOR result

1110 0010 1000 0011

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

Shift 80111 0001 0100 0001

XOR result

1000 0001 0011 1110

XOR w A001H

1010 0000 0000 0001

XOR result

1101 0001 0100 0000

1

11101 0001 0100 0000
Perform operations with next data (function code)

CRC-16D 1
4 0(Lower) (Upper)
Continue from here with next data.

■ Response Data

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

To be sure that the data is valid, perform a CRC-16 calculation on the response message data as described above.
Compare the result to the CRC-16 checksum that was received within the response message. Both should match.

C209

C.9  Message Examples

C.9 Message Examples
Below are some examples of command and response messages.

◆ Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents
Using the function code 03H (Read), a maximum of 16 MEMOBUS/Modbus registers can be read out at a time.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, andfrequency references from the slave 2 drive.
Command Message

Response Message (normal)

Response Message (fault)

Slave Address

02H

Slave Address

02H

Slave Address

02H

Function Code

03H

Function Code

03H

Function Code

83H

Upper

00H

Data Quantity

08H

Error Code

Lower

20H

Upper

00H

Lower

04H

Upper

45H

Lower

F0H

Starting No.
Data Quantity
CRC-16

1st storage
register

Upper

00H

Lower

65H

Next storage
register

Upper

00H

Lower

00H

Next storage
register

Upper

00H

Lower

00H

Next storage
register

Upper

01H

Lower

F4H

Upper

AFH

Lower

82H

CRC-1603H

CRC-16

Upper

F1H

Lower

31H

◆ Loopback Test
Function code 08H performs a loopback test. This test returns a response message with exactly the same content as
the command message and can be used to check the communications between the master and slave. User-definedtest code and data values can be set
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 drive.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16210

Response Message (normal)

01H

Slave Address

08H

Function Code

Upper

00H

Lower

00H

Upper

A5H

Lower

37H

Upper

DAH

Lower

8DH

Test Code
Data
CRC-16

Response Message (fault)

01H

Slave Address

01H

08H

Function Code

89H

Upper

00H

Error Code

01H

Lower

00H

Upper

A5H

Lower

37H

Upper

DAH

Lower

8DH

CRC-16

Upper

86H

Lower

50H

C.9  Message Examples◆ Writing to Multiple Registers
Function code 10h allows the user to write multiple drive MEMOBUS/Modbus registers with one message. This
process works similar to reading registers, i.e., the address of the first register that is to be written and the data
quantity must be set in the command message. The data to be written must be consecutive so that the register
addresses are in order, starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be highbyte, then lower byte.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency
reference of 60.00 Hz for the slave 1 drive.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function CodeStarting No.
Data Quantity

Starting No.
Next Data
CRC-16

Slave Address

10H

Function Code

Upper

00H

Lower

01H

Upper

00H

Lower

02H

Number of Bytes

Response Message (normal)

01H

04H
Upper

00H

Lower

01H

Upper

17H

Lower

70H

Upper

6DH

Lower

67H

Starting No.
Data Quantity
CRC-16

Response Message (fault)

01H

Slave Address

01H

10H

Function Code

90H

Upper

00H

Error Code

02H

Lower

01H

Upper

00H

Lower

02H

Upper

10H

Lower

08H

CRC-16

Upper

CDH

Lower

C1H

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Note: For the number of bytes in the command message, take double the number of the data quantity.

C211

C.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table

C.10 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Table below lists all MEMOBUS/Modbus data. There are three types of data: command data, monitor data, andbroadcast data.

◆ Command Data
It is possible to both read and write command data.
Note: Bits that are not used should be set to 0. Refrain from writing to reserved registers.
Register No.
0000H

Contents
Reserved
Operation Signals and Multi-function Inputs

0001H

0002H
0003H-0006H

bit 0

H5-12 = 0: Forward Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Forward Run)
H5-12 = 1: Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Run)bit 1

H5-12 = 0: Reverse Run Command (0 = Stop, 1 = Reverse Run)
H5-12 = 1: Forward/Reverse (0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse)

bit 2External Fault (EF0)

bit 3

Fault Reset

bit 4

Multi-Function Input 1
Function is ComRef when H1-01 = 40 (Forward/Stop).
Note: When the bit at ComRef is turned on, commands from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications takecontrol of the frequency.

bit 5

Multi-Function Input 2
Function is ComCtrl when H1-02 = 41 (Reverse/Stop).

bit 6

Multi-Function Input 3

bit 7

Multi-Function Input 4

bit 8Multi-Function Input 5

bit 9 to F

Reserved

Frequency Reference

Units are determined by parameter H5-13 (MEMOBUS frequency reference and frequency monitor unit).

Reserved

0007H

Analog Output Terminal AM Setting (10 V / 4000 H)

0008H

Reserved
Settings for Multi-Function Digital Outputs

0009H
000AH-000EH

bit 0

Contact Output (terminal MA-MB-MC)

bit 1 to F

Reserved

Reserved
Control Selection Setting

000FH

212

bit 0 to B

Reserved

bit C

Terminal S5 input enabled (enabled when bit C of register 000FH switches ON)

bit D to F

ReservedC.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table◆ Monitor Data
Monitor data can be read only.
Register No.

Contents
Drive Status 1

0020H

bit 0

During Run

bit 1

During Reverse

bit 2

Drive Ready

bit 3

Fault

bit 4

Data Setting Error

bit 5

Multi-Function Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 6 to bit D

Reserved

bit E

When ComRef has been enabled

bit F

When ComCtrl has been enabled

Fault Contents 1

0021H

bit 0

Overcurrent (oC)

bit 1

Overvoltage (ov)

bit 2

Drive Overload (oL2)

bit 3Overheat 1 (oH1)

bit 4

Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)bit 5, 6

Reserved

bit 7

EF0 to 5: External Fault

bit 8

CPFoo: Hardware Fault (includes oFx)

bit 9

Motor Overload (oL1), Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)

bit A

Reserved

bit B

Main Circuit Undervoltage (Uv)

bit C

Undervoltage (Uv1), Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3)

bit D

Output Phase Loss (LF), Input Phase Loss (PF)bit E

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)bit F

Operator Connection Fault (oPr)

Data Link Status
bit 1
0022H

bit 2

Writing data or switching motors
Reserved

bit 3

Upper or lower limit error

bit 4

Data conformity error

bit 5

Writing to EEPROM

bit 6 to bit F

Reserved

0023H

Frequency Reference, <1>0024H

Output Frequency, <1>0025H

Output Voltage Reference, 0.1 V units

0026H

Output Current

0027H

Reserved

0028H

Reserved

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

bit 0

Fault Contents 20029H

bit 0, 1

Reserved

bit 2

Input Phase Loss (PF)bit 3

Output Phase Loss (LF)

bit 4

Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)bit 5 to bit F

ReservedC213

C.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No.

Contents
Alarm Contents1

002AH

bit 0 to bit 1

Reserved

bit 2

Run Command Input Error (EF)bit 3

Drive Baseblock (bb)bit 4Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)

bit 5

Heatsink Overheat (oH)

bit 6

Overvoltage (ov)bit 7

Undervoltage (Uv)bit 8Reserved

bit 9

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)

bit A to F

Reserved

Input Terminal Status

002BH

bit 0

Terminal S1 Closed

bit 1

Terminal S2 Closed

bit 2

Terminal S3 Closed

bit 3

Terminal S4 Closed

bit 4

Terminal S5 Closed

bit 5 to bit F

Reserved

Drive Status 2

002CH

bit 0

During Run

bit 1

Zero Speed

bit 2

Speed Agree

bit 3

User Speed Agree

bit 4

Frequency Detection 1

bit 5

Frequency Detection 2

bit 6

Drive Readybit 7

During Undervoltage

bit 8

During Baseblock

bit 9

Frequency Reference from Operator Keypad

bit A

Run Command from Operator Keypad

bit B

Overtorque

bit C, DReserved

bit E

Fault

bit F

Communication Timeout

Output Terminal Status
002DH
002EH to 0030H
0031H
0032H to 0033H
0034H
0035H to 003CH

bit 0

Multi-Function Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC)

bit 1 to bit F

Reserved

Reserved
DC Bus Voltage, 1 Vdc units
Reserved
Product Code 1 [ASCII],
Product Type (J0 for J1000)
Reserved
Communications Error Log <2>

003DH

003EH

214

bit 0

CRC Error

bit 1

Data Length Error

bit 2

Reserved

bit 3

Parity Error

bit 4

Overrun Error

bit 5

Framing Error

bit 6

Timeout

bit 7 to bit F

Reserved

ReservedC.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No.
003FH
0040H to 007EH
007FH

Contents
Output Frequency

0.01% units

Used for various monitors U1-oo. Refer to U: Monitors on page 193 for parameter details.
Alarm Code, Refer to Alarm Register Contents on page 218 for alarm codes.

0080H to 0097H

Used for monitors U2-oo. Refer to U: Monitors on page 193 for parameter details and Refer to Fault History Contents on page 217 forregister value descriptions.

0098H, 0099H

U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time)
Example: When U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time) is 12345 hours, then 0098H = 1234 and 0099H = 5.

009AH to 009BH

Reserved

00ABH
00ACH to 00B5H

Drive Rated Current
Reserved

00B6H

Frequency Reference After
Soft-starter

00B7H

Reserved

00B8H

Frequency Reference

00B9H to 00BEH
00BFH

0.01% units

0.01% units

ReservedoPE Error Number
Fault contents 1

00C0H

bit 0

Reserved

bit 1

Undervoltage (Uv1)

bit 2

Reserved

bit 3

Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3)

bit 4, 5Reserved

bit 6

Overcurrent (oC)

bit 7

Overvoltage (ov)bit 8Reserved

bit 9

Heatsink Overheat (oH1)

bit A

Motor Overload (oL1)

bit B

Drive Overload (oL2)

bit C

Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)

bit D, E

Reserved

bit F

Braking Resistor Overheat (rH)

00C1H

bit 0

External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3)

bit 1

External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4)

bit 2External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5)

bit 3 to 9

Reserved

bit A

Input Phase Loss (PF)bit B, C

Reserved

bit D

Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr)

bit E

EEPROM Write Error (Err)bit F

Reserved

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Fault contents 2

Fault contents 3

00C2H

00C3H

bit 0

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)

bit 1 to 5

Reserved

bit 6

External fault (EF0) is detected in RS-422/RS-485 Interface for MEMOBUS/ModbusCommunication

bit 7 to E

Reserved

bit F

Hardware fault (includes oFx)

C

Reserved

215

C.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No.

Contents
Fault contents 500C4H

00C5H to 00C7H

bit 0

Reserved

bit 1

External Fault 1, input terminal S1 (EF1)

bit 2

External Fault 2, input terminal S2 (EF2)

bit 3, 4Reserved

bit 5

Current Offset Fault (CoF)

bit 6 to F

Reserved

Reserved
Alarm contents 2

00C8H

bit 0

Undervoltage (Uv)

bit 1

Overvoltage (ov)bit 2Heatsink Overheat (oH)bit 3Reserved

bit 4

Overtorque 1 (oL3)

bit 5

Reserved

bit 6

Run Commands Input Error (EF)bit 7

Drive Baseblock (bb)bit 8External Fault 3, input terminal S3 (EF3)bit 9External Fault 4, input terminal S4 (EF4)bit A

External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5)bit B to F

Reserved

Alarm contents 3

00C9H

bit 0, 1

Reserved

bit 2

Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr)bit 3

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)bit 4Reserved

bit 5

Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL)

bit 6

Motor Overload (oL1)

bit 7

Drive Overload (oL2)

bit 8 to F

Reserved

Alarm contents 500CBH00CCH-00CFH

bit 0 to 7

Reserved

bit 8External Fault 1 (input terminal S1) (EF1)

bit 9External Fault 2 (input terminal S2) (EF2)

bit A to F

Reserved

Reserved
CPF Contents 1

00D0H

216

bit 0, 1

Reserved

bit 2

A/D Conversion Error (CPF02)

bit 3 to 5

Reserved

bit 6

EEPROM data fault (CPF06)

bit 7

Reserved

bit 8

EEPROM Serial Communications Fault (CPF08)

bit 9 to A

Reserved

bit B

RAM Fault (CPF11)

bit C

FLASH Memory Fault (CPF12)

bit D

Reserved

bit E

Control Circuit Fault (CPF14)

bit F

ReservedC.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No.

Contents
CPF Contents 2

00D1H

00D2H to 00FBH

bit 0

Reserved

bit 1

Timing Fault (CPF17)

bit 2

Control Circuit Fault (CPF18)

bit 3 to 5

Reservedbit 6

A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22)

bit 7

PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23)

bit 8

Drive capacity signal fault (CPF24)

bit 9 to F

Reserved

Reserved<1> Units are determined by parameter H5-13.
<2> The communication error log is stored until the fault is reset.

◆ Broadcast Messages
Data can be written from the master to all slave devices at the same time.
The slave address in a broadcast command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message, but will
not respond.
Register No.

Contents
Digital Input Command

0001H

0002H

bit 0

Forward Run (0: Stop 1: Run)

bit 1

Direction Command (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)

bit 2, 3Reserved

bit 4External Fault

bit 5

Fault Resetbit 6 to B

Reserved

bit C

Multi-Function Digital Input S5 (enabled when bit C of register 000FH is ON)

bit D to F

Reserved

Frequency Reference

30000/100%◆ Fault History Contents
The table below shows the fault codes that can be read out by MEMOBUS/Modbus commands from the U2-oomonitor parameters.
Note: Uv1 fault is not saved to the fault history.
Table C.4  Fault History Register Contents
Fault Name

Fault CodeFault Name

0002H

Undervoltage (Uv1)0042H

External Fault 1, input terminal S1 (EF1)

0004H

Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3)0043H

External Fault 2, input terminal S2 (EF2)0007H

Overcurrent (oC)0046H

Current Offset Fault (CoF)

0008H

Overvoltage (ov)0083H

A/D Conversion Error (CPF02)

000AH

Heatsink Overheat (oH1)0087H

Drive specification mismatch during Terminal Board orControl Board replacement (CPF06)

000BH

Motor Overload (oL1)

0089H

EEPROM Serial Communication Fault (CPF08)

000CH

Drive Overload (oL2)008CH

RAM fault (CPF11)000DH

Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3)008DH

Flash memory circuit exception (CPF12)0010HBraking Resistor Overheat (rH)

008FH

Control Circuit Fault (CPF14)

0011H

External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3)0092H

Timing Fault (CPF17)

0012H

External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4)0093H

Control Circuit Fault (CPF18)

0013H

External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5)0095H

Hardware fault at power up (CPF20)

001BH

Input Phase Loss (PF)0096H

Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21)001CH

Output Phase Loss (LF)

0097H

A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22)

001EH

Digital Operator Connection (oPr)

0098H

PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23)

001FH

EEPROM Write Error (Err)0099H

Drive capacity signal fault (CPF24)MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Fault CodeC217

C.10  MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
0021H

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)0027H

PROFIBUS-DP Option External Fault (EF0)0101H

Option compatibility error (oFA00)◆ Alarm Register Contents
The table below shows the alarm codes that can be read out from MEMOBUS/Modbus register 007FH.
Table C.5  Alarm Register 007FH Contents
Alarm Code218

Fault Name

Alarm CodeFault Name

0001H

Undervoltage (Uv)

000BH

External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5)0002H

Overvoltage (ov)0014H

MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE)

0003H

Heatsink Overheat (oH)0017H

Motor Overload (oL1)0005H

Overtorque 1 (oL3)0018H

Drive Overload (oL2)0007H

Run commands input error (EF)0020H

MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE)

0008H

Drive Baseblock (bb)0039H

External Fault (input terminal S1) (EF1)

0009H

External Fault 3, input terminal S3 (EF3)003AH

External Fault (input terminal S2) (EF2)000AH

External Fault 4, input terminal S4 (EF4)C.11  Changing Drive Parameters

C.11 Changing Drive Parameters
This section describes how the drive handles parameter changes by MEMOBUS/Modbus.

◆ Drive Operations on Parameter Change
When drive parameters are changed by MEMOBUS/Modbus communication, the drive performs the following
operations:• The upper/lower limit of the parameter changed is checked. If the new value is out of range, the old value remains active.
• Parameter settings are refreshed in the RAM, i.e., the parameter change is activated immediately.
• The default settings of related parameters are changed.
• If multiple registers are written and only one data is invalid, all data sent are discarded.
If no Enter command is sent, parameter changes will be lost if the power is switched off.

◆ Issuing an Enter CommandIf parameters are changed from a PLC using MEMOBUS/Modbus communication the values are changed in the drive
RAM only. When the power is turned off all changes will be lost. An Enter command can be sent to save changes inthe EEPROM (non-volatile memory) and thereby prevent the loss of parameter settings. In order to perform an Entercommand "0" must be written in register number 900H. This register is "write only".
Table C.6  Enter Command
Register No.
0900H

Description
Writes data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Parameter changes remain even if the power supply is cycled.

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Note: 1. Because the EEPROM can be written to a maximum of 100,000 times, refrain from writing to the EEPROM too often. The Entercommand registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers are read, then the register address will be invalid (Error code:
02H). An Enter command is not required if reference or broadcast data are sent to the drive.
2. Parameter data cannot be written to EEPROM during undervoltage, even using 0900H.
3. If undervoltage occurs when a making several parameter changes issued with a single ENTER command, the writing process may
be aborted before all of the new changes have been written. Because all of the data has not yet been written, the EEPROM data
error “CPF06” will be displayed the next time power to the drive is cycled. To prevent this problem, wait approximately 5 second
safter issuing the ENTER command before shutting off drive power.

C219

C.12  Communication Errors

C.12 Communication Errors◆ MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes
A list of MEMOBUS/Modbus errors appears below.
When an error occurs, remove whatever caused the error and restart communications.
Error Name

Error Code
01H

Cause
Function Code Error• Attempted to set a function code from a PLC other than 03H, 08H, and 10H.
Register Number Error

02H• A register number specified in the command message does not exist.
• Attempted to send a broadcast message using other register numbers than 0001H or 0002H.
Bit Count Error

03H• Read data or write data is greater than 16 bits. Invalid command message quantity.
• In a write message, the “Number of Data Items” contained within the message does not equal twice the amount of data words (i.e.,
the total of Data 1+ Data 2, etc.).
Data Setting Error

21H• Control data or parameter write data is outside the allowable setting range.
• Attempted to write a contradictory parameter setting.
Write Mode Error

22H• Attempted to write while the drive was operating to a parameter that cannot be written to during run.
• During an EEPROM data error (CPF06), the master attempted to write to a parameter other than A1-00 to -05, E1-03, or o2-04.
• Attempted to write to read-only data.
DC Bus Undervoltage Write Error

23H• Attempted to write from the master during an undervoltage fault (Uv1).
• Attempted to execute and Enter command during Uv1.

24H

Write Error During Parameter Process• Master attempted writing to the drive while the drive was processing parameter data.

◆ Slave Not Responding
In the following situations, the slave drive will ignore the command message sent from the master, and not send a
response message:• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the drive do not match (remember to
set the slave address for the drive using H5-01).
• When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Note: If the slave address specified in the command message is 00H, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response
messages to the master.

220

C.13  Self-Diagnostics

C.13 Self-Diagnostics
The drive has a built-in self-diagnosing function of the serial communication interface circuits. To perform the selfdiagnosis function, use the following procedure.
DANGER! Electrical Shock Hazard. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious
injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned
off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after
all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.

1. Turn on the power to the drive.
2. Note the present terminal S5 function selection setting (H1-05) and set it for the communications test mode
(H1-05 = 67).
3. Turn off the power to the drive.
4. With the power off, wire the drive as shown in the figures below.
5. Check and note the setting of DIP switch S3. Set it to NPN if it is in the PNP position.
6. Attach the SI-485/J option to the drive. Wire R+ and S+, R- and S-.

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

SC

A1 +V

AC AM AC

MA

MB

MC

Figure C.9  Terminal Connections for Communication Self-Diagnostics

S– S+ IG R– R+

7. Turn on the drive.
8. During normal operation, the drive will display PASS. This indicates that the communications test mode isoperating normally.
When a fault occurs, the drive will display “CE” on the keypad display.
9. Turn off the power supply.
10. Remove the wire jumpers from terminal R+, R-, S+, S- and, S5-SC and set back DIP switch S3 to its original
position. Set terminal S5 to its original function.
11. Return to normal operation.

MEMOBUS/Modbus
Communications

Figure C.10   Terminal Connections for Communication Self-Diagnostics

C221

C.13  Self-Diagnostics

This Page Intentionally Blank

222

Appendix: DStandards ComplianceThis appendix explains the guidelines and criteria for maintaining CE and UL standards.

D.1 SECTION SAFETY................................................................................................. 224
D.2 EUROPEAN STANDARDS..................................................................................... 226
D.3 UL STANDARDS.................................................................................................... 233

223

D.1  Section Safety

D.1 Section Safety
DANGER

Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers
or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not touch any terminals before the capacitors have fully discharged.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Before wiring terminals, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the
power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To
prevent electric shock, wait at least one minute after all indicators are off and measure the DC bus voltage level toconfirm safe level.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to perform work on the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Installation, maintenance, inspection, and servicing must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar withinstallation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginningwork on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.

Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.
Do not use an improper voltage source.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power.
Do not use improper combustible materials.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire.
Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this manual.
Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The device is suitable for use on acircuit capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac
maximum (400 V class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual.

224D.1  Section Safety

NOTICE

Standards ComplianceObserve proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring.
Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires
and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Sumitomo is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting otherdevices.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.

D

225

D.2  European Standards

D.2 European Standards

Figure D.1  CE MarkThe CE mark indicates compliance with European safety and environmental regulations and is required for engaging
in business and commerce in Europe.
European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive forelectronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for controlling noise.
This drive displays the CE mark based on the EMC guidelines and the Low Voltage Directive.
• EMC Guidelines: 2004/108/EC• Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95/EC◆ CE Low Voltage Directive ComplianceThis drive has been tested according to IEC/EN 61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive withother devices:■ Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than severity 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with IEC/
EN 664.

■ Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
Sumitomo recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to maintain compliancewith UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred. Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also
listed in Table D.1.
NOTICE: If a fuse is blown or an Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELCB) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to
identify the cause. Contact Yaskawa before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
Table D.1  Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection
Fuse Type
Drive Model

Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model

Fuse Ampere Rating (A)Single-Phase 200 V Class

SF520S-A20

FWH-25A14F

25

SF520S-A40

FWH-60B

60

SF520S-A75

FWH-80B

80

SF520S-1A5

FWH-100B

100

SF5202-A10

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-A20

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-A40

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-A75

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-1A5

FWH-70B

70

SF5202-2A2

FWH-70B

Three-Phase 200 V Class70
Three-Phase 400 V Class

226

SF5204-A20

FWH-40B

40

SF5204-A40

FWH-40B

40

SF5204-A75

FWH-50B

50

D.2  European Standards
Fuse Type
Drive Model

Manufacturer: Bussmann
Model

Fuse Ampere Rating (A)SF5204-1A5

FWH-70B

70

SF5204-2A2

FWH-70B

70■ Grounding
The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks.

■ CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input
Install the fuses in the following tables to meet CE standards.
DC power supply(converter)
Fuse

+
_

+1
_

U/ T1
V/ T2
W/ T3

M

SF-520

Fuse

+1
_

U/ T1
V/ T2
W/ T3

M

SF-520Figure D.2  Example of DC Power Supply Input (Two Drives Connected in Series)
Note: 1. When connecting multiple drives together, make sure that each drive has its own fuse. Replace all fuses when one fuse blows.
2. Refer to on page 34 for an AC power supply.
3. The recommended fuses and fuse holders are made by Fuji Electric.
Table D.2  Single-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders
DC Power Supply Input
Fuse

Fuse Holder
Manufacturer: Fuji Electric

Type
A20

CR6L-30/UL

A40

CR6L-50/UL

A75

CR6L-75/UL

1A5

CR6L-100/UL

Rated Short Circuit
Braking Current﻿
(kA)

Qty.

Type

Qty.

CMS-4
100

2

CMS-4
CMS-5

2

CMS-5

Standards Compliance

Drive Model
SF520S

D227

D.2  European Standards
Table D.3  Three-Phase 200 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders
DC Power Supply Input
Fuse

Fuse Holder
Manufacturer: Fuji Electric

Drive Model
SF5202

Rated Short Circuit
Braking Current﻿
(kA)

Type

Qty.

Type

A20

CR6L-20/UL

CMS-4

A40

CR6L-20/UL

CMS-4

A75

CR6L-20/UL

1A5

CR6L-30/UL

2A2

CR6L-50/UL

CMS-4

3A7

CR6L-50/UL

CMS-4

100

2

Qty.

CMS-4

2

CMS-4

Table D.4  Three-Phase 400 V Class Fuses and Fuse Holders
DC Power Supply Input
Fuse

Fuse Holder
Manufacturer: Fuji Electric

Drive Model
SF5204Type

Rated Short Circuit
Braking Current﻿
(kA)

Qty.

Type

A20

CR6L-20/UL

A40

CR6L-20/UL

A75

CR6L-50/UL

1A5

CR6L-50/UL

CMS-4

2A2

CR6L-50/UL

CMS-4

Qty.

CMS-4
CMS-4
100

2

CMS-4

2

■ Guarding Against Harmful Materials
When installing IP20/Open-Chassis enclosure drives, use an enclosure that prevents foreign material from entering
the drive from above or below.

◆ EMC Guidelines ComplianceThis drive is tested according to IEC/EN 61800-3 and it complies with the EMC guidelines.

■ EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with guidelines. Refer to EMC Filters on
page 231 for EMC filter selection.
Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination withthis drive also comply with EMC guidelines.
1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Sumitomo for compliance with European standards.
2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure.
3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or run the wiring through a metal conduit.
4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side.

228

D.2  European Standards
B
A

U/T1

D

C

U

V/T2

V

W/T3

W

M

E

D – Metal conduit
E – Ground wire should be as short as
possible.

A – DriveB – 20 m max cable length between
drive and motor
C – Motor

Figure D.3  Installation Method

5. Ground the largest possible surface area of the shield to the metal conduit when using braided shield cable.
Yaskawa recommends using a cable clamp.
AC

C – Cable clamp (conductive)
Figure D.4  Ground Area

Standards Compliance

A – Braided shield cableB – Metal panel

B

D

229

D.2  European Standards
Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class
L3

L2

L1
PE
PE

C

D

B

E
L3 L2 L1

J

E

D
I

F

H

A
G

A – Ground the cable shield
B – Enclosure panel
C – Metal plate
D – Grounding surface (remove any
paint or sealant)
E – DriveF – Motor cable (braided shield cable,
max. 20 m)
G – Motor
H – Cable clamp
I – Wiring distance as short as
possibleJ – EMC noise filter

Figure D.5  EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance﻿(Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class)230

D.2  European Standards
Single-Phase 200 V Class
N

L1
PE PE

C

D

B

E
N L1

J

E

D
I

F

H

A
G

A – Ground the cable shield
B – Enclosure panel
C – Metal plate
D – Grounding surface (remove any
paint or sealant)
E – DriveF – Motor cable (braided shield cable,
max. 20 m)
G – Motor
H – Cable clamp
I – Wiring distance as short as
possibleJ – EMC noise filter

Figure D.6  EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Single-Phase 200 V Class)■ EMC Filters
The drive should be installed with the EMC filters listed below in order to comply with the IEC/EN 61800-3, category
C1 requirements.
Table D.5  IEC/EN 61800-3 Category C1 Filters
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive﻿Model

Type

Rated﻿
Current﻿
(A)

Weight﻿(kg)

SF520S-A20

FS23638-10-07

10

0.44

SF520S-A40

FS23638-10-07

10SF520S-A75

FS23638-20-07

20SF520S-1A5

FS23638-20-07

20

Mounting﻿
Dimensions﻿[Y x X] (mm)Drive﻿
Mounting﻿
Screw A

Filter﻿
Mounting﻿
Screw

71 x 169 x 45

51 x 156

M4

M5

0.44

71 x 169 x 45

51 x 156

M4

M5

0.75

111 x 169 x 50

91 x 156

M4

M5

0.75

111 x 169 x 50

91 x 156

M4

M5

Dimensions﻿[W x L x H] (mm)Standards Compliance

200 V Single-Phase Units

200 V Three-Phase Units
SF5202-A10

FS23637-8-07

80.4

71 x 169 x 40

51 x 156

M4

M5SF5202-A20

FS23637-8-07

80.4

71 x 169 x 40

51 x 156

M4

M5SF5202-A40

FS23637-8-07

80.4

71 x 169 x 40

51 x 156

M4

M5SF5202-A75

FS23637-8-07

80.4

71 x 169 x 40

51 x 156

M4

M5SF5202-1A5

FS23637-14-07

14

0.6

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5SF5202-2A2

FS23637-14-07

14

0.6

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

D

231

D.2  European Standards
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
Drive﻿Model

Type

Rated﻿
Current﻿
(A)

Weight﻿(kg)

SF5204-A20

FS23639-5-075

0.5

SF5204-A40

FS23639-5-07

5SF5204-A75

FS23639-5-07

5SF5204-1A5

FS23639-10-07

SF5204-2A2

FS23639-10-07

Mounting﻿
Dimensions﻿[Y x X] (mm)Drive﻿
Mounting﻿
Screw A

Filter﻿
Mounting﻿
Screw

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

0.5

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

0.5

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

10

0.7

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

10

0.7

111 x 169 x 45

91 x 156

M4

M5

Dimensions﻿[W x L x H] (mm)400 V Three-Phase Units

W
Y

H

L
X

LINE

LOAD

A
PE

Figure D.7  EMC Filter Dimensions■ D Reactors for IEC/EN 61000-3-2 Compliance
Table D.6  DC Reactors for Harmonics Reduction
Drive Model

DC Reactor
Model

Rating200V Three-Phase Units
SF5202-A40
SF5202-A75

UZDA-B

5.4 A
8 mH

400 V Three-Phase Units
SF5204-A40
SF5204-A75

UZDA-B

Note: Models not listed in the above table do not require a DC reactor for EMC compliance.

232

3.2 A
28 mH

D.3  UL Standards

D.3 UL Standards◆ UL Standards Compliance
The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada indicates that UL has performed producttesting and evaluation and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a
product to receive UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification.

Figure D.8  UL/cUL MarkThis drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C, E131457 and complies with UL requirements. The
following conditions must be met to maintain compliance when using this drive in combination with otherequipment:■ Installation Area
Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution severity 2 (UL standard).

■ Ambient Temperature
IP20/IP00 Open-Chassis enclosure: -10 °C to +50 °C■ Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
Sumitomo recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires theuse of UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals. Use only the tools
recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. The wire gauges listed in Table D.7, Table D.8, and Table
D.9 are Sumitomo recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections.
Drive
Model
SF520S

A20
A40
A75

1A5

2A2

For Japan and Asia <1>
Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

For United States <2>

Wire Range
mm2

Recomm.
Gauge
AWG, kcmil

20.75 to 2

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

, 1, 2
B1, B2For Europe and China <3>

Wire Range
AWG, kcmil

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

0.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2–

18 to 14–0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2–

18 to 14–0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

2

2 to 5.5

12

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6, 1, 22

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

B1, B22

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

3.5

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

3.5

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6, 1, 2

3.5

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5–

14 to 10–

2.5 to 6

3.5

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

Terminal

B1, B2

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0(7.1 to 8.9)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.

Standards Compliance

Table D.7  Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications

D233

D.3  UL Standards
Table D.8  Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
SF5202

A10
A20
A40
A75

1A5

2A2

For Japan and Asia <1>
Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

For United States <2>

Wire Range
mm2

Recomm.
Gauge
AWG, kcmil

20.75 to 2

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

, 1, 2
B1, B2For Europe and China <3>

Wire Range
AWG, kcmil

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

0.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2-

18 to 14-0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2-

18 to 14-0.75 to 2.5

20.75 to 2

14

18 to 142.5

0.75 to 2.5

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6, 1, 22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

B1, B22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

2

2 to 5.5

12

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6, 1, 22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

B1, B22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

Terminal

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M3.5

0.8 to 1.0(7.1 to 8.9)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

Screw
Size

Tightening
TorqueN•m (lb.in.)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)

M4

1.2 to 1.5(10.6 to 13.3)<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.
Table D.9  Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications
Drive
Model
SF5204

A20
A40
A75

1A5
2A2

234

For Japan and Asia <1>
Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

For United States <2>

Wire Range
mm2

Recomm.
Gauge
AWG, kcmil

2

2 to 5.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

, 1, 22

B1, B2For Europe and China <3>

Wire Range
AWG, kcmil

Recomm.
Gauge
mm2

Wire Range
mm2

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

2

2 to 5.5

14

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6, 1, 22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

B1, B22

2 to 5.5-

14 to 10-

2.5 to 6

2

2 to 5.5

10

14 to 102.5

2.5 to 6

Terminal

D.3  UL Standards<1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan and Asia.
<2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States.
<3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China.
Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowabletemperature of 75 °C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Ambient temperature should not exceed 30 °C.

Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations
Sumitomo recommends crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP for the insulation cap. Table D.10 matches
drives models with crimp terminals and insulation caps.
Table D.10  Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size
Wire Gauge AWG
Drive Model

R/L1, S/L2,﻿
T/L3

U/T1, V/T2,﻿
W/T3

Terminal﻿
ScrewsCrimp﻿
Terminal﻿
Model No.

Tool
Machine No.

Die Jaw

Insulation Cap﻿Model No.

AD-900TP-003200 V Class Single-Phase Drives
16

SF5202-A20
SF5202-A40

M3.5

14 <1>
14 <1>

SF5202-A75

R2-3.5

YA-4

R2-4

12

M4

10
SF5202-1A5

R1.25-3.5

14

14 <1>

12 <1>

12

10

10

R5.5-4TP-003
YA-4

AD-900R2-4
M4

R5.5-4TP-005TP-003

YA-4

AD-900

YA-4

AD-900

YA-4

AD-900TP-005200 V Class Three-Phase Drives
SF5202-A10
SF5202-A20
SF5202-A40
SF5202-A75

18
16

M3.5

14 <1>
12

R2-4
M4

10
14 <1>
SF5202-2A2

12

TP-003R2-3.5

14 <1>
SF5202-1A5

R1.25-3.5

R5.5-4TP-003

R2-4
M4

10

R5.5-4TP-005TP-003

YA-4

AD-900

YA-4

AD-900TP-005400 V Class Single-Phase Drives
14 <1>
12
10

R2-4
M4

R5.5-4TP-003TP-005

Standards Compliance

SF5204-A20
SF5204-A40
SF5204-A75

D235

D.3  UL Standards
Wire Gauge AWG
Drive Model

R/L1, S/L2,﻿
T/L3

U/T1, V/T2,﻿
W/T3

Terminal﻿
ScrewsCrimp﻿
Terminal﻿
Model No.

14 <1>
SF5204-1A5SF5204-2A2

12

Tool
Machine No.

Die Jaw

R2-4
M4

TP-003
YA-4

R5.5-4

10

Insulation Cap﻿Model No.

AD-900TP-005<1> Recommended wire gauge.
<2> All codes in the far right column of the table above refer to a set including three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Input andoutput wiring must be prepared by the user. Two sets should be used for each terminal connection.
Note: Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2%of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amountof voltage drop:Line drop voltage (V) = √3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3

■ Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
Sumitomo recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to maintain compliancewith UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred. Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also
listed in Table D.11.
Branch circuit protection shall be provided by any of the following:• Non-time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 300% of the drive input rating
Note: The following model/fuse combinations are excluded from the preceding statement: SF5202-A20/A6T6, SF5202-A40/A6T15,
SF5204-A75/A6T15, SF5204-1A5/A6T20, and SF5204-2A2/A6T25.

• Time delay Class J, T, or CC fuses sized at 175% of the drive input rating• Time-delay Class RK5 fuses sized at 225% of the drive input rating
Table D.11  Factory Recommended Drive Branch Circuit Protection

Drive Model

Non-Time Delay﻿
Class T Fuse Type﻿(Manufacturer: Ferraz)﻿
Rated Voltage:﻿
600 Vac, 200 kAIR

SF520S-A20

A6T10

10

FWH-25A14F

25

SF520S-A40

A6T20

20

FWH-60B

60

Fuse Ampere Rating﻿
(A)

Fuse Type﻿(Manufacturer: Bussmann)﻿
Rated Voltage:﻿
500 Vac, 200 kAIR

Fuse Ampere Rating﻿(A)

200 V Class Single-Phase Drives

SF520S-A75

A6T40

40

FWH-80B

80

SF520S-1A5

A6T40

40

FWH-100B

100

SF5202-A10

A6T3

3

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-A20

A6T6

6

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-A40

A6T15

15

FWH-25A14F

25

200 V Class Three-Phase Drives

SF5202-A75

A6T20

20

FWH-25A14F

25

SF5202-1A5

A6T25

25

FWH-70B

70

SF5202-2A2

A6T25

25

FWH-70B

70

3

FWH-40B

40

400 V Class Three-Phase Drives
SF5204-A20

236

A6T3

SF5204-A40

A6T6

6

FWH-40B

40

SF5204-A75

A6T15

15

FWH-50B

50

SF5204-1A5

A6T20

20

FWH-70B

70

SF5204-2A2

A6T25

25

FWH-70B

70

D.3  UL Standards■ Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals
Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. The
external power supply shall be a UL-Listed Class 2 power source or equivalent.
Table D.12  Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply
Input / Output

Terminal Signal

Power Supply Specifications

Multi-function digital inputs

S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, SC

Use the internal power supply of the drive. Use class 2 forexternal power supply.

Main frequency reference+V, A1, AC

Use the internal power supply of the drive. Use class 2 forexternal power supply.

■ Drive Short-Circuit RatingThis drive has undergone the UL short-circuit test, which certifies that during a short circuit in the power supply thecurrent flow will not rise above 31,000 amps maximum at 240 V for 200 V class drives and 480 V for 400 V class drives.
• The MCB and breaker protection and fuse ratings shall be equal to or greater than the short-circuit tolerance ofthe power supply being used.
• Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 31,000 RMS symmetrical amperes for 240 V in 200
V class drives (up to 480 V for 400 V class drives) motor overload protection.

◆ Drive Motor Overload Protection
Set parameter L1-08 (Electrothermal level setting) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. Theinternal motor overload protection is UL listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.

■ L1-08: Electrothermal Level Setting
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent
Parameter L1-08 (Electrothermal level setting) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0 (default is 1,
standard induction motor protection enabled).

■ L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection
The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current and output frequency,
which protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does
not require an external thermal overload relay for single motor operation.
This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table D.13  Overload Protection Settings
Description

0

Disabled

1

General Purpose Motor (Standard Fan-Cooled) (default)

2

Drive Dedicated Motor with a Speed Range of 1:10

Disable the electronic overload protection (L1-01 = 0: Disabled) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal
overload when connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation.
Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = 1 or 2) when connecting the drive to a single motor unless there isanother means of preventing motor thermal overload. The electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault,
which shuts off the output of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature iscontinually calculated as long as the drive is powered up.
Setting L1-01 = 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated (base) speed when running at 100%
load. The oL1 function derates the motor when it is running below base speed.
Setting L1-01 = 2 selects a motor capable of cooling itself over a 10:1 speed range when running at 100% load. The
oL1 function derates the motor when it is running at 1/10 or less of its rated speed.

Standards Compliance

SettingD

237

D.3  UL Standards■ L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 Minutes
Factory Default: 1.0 Minutes
The L1-02 parameter sets the allowed operation time before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is running at 60 Hz
and 150% of the full load amp rating (L1-08) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1 curves
up the Y-axis of the diagram below but will not change the shape of the curves.
Operation time (minutes)

107
Cold start(characteristics when an
overload occurs at acomplete stop)3
1

Hot start(characteristics when an
overload occurs duringcontinuous operation at 100%)

0.4
0.1
0

100

150

200

Motor current (%)
L1-08 = 100% motor current

Figure D.9  Motor Overload Protection Time238

Appendix: E
Quick Reference Sheet
The following tables have been provided for the user’s convenience. Fill in the cells thathave been left blank as is appropriate for your drive, and keep this information as a quickreference guide for drive and motor data as well as parameter settings.

E.1 DRIVE AND MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS................................................................. 240
E.2 BASIC PARAMETER SETTINGS............................................................................ 241
E.3 USER SETTING TABLE.......................................................................................... 242

239

E.1  Drive and Motor Specifications

E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications
A separate record should be kept that lists drive specifications and motor specifications.
AC drive modelMax. applicable motor
Input specifications
Output specifications
Mass
Lot number
Serial number

Software version

Enclosure type◆ Drive
Items

Description

Model
Serial Number
Software Version (PRG)
Date of Usage◆ Motor
Items

Description

Items

Manufacturer

Motor RatedCurrent

Model

A
Hz

Motor Rated PowerkW

Number of MotorPoles

Motor Rated Voltage

V

Motor Base Speed

240

Descriptionr/minE.2  Basic Parameter Settings

E.2 Basic Parameter Settings
Use the following tables to keep records of the most important parameters. Have these data available whencontacting Yaskawa technical support.

◆ Basic Setup
Item
Control Mode

A1-02 =

Normal/Heavy Duty Selection

C6-01 =

Frequency Reference Source

b1-01 =Run Command Source

b1-02 =

Setting Value

Memo

Setting Value

Memo

Setting ValueMemo◆ V/f Pattern Setup
Item
V/f Pattern Selection

E1-03 =

Maximum Output Frequency

E1-04 =

Maximum Voltage

E1-05 =

Base Frequency

E1-06 =

Middle Output Frequency

E1-07 =

Mid. Output Freq. Voltage

E1-08 =

Minimum Output Frequency

E1-09 =

Min. Output Freq. Voltage

E1-10 =

◆ Motor Setup
Item
Motor Rated Current

E2-01 =

Motor Rated Slip

E2-02 =

Motor No-Load Current

E2-03 =

Line-to-Line ResistanceE2-05 =◆ Multi-Function Digital Outputs (SC Common)
Terminal

Used/﻿
Reserved

Setting Value and Function Name

S1

H1-01 =

S2

H1-02 =

S3

H1-03 =

S4

H1-04 =

S5

H1-05 =Memo

◆ Multi-Function Digital Outputs (MC Common)
Used/﻿
Reserved

MA-MB

Setting Value and Function Name

Memo

H2-01 =

Quick Reference Sheet

Terminal◆ Monitor Outputs (AC Common)
Terminal
AM

Used/﻿
Reserved

Setting Value and Function Name

Memo

H4-01 =

E241

E.3  User Setting Table

E.3 User Setting Table
No.

242

Name

User﻿
Setting

No.

Name

A1-01

Access Level Selection

E1-07

Mid Output Frequency

A1-03

Initialize Parameters

E1-08

Mid Output Frequency Voltage

A1-04

Password

E1-09

Minimum Output Frequency

A1-05

Password Setting

E1-10

Minimum Output Frequency Voltage

b1-01

Frequency Reference Selection 1

E2-01

Motor Rated Current

b1-02

Run Command Selection 1

E2-02

Motor Rated Slipb1-03

Stopping Method Selection

E2-03

Motor No-Load Current

b1-04

Reverse Operation Selection

E2-05

Motor Line-to-Line Resistanceb1-07

Local/Remote Run Selection

b1-08

Run Command Selection while in
Programming Mode

H1-01

Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S1
Function Selection

b1-14

Phase Order Selection

H1-02

Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S2Function Selection

b1-17

Run Command at Power Up

b2-02

DC Injection Braking Current

H1-03

Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S3
Function Selection

b2-03

DC Injection Braking Time/DC Excitation
Time at Start

H1-04

Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S4Function Selection

b2-04

DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

C1-01

Acceleration Time 1

H1-05

Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal S5
Function Selection

C1-02

Deceleration Time 1

C1-03

Acceleration Time 2

H2-01

Terminal MA, MB and MC Function
Selection (relay)

C1-04

Deceleration Time 2

H3-01

Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection

C1-09

Fast-Stop Time

H3-03

Terminal A1 Gain Setting

C2-01

S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start

H3-04

Terminal A1 Bias Setting

C2-02

S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End

H3-13

Analog Input Filter Time Constant

C2-03

S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start

C2-04

S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End

H4-01

Multi-Function Analog Output (Terminal
AM Monitor Selection)

C3-01

Slip Compensation Gain

C3-02

Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time

H4-02

Multi-Function Analog Output (Terminal
AM Output Gain)

C4-01

Torque Compensation Gain

C6-01

Duty Mode Selection

H4-03

Multi-Function Analog Output (Terminal
AM Output Bias)

C6-02

Carrier Frequency Selection

H5-01

Drive Node Address

C6-03

Carrier Frequency Upper Limit

H5-02

Communication Speed Selection

C6-04

Carrier Frequency Lower Limit

H5-03

Communication Parity Selection

C6-05

Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain

d1-01

Frequency Reference 1

H5-04

Stopping Method After Communication
Error

d1-02

Frequency Reference 2

H5-05

Communication Fault Detection Selection

d1-03

Frequency Reference 3

H5-06

Drive Transmit Wait Time

d1-04

Frequency Reference 4

H5-07

RTS Control Selection

d1-05

Frequency Reference 5

H5-12

Run Command Method Selection

d1-06

Frequency Reference 6

d1-07

Frequency Reference 7

H5-13

MEMOBUS Frequency Reference andFrequency Monitor Unit

d1-08

Frequency Reference 8

L1-01

Motor Overload Protection Selection

d1-17

Jog Frequency Reference

L1-02

Motor Overload Protection Time

d2-01

Frequency Reference Upper Limit

L1-08

Electrothermal Level Setting

d2-02

Frequency Reference Lower Limit

d3-01

Jump Frequency 1

L1-13

Continuous Electrothermal Operation
Selection

d3-02

Jump Frequency 2

L2-01

Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection

d3-04

Jump Frequency Width

L3-01

Stall Prevention Selection during Accel.

d4-01

Frequency Reference Hold Function
Selection

L3-02

Stall Prevention Level during Accel.

E1-01

Input Voltage Setting

L3-04

Stall Prevention Selection during
Deceleration

E1-03

V/f Pattern Selection

L3-05

Stall Prevention Selection during Run

E1-04

Max Output Frequency

L3-06

Stall Prevention Level during Run

E1-05

Max Voltage

E1-06

Base Frequency

User﻿
SettingE.3  User Setting Table
Name

User﻿
Setting

No.

Name

L4-01

Speed Agreement Detection Level

o2-02

STOP Key Function Selection

L4-07

Frequency Detection Conditions

o2-04

Drive/kVA Selection

L5-01

Number of Auto Restart Attempts

o2-05

Frequency Reference Setting Method
Selection

L6-01

Torque Detection Selection 1

o2-09

Initialization Mode

L6-02

Torque Detection Level 1

o3-01

Copy Function Selection

L6-03

Torque Detection Time 1

o3-02

Copy Allowed Selection

L8-05

Input Phase Loss Protection Selection

o4-01

Accumulated Operation Time Setting

L8-10

Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection

o4-02

Accumulated Operation Time Selection

L8-12

Ambient Temperature Setting

L8-18

Soft Current Limit Selection

o4-03

Cooling Fan Maintenance Setting(OperationTime)

L8-35

Side-by-Side Selection

o4-05

Capacitor Maintenance Setting

L8-38

Carrier Frequency Reduction

n1-02

Hunting Prevention Gain Settingo4-07

DC Bus Pre-Charge Relay Maintenance
Settingn3-13Overexcitation Deceleration Gain

o4-09

IGBT Maintenance Setting

o1-02

User Monitor Selection After Power Up

o4-11

U2 Initialization

o1-03

Digital Operator Display Selection

User﻿
Setting

Quick Reference Sheet

No.

E

243

E.3  User Setting Table

This Page Intentionally Blank

244

Appendix: F
Warranty

Warranty

F.1 WARRANTY.......................................................................................................... 246

F
245

F.1  Warranty

F.1 Warranty
Warranty policy on invertar
Warranty The warranty period is 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months after initial operation, whichever
period comes first.
In the event that any problem or damage to the Product arises during the "Warranty Period" fromdefects in the Product whenever the Product is properly installed and combined with the Buyer's
equipment or machines maintained as specified in the maintenance manual, and properly operated
under the conditions described in the catalog or as otherwise agreed upon in writing between the
Seller and Buyer or its customers; the Seller will provide, at its sole discretion, appropriate repair
Warranty or replacement of the Product without charge at a designated facility, except as stipulated in thecondition "Warranty Exclusions" as described below.
However, if the Product is installed or integrated into the Buyer's equipment or machines, the Seller
shall not reimburse the cost of: removal or reinstallation of the Product or other incidental costs related
thereto, any lost opportunity, any profit loss or other incidental or consequential losses or damages
incurred by the Buyer or its customers.
Not withstanding the above warranty, the warranty as set forth herein shall not apply to any problem or
damage to the Product that is caused by:
1. Installation, connection, combination or integration of the Product in or to the other equipment or
machine that rendered by any person or entity other than the Seller.
2. Insufficient maintenance or improper operation by the Buyer or its customers such that the Productis not maintained in accordance with the maintenance manual provided or designated by the Seller;
3. Improper use or operation of the Product by the Buyer or its customers that is not informed to theSeller, including, without limitation, the Buyer's or its customers' operation of the Product not in
conformity with the specifications;
Warranty
4. Any problem or damage on any equipment or machine to which the Product is installed, connected
exclusinor combined or any specifications particular to the buyer or its customers;
5. Any changes, modifications, improvements or alterations to the Product or those functions that are
rendered on the Product by any person or entity other than the Seller;
6. Any parts in the Product that are supplied or designated by the Buyer or its customers;
7. Earthquake, fire, flood, salt air, gas, lightning, acts of God or any other reasons beyond the control of
the Seller;
8. Normal wear and tear, or deterioration of the Product's parts, such as the cooling fan bearings;
9. Any other troubles, problems or damage to the Product that are not attributable to the Seller.
Others246

The Seller will not be responsibility for the installation and removal of the inverter. Any invertertransportation cost shall be born by both Seller and Buyer.